CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1 2014/12/09 10:49:52

CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1 2014/12/09 10:49:52
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:49:52
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:50:09
A Word to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
Regular servicing of your vehicle by an expert repairer helps maintain both its
roadworthiness and its resale value. A world-wide network of Authorized Mazda Repairers
can help you with their professional servicing expertise.
Their specially trained personnel are best qualified to service your Mazda vehicle properly
and exactly. Also, they are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools and
equipment specially developed for servicing Mazda vehicles. When maintenance or service
is necessary we recommend an Authorized Mazda Repairer.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the earth's
ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries,…] may
contain Perchlorate Material-- Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2015 Mazda Motor Corporation
Feb. 2015 (Print1)
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:50:09
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
Illustrations complement the words of
the manual to best explain how to enjoy
your Mazda. By reading your manual, you
can find out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and
sometimes suggests how to make better
use of your vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
The symbol below in this manual means
"Do not do this" or "Do not let this
happen".
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information in
your manual.
You'll find several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:50:09
Table of Contents
Pictorial Index
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
Before Driving
3
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
When Driving
4
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Maintenance and Care
If Trouble Arises
7
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Technical information about your Mazda.
Index
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
5
6
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Specifications
2
8
9
10
2014/12/09 10:50:11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:50:11
1
Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Interior Overview............................................................................... 1-2
Interior Equipment (View A) ........................................................ 1-2
Interior Equipment (View B) ........................................................ 1-4
Interior Equipment (View C) ........................................................ 1-5
Exterior Overview .............................................................................. 1-6
1–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:50:11
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View A)
Door-lock knob ..................................................................................................... page 3-17
Turn and lane-change signal ................................................................................. page 4-46
Lighting control..................................................................................................... page 4-41
Wiper and washer lever ......................................................................................... page 4-47
TCS OFF switch.................................................................................................... page 4-60
Tire pressure monitoring system set switch ........................................................ page 4-129
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch................................................................... page 4-85
SCBS OFF switch ............................................................................................... page 4-108
LDWS switch ........................................................................................................ page 4-77
Outside mirror switch............................................................................................ page 3-28
Door-lock switch ................................................................................................... page 3-15
Power window lock switch ................................................................................... page 3-32
Power window switches ........................................................................................ page 3-30
1–2
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:50:11
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Audio control switches.......................................................................................... page 5-55
Instrument cluster.................................................................................................. page 4-12
Dashboard illumination knob ................................................................................ page 4-18
Cruise control switches ..............................................................................page 4-122, 4-97
Seat warmer switches .............................................................................................. page 2-5
Hazard warning flasher switch .............................................................................. page 4-53
Push button start ...................................................................................................... page 4-4
Steering shift switches .......................................................................................... page 4-33
Lock release lever ................................................................................................. page 3-27
Hood release handle .............................................................................................. page 6-24
Remote fuel-filler lid release ................................................................................. page 3-25
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
1–3
2014/12/09 10:50:12
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View B)
SRS air bags .......................................................................................................... page 2-35
Active driving display ........................................................................................... page 4-22
Climate control system............................................................................................ page 5-2
Rear window defogger switch............................................................................... page 4-52
Audio system......................................................................................................... page 5-14
CD player .............................................................................................................. page 5-14
Accessory sockets ............................................................................................... page 5-133
External input terminal.......................................................................................... page 5-57
Commander switch ............................................................................................... page 5-34
Drive selection switch ........................................................................................... page 4-65
Selector lever......................................................................................................... page 4-30
Fuse block (Left side) ........................................................................................... page 6-52
1–4
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:50:13
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View C)
Seat belts ............................................................................................................... page 2-10
SRS air bag............................................................................................................ page 2-35
Bottle holder........................................................................................................ page 5-135
Sunvisor .............................................................................................................. page 5-131
Vanity mirror ....................................................................................................... page 5-131
Overhead lights ................................................................................................... page 5-131
Moonroof switch ................................................................................................... page 3-33
Rearview mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-29
Glove compartment ............................................................................................. page 5-136
Parking brake ........................................................................................................ page 4-55
Cup holders ......................................................................................................... page 5-134
Front seat ................................................................................................................. page 2-4
Rear seat .................................................................................................................. page 2-6
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
1–5
2014/12/09 10:50:13
Pictorial Index
Exterior Overview
Hood ...................................................................................................................... page 6-24
Windshield wiper blades ....................................................................................... page 6-33
Moonroof .............................................................................................................. page 3-33
Doors and keys ...................................................................................................... page 3-11
Fuel-filler lid ......................................................................................................... page 3-25
Wheels and Tires ................................................................................................... page 6-41
Exterior lights........................................................................................................ page 6-45
Rear window wiper blade ..................................................................................... page 6-34
Liftgate .................................................................................................................. page 3-19
Child safety locks .................................................................................................. page 3-18
Outside mirror ....................................................................................................... page 3-28
1–6
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:50:13
2
Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
Seats..................................................................................................... 2-2
Seat Precautions ............................................................................ 2-2
Front Seat ...................................................................................... 2-4
Rear Seat ....................................................................................... 2-6
Head Restraints ............................................................................. 2-8
Seat Belt Systems.............................................................................. 2-10
Seat Belt Precautions .................................................................. 2-10
Seat Belt ...................................................................................... 2-13
Seat Belt Warning Systems ......................................................... 2-14
Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems .................... 2-14
Seat Belt Extender....................................................................... 2-16
Child Restraint ................................................................................. 2-18
Child-Restraint Precautions ........................................................ 2-18
Child-Restraint System Installation ............................................ 2-23
Installing Child-Restraint Systems ............................................. 2-24
SRS Air Bags .................................................................................... 2-35
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions .................... 2-35
Supplemental Restraint System Components ............................. 2-42
How the SRS Air Bags Work ...................................................... 2-44
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .............................................. 2-48
Limitations to SRS Air Bag ........................................................ 2-50
Front Passenger Occupant Classification System ....................... 2-52
Constant Monitoring ................................................................... 2-57
2–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:50:14
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Precautions
WARNING
Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In a
sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat
forward and backward and rocking the seatback.
Never allow children to adjust a seat:
Allowing children to adjust a seat is dangerous as it could result in serious injury if a
child's hands or feet become caught in the seat.
Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle. Leaving the
seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe
injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers,
rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Do not modify or replace the front seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening
any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplemental
restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if there
is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong enough
to inflate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag
components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy which could
lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats, front
seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.
Do not drive with either front seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you do not
get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide
under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well
back and upright.
2–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:50:14
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back:
Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back is dangerous
because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and the seat belt cannot
function at its full capacity in a collision, which could result in a serious accident, injury or
death.
Do not place objects under the seat:
The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fixed securely, and result in an
accident.
Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:
Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles that may hit and
injure passengers.
Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during
sudden braking or a collision and cause injury.
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving:
Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous. Allowing a child to sit up
on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a sudden
stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint system and
seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious
injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown into other occupants
and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
¾When operating a seat, be careful not to put your hands or fingers near the moving parts of
the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury.
¾When moving the seats, make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area. If the cargo
gets caught it could damage the cargo.
¾When returning a rear-reclined seatback of a front seat to its upright position, make sure
you hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the seatback
is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.
NOTE
When returning a rear seat to its original position, place the seat belt in its normal position.
Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts.
2–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:50:14
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Front Seat
Seat Operation
Seat Slide
To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired position
and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down.
Seat Recline
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever. Then lean back
to the desired position and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
2–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:50:14
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Warmer*
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition must be switched ON.
Press the seat warmer switch to illuminate
the indicator light while the ignition
is switched ON. The mode changes as
follows each time the seat warmer switch
is pressed.
OFF
High
Mid
Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moistureretention ability such as a blanket or
cushion on the seat:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not use the seat warmer even when
taking a short nap in the vehicle:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not place heavy objects with sharp
projections on the seat, or insert
needles or pins into it:
This could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in injury
from a minor burn.
Low
CAUTION
WARNING
Be careful when using the seat warmer:
The heat from the seat warmer may be
too hot for some people, as indicated
below, and could cause a lowtemperature burn.
¾Infants, small babies, elderly
people, and physically challenged
people
¾People with delicate skin
¾People who are excessively fatigued
¾People who are intoxicated
¾People who have taken sleep
inducing medicine such as sleeping
pills or cold medicine
Do not use organic solvents to clean
the seat. It may damage the seat
surface and the heater.
NOTE
yIf the ignition is switched off while the
seat warmer is operating (High, Mid or
Low) and then switched ON again, the
seat warmer will automatically operate
at the temperature set before switching
off the ignition.
yUse the seat warmer when the engine
is running. Leaving the seat warmer
on for long periods with the engine not
running could cause the battery power
to be depleted.
yThe temperature of the seat warmer
cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid
and Low because the seat warmer is
controlled by a thermostat.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2–5
2014/12/09 10:50:15
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Rear Seat
Split Folding the Seatback
By lowering the rear seatbacks the luggage
compartment space can be expanded.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with occupants
on folded down seatbacks or in the
luggage compartment.
Putting occupants in the luggage
compartment is dangerous because
seat belts cannot be fastened which
could lead to serious injury or death
during sudden braking or a collision.
Do not allow children to play inside the
vehicle with the seatbacks lowered.
Allowing children to play in the
vehicle with the seatbacks folded
down is dangerous. If a child enters
the luggage compartment and the
seatbacks were raised back up, the
child may become trapped in the
luggage compartment which could
lead to an accident.
Tightly secure cargo in the luggage
compartment when it is transported
with the seatbacks folded down.
Driving without tightly securing cargo
and luggage is dangerous as it could
move and become an obstruction to
driving during emergency braking or
a collision resulting in an unexpected
accident.
When transporting cargo, do not allow
the cargo to exceed the height of the
seatbacks.
Transporting cargo stacked higher
than the seatbacks is dangerous as
visibility to the rear and sides of the
vehicle is reduced which could interfere
with driving operations and lead to an
accident.
Lowering the seatbacks
CAUTION
¾When folding the seatback forward,
always support the seatback with your
hand. If it is not supported by a hand,
fingers or the hand pressing the push
knob could be injured.
¾Check the position of a front seat before
folding a rear seatback.
Depending on the position of a front
seat, it may not be possible to fold a rear
seatback all the way down because it
may hit the seatback of the front seat
which could scratch or damage the front
seat or its pocket. Remove the head
restraint on the rear outboard seat if
necessary.
2–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:50:15
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
1. Lower the head restraint all the way
down.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
2. Press the push knob to fold down the
seatback.
When returning a seatback to its
upright position, make sure that it is
firmly locked and the red indication is
not visible.
If the red indication is visible behind
the push knob, it means the seatback
is not locked. If the vehicle is driven
without the seatback locked, it could
fold down suddenly and cause an
accident.
Locked position
Push knob
To return the seatback to its upright
position:
Unlocked position
Red indication
WARNING
When returning a seatback to its
upright position, make sure the 3-point
seat belt is not caught in the seatback
and the 3-point seat belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt is used while it is twisted
and caught in the seatback, the seat
belt cannot function at its full capacity,
which could cause serious injury or
death.
1. Make sure that the seat belt passes
through the seat belt guide correctly
and it is not twisted, then raise the
seatback while preventing the seat belt
from being caught in the seatback.
Red indication
Seat belt guide
2. Press the seatback rearward and lock it
in place. After returning the seatback
to its upright position, make sure it is
securely locked.
2–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:50:15
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints on all outboard seats and the
rear center seat. The head restraints are
intended to help protect you and the
passengers from neck injury.
Height Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so that the center
is even with the top of the passenger's ears.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly adjusted.
In addition, always raise the head
restraints mentioned below when they
are being used:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be seriously
injured in a collision.
(Head restraints which must be raised
for use)
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stopcatch release, then push the head restraint
down.
Front outboard seat
¾All rear seat head restraints
2–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:50:16
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Rear outboard seat
Except Mexico
Removal/Installation
To remove the head restraint, pull it up
while pressing the stop-catch.
To install the head restraint, insert the legs
into the holes while pressing the stopcatch.
WARNING
Mexico
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly installed:
Driving with the head restraints not
installed is dangerous. With no support
behind your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
After installing a head restraint, try
lifting it to make sure that it does not
pull out:
Driving with an unsecured head
restraint is dangerous as the
effectiveness of the head restraint will
be compromised which could cause it
to unexpectedly detach from the seat.
CAUTION
Rear center seat
¾When installing a head restraint, make
sure that it is installed correctly with
the front of the head restraint facing
forward. If the head restraint is installed
incorrectly, it could detach from the seat
during a collision and result in injury.
¾The head restraints on each of the front
and rear seats are specialized to each
seat. Do not switch around the head
restraint positions. If a head restraint is
not installed to its correct seat position,
the effectiveness of the head restraint
during a collision will be compromised
which could cause injury.
2–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:50:16
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
(Except Mexico)
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way when
not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in
two modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking
mode. While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.
(Mexico)
All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. These belts have retractors with inertia locks that keep
them out of the way when not in use. The locks allow the belts to remain comfortable on
users, but they will lock in position during a collision.
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown out of
the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same collision, occupants
wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not available to
absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt, which could cause
serious injury or death. So, if your seat belt is twisted, you must straighten the seat belt to
remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt to be used.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
2–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:50:18
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt webbing
of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a
collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during an
accident before they are used again.
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been
expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the seat belt pretensioners
and air bags after any collision. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners and load
limiters will only function once and must be replaced after any collision that caused them
to deploy. A seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter is still better than
wearing no seat belt at all; however, if the seat belt pretensioners and load limiters are
not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase.
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous. Always make
sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear
the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep them
clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to "Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder
Belt Webbing" (page 6-65).
Ring
2–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:50:19
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Pregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your doctor
for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.
Emergency Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it out
slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again slowly.
(Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode)
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is
switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt
feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it
may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return
the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped
in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and
then extend it around you again.
Automatic Locking Mode*
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will retract
down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child restraint
(page 2-18).
2–12
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:50:20
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Unfastening the Seat Belt
Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Fastening the Seat Belt
Seat belt tongue
Seat belt
buckle
Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust the
shoulder belt so that it fits snugly against
your body.
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect
it for kinks and twists. If it is still not
retracting properly, have it inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Take up slack
Front Shoulder Belt Adjuster
Keep low on
hip bone
To raise
To lower
Too high
Make sure the adjuster is locked.
2–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:50:20
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Warning Systems
If it detects that the occupant seat belt
is unfastened, the warning light or beep
alerts the occupant.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-24.
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Beep on page
7-40.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
and Load Limiting
Systems
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Pretensioners:
When a collision is detected, the
pretensioners deploy simultaneously with
the air bags.
For vehicles with the front passenger
occupant classification system, the
pretensioners deploy simultaneously
with the air bags when a roll-over is also
detected.
For deployment details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-48).
The front seat belt retractors remove slack
quickly as the air bags are expanding.
Any time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have fired they must be
replaced.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-24.
Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Beep on
page 7-39.
2–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classification System)
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front and side
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy when the front passenger occupant
classification sensor detects a passenger
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
For details, refer to the front passenger
occupant classification sensor (page 2-52).
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and
can activate in any accident mode with
sufficient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,
the load limiting function must be checked
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended in
this owner's manual:
Incorrect positioning of the driver
and front passenger seat belts
is dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to "Fastening the seat belts"
(page 2-13).
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer immediately inspect the seat
belt pretensioners and air bags after
any collision. Like the air bags, the seat
belt pretensioners and load limiters
will only function once and must be
replaced after any collision that caused
them to deploy. A seat belt with an
expended pretensioner or load limiter
is still better than wearing no seat
belt at all; however, if the seat belt
pretensioners and load limiters are not
replaced, the risk of injury in a collision
will increase.
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices
is dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable which
would prevent it from activating in an
accident. The occupants or repairers
could be seriously injured.
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with nondeactivated pretensioners is
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury
could result. Have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer safely dispose of
the pretensioner system or scrap a
pretensioner system equipped vehicle.
2–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
NOTE
yThe pretensioner system may not
operate depending on the type of the
collision. For details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page
2-48).
ySome smoke (non-toxic gas) will
be released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not
indicate a fire. This gas normally has
no effect on occupants, however, those
with sensitive skin may experience
light skin irritation. If residue from the
deployment of the air bags or the front
pretensioner system gets on the skin
or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
Seat Belt Extender
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless it
is necessary:
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use the
extender when it is required to fasten
the seat belt properly.
2–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt will
not provide adequate protection and
the user could be seriously injured in
an accident. Only use the extender
provided for you and for the particular
vehicle and seat. NEVER use the
extender in a different vehicle or seat.
If you sell your Mazda, do not leave
your seat belt extender in the vehicle. It
could be used accidentally by the new
owner of the vehicle. After removing
the seat belt extender, discard it. Never
use the seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and the
center of the user's body is less than 15
cm (6 in).
Do not leave a seat belt extender
connected to the buckle:
Leaving a seat belt extender connected
to the buckle without using the seat
belt is dangerous. When the seat
belt extender is connected to the
driver's seat belt buckle (or front
passenger) seat, the SRS driver's (or
front passenger's) air bag system will
determine that the driver (or front
passenger) is wearing the seat belt
even if the driver (or front passenger)
is not wearing it. This condition could
cause the driver's (or front passenger's)
air bag to not activate correctly and
result in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Always wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when
installing a child-restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat:
Using a seat belt extender to fasten
a child-restraint system on any seat
is dangerous. Always follow the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions and never use
a seat belt extender.
NOTE
When not in use, remove the seat belt
extender and store it in the vehicle. If the
seat belt extender is left connected, the
seat belt extender might get damaged
as it will not retract with the rest of the
seat belt and can easily fall out of the
door when not in use and be damaged. In
addition, the seat belt warning light will
not illuminate and function properly.
2–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child-Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the
child is seated on the center seat.
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger occupant classification sensor work as a part of the supplemental restraint
system. This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the
front passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates.
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
For more details, refer to "Front passenger occupant classification sensor" (page 2-52).
2–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly
restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and size. If not, the
child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure any
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it
with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint
systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden
stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other
occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag forces that
could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be slammed into an
adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
2–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:50:22
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
(Except Mexico)
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below.
The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat at any time.
(Mexico)
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below.
The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat at any time.
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless it
is unavoidable:
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the
child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
2–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:50:23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous
under certain conditions (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System):
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger occupant classification sensor. Even with
the front passenger occupant classification sensor, if you must use the front passenger
seat to seat a child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the
following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and
could result in serious injury or death to the child.
¾The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when
seating a child in the child-restraint system.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
¾A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger
seatback.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
¾The seat is washed.
¾Liquids are spilled on the seat.
¾The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
¾The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
¾An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the
front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with
side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of the
front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both
sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint system
is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause serious injury
or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or against the front door
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the
front seat, the rear seat is always a better location for children. Take special care not to
allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
2–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:50:23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm
weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your child touches
them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a
child-restraint system, refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor" (page 2-31).
2–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:50:23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child-Restraint System
Installation
Infant seat
An infant seat provides restraint by
bracing the infant's head, neck and back
against the seating surface.
Child-Restraint System Types
In this owner's manual, explanation of
child-restraint systems is provided for the
following three types of popular childrestraint systems: infant seat, child seat,
booster seat.
NOTE
yInstallation position is determined
by the type of child-restraint system.
Always read the manufacturer's
instructions and this owner's manual
carefully.
yDue to variations in the design of child
restraint systems, vehicle seats and
seat belts, all child-restraint systems
may not fit all seating positions. Before
purchasing a child-restraint system, it
should be tested in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where it
is intended to be used. If a previously
purchased child-restraint system does
not fit, you may need to purchase a
different one that will.
Child seat
A child seat restrains a child's body using
the harness.
Booster seat
A booster seat is a child restraint accessory
designed to improve the fit of the seat belt
system around the child's body.
2–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:50:23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing childrestraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Even if your vehicle is equipped with
front passenger occupant classification
sensor (page 2-52), which automatically
deactivates the front passenger air bag, a
rear seat is the safest place for a child of
any age or size.
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers
to be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the three positions on
the rear seat.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor"
(page 2-31).
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury if
the child-restraint system goes forward
without benefit of being tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
Anchor Bracket
Anchor brackets for securing childrestraint systems are equipped in the
vehicle. Locate each anchor position using
the illustration.
To install a child-restraint system, remove
the head restraint. Always follow the
instruction manual accompanying the
child-restraint system.
Anchor bracket location
Use the indicated anchor bracket locations
when installing a child-restraint system
equipped with a tether.
For left
For center*
For right
* Except Mexico
2–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:50:23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Always attach the tether strap to
the correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Forward
Tether strap
Forward
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
Using Automatic Locking Mode*
Follow these instructions when using
a child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped childrestraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “Using LATCH Lower
Anchor” (page 2-31).
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
If you are not sure whether you have a
LATCH system or tether, check in the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
instructions and follow them accordingly.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may use LATCH system instead
of seat belts or if the belt goes across the
child's chest, may recommend against
using automatic locking mode.
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Remove the head restraint.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
3. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions
on the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
2–25
2014/12/09 10:50:24
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
4. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt out
of the retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the
belt fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
6. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap.
WARNING
5. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in the automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
2–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Forward
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
If You Must Use the Front Seat for
Children
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children
in the rear and be sure the largest child
up front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat whether
your vehicle is equipped with a occupant
classification sensor or not.
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the
side window since your vehicle has side
and curtain air bags, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant.
As children more often sleep in cars,
it is better to put them in the rear seat.
If installing the child-restraint system
on the front seat is unavoidable, follow
these instructions when using a frontfacing child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
2–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
NOTE
yTo check if your front seats have side air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air
bag will have a "SRS AIRBAG" tag on
the outboard shoulder of the front seats.
yTo check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain
air bag will have an "SRS AIRBAG"
marking on the window pillars along
the roof edge.
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags and
doubly so because your vehicle has
side air bags, a front-facing childrestraint system should be put on the
front passenger seat only when it is
unavoidable.
Even if the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates, always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force
of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit
by a deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
Even though you may feel assured
that the front passenger air bag will
not deploy based on the fact that the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates, you should
not use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat.
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean
over or against the side window of a
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean
over or against the side window, the
area of the front passenger seat, the
front and rear window pillars and the
roof edge along both sides from which
the side and curtain air bags deploy,
even if a child-restraint system is used.
The impact of inflation from a side or
curtain air bag could cause serious
injury or death to an out of position
child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block the
side and curtain air bags and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and
the additional side air bag that comes
out of the front seat, the rear seat is
always a better location for children.
Take special care not to allow a child to
lean over or against the side window,
even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
2–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
Front Passenger's Seat Child-Restraint
System Installation (With Front
Passenger Occupant Classification
System)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off.
2. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
3. Remove the head restraint.
4. Place the child-restraint system on the
seat without putting your weight on
the seat and fasten the seat belt. See
the manufacturer's instructions on the
child-restraint system for belt routing
instructions.
5. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
6. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will
be heard during retraction if the system
is in automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat the previous step and also this
one.
NOTE
yInspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt
out of the retractor while the system is
in the automatic locking mode. When
you remove the child-restraint system,
be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode
before occupants use the seat belts.
yFollow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts
which are in automatic locking mode.
7. Seat your child safely in the childrestraint system and secure the child
according to the instructions from the
child-restraint system manufacturer.
2–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
8. Switch the ignition ON and make sure
the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates after
installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate, remove the child-restraint
system, switch the ignition to OFF, and
then re-install the child-restraint system
(page 2-52).
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate:
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear seat,
it is imperative that a child-restraint
system ONLY be used on the front
passenger seat if the deactivation
indicator light illuminates when the
child is seated in the child-restraint
system (page 2-52). Seating a child
in a child-restraint system installed
on the front passenger seat with the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate, this means that the
front passenger front and side air
bags, and seat belt pretensioner are
ready for deployment. If an accident
were to deploy an air bag, a child in
a child-restraint system sitting in the
front passenger seat could be seriously
injured or killed. If the indicator light
does not illuminate after seating a
child in a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, seat a child
in a child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
2–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Using LATCH Lower Anchor
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you must
use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure the
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint system
attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the seat
position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is occupied,
use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the seat just as you
would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in an improperly secured
seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or
latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH childrestraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and the
child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could move in a
sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants.
When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no seat belts or foreign
objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Installation on rear outboard seats
1. First, adjust the front seat to allow
clearance between the child-restraint
system and the front seat (page 2-4).
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
3. Expand the open seams on the rear of
the seat bottom slightly to verify the
locations of the LATCH lower anchors.
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower
anchors indicate the locations of the
LATCH lower anchors for the attachment
of a child-restraint system.
4. Remove the head restraint.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
5. Secure the child-restraint system
using BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the
child-restraint to be sure both anchors
are engaged.
6. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that means it is
very important to properly secure the
tether for child safety. Please carefully
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions when
installing tethers.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Forward
2–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:50:26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
Installation on rear center seat
The LATCH lower anchors at the center
of the rear seat are much further apart
than the sets of LATCH lower anchors
for child-restraint system installation at
other seating positions. Child-restraint
systems with rigid LATCH attachments
cannot be installed on the center seating
position. Some LATCH equipped childrestraint systems can be placed in the
center position and will reach the nearest
LATCH lower anchors which are 360 mm
(14.2 in) apart. LATCH compatible childrestraint systems (with attachments on
belt webbing) can be used at this seating
position only if the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions state that the
child-restraint system can be installed to
LATCH lower anchors that are 360 mm
(14.2 in) apart. Do not attach two childrestraint systems to the same LATCH
lower anchor. If your child-restraint
system has a tether, it must also be used
for your child's optimum safety.
The procedure for installation on the rear
outboard seats is the same.
LATCH lower anchor location
2–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-8.
2–34
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Please
verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRS
AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags
are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
y
The
steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
y
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)*
y
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)*
y
The
Vehicles with the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System have a sensor which
detects an impending roll-over accident.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
y
Keep
the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.
the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
inflation, such as rear impact.
y
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags.
y
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
y
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
y
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
y
Reduce
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
2–35
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system,
refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System (page 2-52) for details.
If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system, the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after the
ignition is switched ON.
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-18).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow
the installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous. Alone,
air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be expected to
inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be hit
by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is more
likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate collision to the
front-passenger side of the vehicle. Whenever possible, always secure a child 12 years and
under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and
size.
2–36
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands or
feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags inflate with
great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver
should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The front seat passenger
should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as
far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn
properly.
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them, or sleeping up
against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The side and
curtain air bags inflate with great force and speed directly expanding along the door
on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the
door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front
seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting in the center of the
seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air bags
deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere with air
bag inflation and injure the occupants.
2–37
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous.
Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front seats.
Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules in your
front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge
and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the curtain
air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge,
impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting the air bag in
a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free to
deploy in the event of a side collision or roll-over accident.
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have
inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar, bull
bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The air bag
crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate unexpectedly,
or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident. Front occupants could
be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the suspension is
modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or roll-over accident
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
2–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
To prevent false detection by the air bag sensor system, heed the following:
¾Do not use tires or wheels other than those specified for your Mazda:
Use of any tire or wheel other than those specified for your Mazda (page 9-8) is
dangerous. Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle's accident detections system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
¾Do not overload your vehicle:
Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as it could prevent the air bag crash sensor
system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect
or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries. The gross axle
weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are
on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's door frame. Do not exceed
these ratings.
¾Do not drive the vehicle off-road:
Driving your Mazda off-road is dangerous because the vehicle has not been designed
to do so. Driving the vehicle off-road could prevent the air bag crash sensor system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door:
Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous. Each front
door has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system. If
holes are drilled in a front door, a door speaker is left removed, or a damaged door is left
unrepaired, the sensor could be adversely affected causing it to not detect the pressure
of an impact correctly during a side collision. If a sensor does not detect a side impact
correctly, the side and curtain air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner may not
operate normally which could result in serious injury to occupants.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is dangerous.
You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make any modifications
to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim, badges, or anything
else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra electrical equipment on or
near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda Dealer can provide the special
care needed in the removal and installation of front seats. It is important to protect the air
bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do not accidentally deploy, and that
the front passenger occupant classification system and the seats retain an undamaged
air bag connection.
2–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the supplemental
restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats.
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be
replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a trained
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they will work in
any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag or pretensioner
unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any subsequent accident
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steering wheel
or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air bag components. The air
bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer remove these parts.
Properly dispose of the air bag system:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely
dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
2–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
yIf it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to
“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)” (page 8-2).
yWhen an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be
released. Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause
light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
yShould you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems
and that familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is
important.
yThis highly-visible label is displayed which warns against the use of a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat.
(Except Mexico)
(Mexico)
2–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
2–42
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:50:27
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
(Without Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
Driver/Front passenger inflators and air bags
Roll-over sensor*, crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Seat belt pretensioners (page 2-14)
Front air bag sensors
Side crash sensors*
Air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 4-24)
Side and curtain inflators and air bags*
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light* (page 2-52)
Front passenger occupant classification sensor* (page 2-52)
Front passenger occupant classification module*
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
2–43
2014/12/09 10:50:28
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the SRS Air Bags Work
Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are
designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.
The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the
seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near
frontal collisions.
In addition, the pretensioners operate when a side collision (only on the side in which the
collision occurs) or a roll-over accident is detected. The pretensioners operate differently
depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner
operation, refer to the SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-48).
Driver Air Bag
The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheel.
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the
driver's air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest
caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-48).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity, the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.
2–44
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:50:28
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Air Bag
The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.
The inflation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag, as
mentioned above.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-48).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger
occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat. For
details, refer to the front passenger occupant classification system (page 2-52).
2–45
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
2014/12/09 10:50:28
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Side Air Bags*
The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
system inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side
air bag inflates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused by
directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-48).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In addition, the front passenger side bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger
occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat. For
details, refer to the front passenger occupant classification system (page 2-52).
2–46
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:50:28
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Curtain Air Bags*
The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge
along both sides.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
curtain air bag inflates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard
passenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-48).
In a side impact:
Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on that
side only to inflate.
Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the
side of the vehicle that receives the force of an
impact.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In a roll-over:
In response to a vehicle roll-over, both curtain air bags inflate.
Both curtain air bags will deploy after
the roll-over accident is detected.
Warning Light/Beep
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7-39.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 47
2–47
2014/12/09 10:50:28
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria
This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of
collision.
(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)
Types of collision
A severe frontal/near frontal
collision
A severe side
collision*2
A roll-over/near
roll-over*3
Front
seat belt
pretensioner
X*1 (both sides)
X*1 (impact side
only)
X*1 (both sides)
Driver air
bag
X
Front
passenger
air bag
X*1
A rear collision
SRS
equipment
No air bag and
front seat belt
pretensioner will be
activated in a rear
collision.
Side air bag*
X*1 (impact side
only)
Curtain air
bag*
X (impact side
only)
X (both sides)
X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.
*1 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the front
passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat.
*2 (With Side/Curtain Air Bags)
In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side/curtain air bags deploy (only on the side in which the
collision occurs).
*3 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In a roll-over accident, the seat belt pretensioners and the curtain air bags deploy.
2–48
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 48
2014/12/09 10:50:29
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy
depending on the direction, angle, and rate of impact.
2–49
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 49
2014/12/09 10:50:30
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to SRS Air Bag
In severe collisions such as those described previously in "SRS Air Bag Deployment
Criteria", the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,
the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.
Limitations to front/near front collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be
detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Impacts involving trees or poles
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate
2–50
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 50
2014/12/09 10:50:30
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to side collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as severe
enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Side impacts involving trees or poles
Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
Roll-over (Without Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
Limitations to roll-over detection:
The following illustration is an example of an accident that may not be detected as a rollover accident. Therefore, the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not
deploy.
Pitch end over end
2–51
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 51
2014/12/09 10:50:31
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Occupant Classification System
First, please read "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions" (page 2-35) carefully.
Front Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sensor as a part
of the supplemental restraint system. This sensor is equipped in the front passenger's seat
cushion. This sensor measures the electrostatic capacity of the front passenger's seat. The
SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system from deploying if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator
light turns on.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag,
the system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns
on. Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illumination conditions.
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front passenger
air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction.
If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy.
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light turns on to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags
and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
2–52
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 52
2014/12/09 10:50:31
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If the front passenger occupant classification sensor is normal, the indicator light turns
on when the ignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds. Then, the
indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions:
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart
Front passenger air
bag deactivation
indicator light
Front passenger front
and side air bags
Front passenger seat
belt pretensioner
system
Empty (Not occupied)
On
Deactivated
Deactivated
A child less than 1 year old is
seated in a child-restraint system
On
Deactivated
Deactivated
Child*1
On or off
Deactivated or ready
Deactivated or ready
Adult*2
Off
Ready
Ready
Condition detected by the
front passenger occupant
classification system
*1 The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child-restraint system, or a
junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture.
*2 If a smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending
on the person's physique.
The curtain air bag is ready for inflating regardless of what the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart indicates.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition
is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the front passenger
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work
properly in an accident.
2–53
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 53
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Do not allow an occupant in the front passenger's seat to sit with a posture which
makes it difficult for the front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the
occupant correctly:
Sitting in the front passenger's seat with a posture which makes it difficult for the front
passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the occupant correctly is dangerous.
If the front passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect the occupant sitting
on the front passenger's seat correctly, the front passenger front and side air bags and
pretensioner system may not operate (deploy) or they may operate (deploy) accidentally.
The front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bags or the
accidental operation (deployment) of the air bags could result in serious injury or death.
Under the following conditions, the front passenger occupant classification sensor
cannot detect a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat correctly and the
deployment/non-deployment of the air bags cannot be controlled as indicated in the
front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart. For example:
¾A front passenger is seated as shown in the following figure:
2–54
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 54
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
¾A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.
¾Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the front
passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat bottom.
¾An object, such as a seat cushion, is put on the front passenger's seat or between the
passenger's back and the seatback.
¾A seat cover is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
¾A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
¾The seat is washed.
¾Liquids are spilled on the seat.
¾The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
¾The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
¾An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the
front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on.
2–55
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 55
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CAUTION
¾To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the sensor in
the front seat cushion:
¾Do not place sharp objects on the front seat cushion or leave heavy luggage on them.
¾Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
¾To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
¾Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
¾If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint system
properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page 2-25).
NOTE
yThe system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger
front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
yThe front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage
or other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's
interior changes suddenly.
yThe front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on for 10 seconds if the
electrostatic capacity on the front passenger seat changes.
yThe air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might turn on if the front
passenger seat receives a severe impact.
yIf the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on after installing
a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, first, re-install your child-restraint
system according to the procedure in this owner's manual. Then, if the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light still does not turn on, install the child-restraint system on
the rear seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
yIf the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on when an occupant
is seated directly in the front passenger seat, have the passenger re-adjust their posture
by sitting with their feet on the floor, and then re-fastening the seat belt. If the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light remains turned on, move the passenger to
the rear seat. If sitting in the rear seat is not possible, slide the front passenger seat as far
back as possible. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
2–56
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 56
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Constant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:
y
Crash
sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
air bag sensors
y
Air bag modules
y
Side crash sensors
y
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner system warning light
y
Front seat belt pretensioners
y
Related wiring
y
Front
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
y
Front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
passenger occupant classification sensor
y
Front passenger occupant classification module
y
Front
The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the
ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.
2–57
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 57
2014/12/09 10:50:32
MEMO
2–58
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 58
2014/12/09 10:50:32
3
Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
Keys ......................................................3-2
Keys ...............................................3-2
Keyless Entry System ....................3-3
Advanced Keyless Entry System ........3-8
Advanced Keyless Entry
System*...........................................3-8
Operational Range .........................3-9
Doors and Locks................................3-10
Door Locks...................................3-10
Liftgate .........................................3-18
Fuel and Emission .............................3-22
Fuel and Engine Exhaust
Precautions ...................................3-22
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ................3-25
Driving Tips .......................................3-39
Break-In Period ............................3-39
Saving Fuel and Protection of the
Environment .................................3-39
Hazardous Driving .......................3-40
Floor Mat .....................................3-40
Rocking the Vehicle .....................3-41
Winter Driving .............................3-41
Driving In Flooded Area ..............3-43
Overloading..................................3-44
Driving on Uneven Road .............3-45
Towing ................................................3-46
Trailer Towing ..............................3-46
Recreational Towing ....................3-46
Steering Wheel...................................3-27
Steering Wheel .............................3-27
Mirrors ...............................................3-28
Mirrors .........................................3-28
Windows.............................................3-30
Power Windows ...........................3-30
Moonroof* ....................................3-33
Security System .................................3-35
Modification and Add-On
Equipment ....................................3-35
Immobilizer System .....................3-35
Theft-Deterrent System*...............3-37
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
3–1
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Before Driving
Keys
Keys
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may find these keys to
be an interesting toy to play with and
could cause the power windows or
other controls to operate, or even make
the vehicle move.
CAUTION
¾Because the key (transmitter) uses
low-intensity radio waves, it may not
function correctly under the following
conditions:
¾The key is carried with
communication devices such as
cellular phones.
¾The key contacts or is covered by a
metal object.
¾The key is near electronic devices such
as personal computers.
¾Non-Mazda genuine electronic
equipment is installed in the vehicle.
¾There is equipment which discharges
radio waves near the vehicle.
¾To avoid damage to the key
(transmitter), DO NOT:
¾Drop the key.
¾Get the key wet.
¾Disassemble the key.
¾Expose the key to high temperatures
on places such as the dashboard or
hood, under direct sunlight.
¾Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
¾Place heavy objects on the key.
¾Put the key in an ultrasonic cleaner.
¾Put any magnetized objects close to
the key.
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key (auxiliary key).
Also write down the code number and
keep it in a separate safe and convenient
place, but not in the vehicle.
If your key (auxiliary key) is lost, consult
your Authorized Mazda Dealer and have
your code number ready.
¾The key (transmitter) may consume
battery power excessively if it receives
high-intensity radio waves. Do not place
the key near electronic devices such as
televisions or personal computers.
3–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Before Driving
Keys
NOTE
yThe driver must carry the key to ensure
the system functions properly.
yAlways keep a spare key in case one
is lost. If a key is lost, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
Transmitter
Auxiliary key
Key code number plate
To use the auxiliary key, press the knob
and pull out the key (transmitter).
Knob
Keyless Entry System
This system uses the key buttons to
remotely lock and unlock the doors and
the liftgate.
The system can start the engine without
having to take the key out of your purse or
pocket.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Operating the theft-deterrent system is
also possible on theft-deterrent systemequipped vehicles.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning lights
or beeps.
y
KEY Warning
Light (Red)
to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-24.
y
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
Refer to Ignition Not Switched Off
(STOP) Warning Beep on page 7-40.
y
Key Removed from Vehicle Warning
Beep
Refer to Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep on page 7-41.
Refer
If you have a problem with the key,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If your key is lost or stolen, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make the
lost or stolen key inoperative.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
3–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:50:32
Before Driving
Keys
NOTE
yThe keyless entry system operation may
vary due to local conditions.
yThe keyless entry system is fully
operational (door/liftgate lock/unlock)
when the ignition is switched off. The
system does not operate if the ignition is
switched to any position other than off.
yIf the key does not operate when
pressing a button or the operational
range becomes too small, the battery
may be dead. To install a new battery,
refer to Key Battery Replacement (page
6-38).
yBattery life is about one year. Replace
the battery with a new one if the KEY
indicator light (green) flashes in the
instrument cluster. Replacing the battery
about once a year is recommended
because the KEY warning light/
indicator light may not illuminate or
flash depending on the rate of battery
depletion.
yAdditional
keys can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to
6 keys can be used with the keyless
functions per vehicle. Bring all keys
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when
additional keys are required.
Transmitter
Operation indicator light
Operation buttons
NOTE
yThe headlights turn on/off by operating
the transmitter. Refer to Leaving Home
Light System on page 4-45.
y(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights flash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-37.
y(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound can be heard for
confirmation when the doors and
liftgate are locked/unlocked using the
key. If you prefer, the beep sound can be
turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also
be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1.Switch the ignition off and close all of
the doors and the liftgate.
2.Open the driver's door.
3–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Keys
3.Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate lock
and the beep sound activates at the
currently set volume. (If the beep
sound is currently set to not activate,
it will not activate.) The setting
changes each time the LOCK button
on the key is pressed and the beep
sound activates at the set volume. (If
the beep sound has been set to not
activate, it will not activate.)
4.The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the liftgate.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors and the liftgate, press the
lock button and the hazard warning lights
will flash once.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard once.
NOTE
yThe doors and the liftgate can be locked
by pressing the lock button while any
other door or the liftgate is open. The
hazard warning lights will not flash.
When the lock button is pressed while
any door is open and then the door is
closed, all the doors and the liftgate are
locked.
yConfirm that all doors and the liftgate
are locked visually or audibly by use of
the double click.
yMake sure all doors and the liftgate are
locked after pressing the button.
y(With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will flash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will flash twice.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the unlock button again within 3 seconds
and two more beep sounds will be heard.
To confirm that all doors and the liftgate
have been locked, press the lock button
again within 5 seconds. If they are closed
and locked, the horn will sound.
3–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Keys
NOTE
yThe system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer. The sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard.
After this, the system switches the
setting each time the UNLOCK
button is pressed (the sound of the
doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the liftgate.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
y(Auto
re-lock function)
After unlocking with the key, all doors
and the liftgate will automatically lock
if any of the following operations are
not performed within about 60 seconds.
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent
system, the hazard warning lights will
flash for confirmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yA
door or the liftgate is opened.
ignition is switched to any
position other than off.
yThe
y(With
theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are unlocked by
pressing the unlock button on the key
while the theft-deterrent system is
turned off, the hazard warning lights
will flash twice to indicate that the
system is turned off.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, press and hold the panic button to
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
3–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Keys
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the following
will occur:
y
The
y
The
With the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
horn sounds intermittently.
hazard warning lights flash.
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the key.
Operational Range
Operational range
Without the advanced keyless function
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Interior antenna
Starting the Engine
NOTE
yStarting the engine may be possible
even if the key is outside of the vehicle
and extremely close to a door and
window, however, always start the
engine from the driver's seat.
If the vehicle is started and the key
is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will
not restart after it is shut off and the
ignition is switched to off.
yThe luggage compartment is out of the
assured operational range, however,
if the key (transmitter) is operable the
engine will start.
Operational range
NOTE
The engine may not start if the key is
placed in the following areas:
yAround
the dashboard
the storage compartments such as the
glove compartment
yIn
Key Suspend Function
If a key is left in the vehicle, the
functions of the key left in the vehicle are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
To restore the functions, press the unlock
button on the functions-suspended key in
the vehicle.
3–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Advanced Keyless Entry
System*
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will affect
the device.
The advanced keyless function allows you
to lock/unlock the doors and liftgate, or
open the liftgate while carrying the key.
NOTE
The advanced keyless entry system
functions can be deactivated to prevent
any possible adverse effect on a user
wearing a pacemaker or other medical
device. If the system is deactivated, you
will be unable to start the engine by
carrying the key. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for details. If the advanced
keyless entry system has been deactivated,
you can start the engine by following the
procedure indicated when the key battery
goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-8.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning beeps.
y
Request
switch Inoperable Warning
Beep
Refer to Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function) on page 7-41.
y
Key Left-in-luggage Compartment
Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-luggage
Compartment Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function) on page
7-41.
y
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-vehicle Warning
Beep (With the advanced keyless
function) on page 7-41.
3–8
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
NOTE
When the battery power is low, or in
places where there are high-intensity radio
waves or noise, the operational range
may become narrower or the system may
not operate. For determining battery
replacement, Refer to Keyless Entry
System on page 3-3.
Opening the Liftgate
Exterior antenna
80 cm(31in)
Operational range
Locking, Unlocking the Doors and
the Liftgate
80 cm (31in)
Exterior antenna
Locking only
80 cm (31in)
Operational range
NOTE
The system may not operate if you are too
close to the windows or door handles, or
liftgate.
3–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:50:33
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended in
a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot
weather, temperatures inside a vehicle
can become high enough to cause
brain damage or even death.
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall out
if a door is accidentally opened and
can more easily be thrown out in an
accident.
After closing the doors, always verify
that they are securely closed:
Doors not securely closed are
dangerous, if the vehicle is driven with
a door not securely closed, the door
could open unexpectedly resulting in
an accident.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before opening a door:
Suddenly opening a door is dangerous.
A passing vehicle or a pedestrian could
be hit and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Always confirm the conditions around
the vehicle before opening/closing the
doors and use caution during strong
winds or when parked on an incline.
Not being aware of the conditions
around the vehicle is dangerous
because fingers could get caught in
the door or a passing pedestrian could
be hit, resulting in an unexpected
accident or injury.
Always close all the windows and
moonroof, lock the doors and take the
key with you when leaving your vehicle
unattended:
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle left
unlocked becomes an easy target for
thieves and intruders.
3–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC
or ON, the vehicle lock-out prevention
feature prevents you from locking
yourself out of the vehicle.
All doors and the liftgate will
automatically unlock if they are locked
using the power door locks with any
door or the liftgate open.
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
does not operate while the ignition is
switched off.
When any door is opened from the
outside while the key is inside the
vehicle, the closed doors are locked. All
the doors are automatically unlocked by
closing the open door.
(With the advanced keyless function)
The beep sound is heard for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key
has been left in the vehicle.
(Without the advanced keyless
function)
The horn sound is heard twice to notify
the driver that the key has been left in
the vehicle.
y(Door
unlock (control) system with
collision detection)
This system automatically unlocks the
doors in the event the vehicle is involved
in an accident to allow passengers to
get out of the vehicle immediately and
prevent being trapped inside. While the
ignition is switched ON and in the event
the vehicle receives an impact strong
enough to inflate the air bags, all the
doors are automatically unlocked after
about 6 seconds have elapsed from the
time of the accident.
The doors may not unlock depending on
how an impact is applied, the force of
the impact, and other conditions of the
accident.
If door-related systems or the battery
is malfunctioning, the doors will not
unlock.
Locking, Unlocking with Key
All doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the driver's door is
locked using the key.
All doors and the liftgate unlock when the
driver's door is unlocked and the key is
held in the unlock position for one second
or longer.
Turn the key toward the front to lock,
toward the back to unlock.
Lock
Unlock
3–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Holding the key in the unlocked position in
the driver's door lock for about a second
unlocks all doors and the liftgate. To
unlock only the driver's door, insert the
key into the driver's door lock and turn
the key briefly to the unlock position and
then immediately return it to the center
position.
Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (With the advanced keyless
function)
All doors and the liftgate can be locked/
unlocked by pressing the request switch
on the front doors while the key is being
carried.
Liftgate ( Lock only)
Request switch
To lock
To lock the doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch and the hazard warning
lights will flash once.
A beep sound will be heard once.
To unlock
The request switch on the liftgate can only
be used to lock all doors and the liftgate.
Front doors
Request switch
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be heard
twice and the hazard warning lights will
flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch again within 3 seconds
and two more beep sounds will be heard.
Front passenger door request switch
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will flash twice.
3–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
yThe system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yUse the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer. The sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard.
After this, the system switches the
setting of pressing the driver's
request switch once or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate
each time the UNLOCK button is
pressed (the sound of the doors
locking/unlocking can be heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the liftgate.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
yAll
doors and the liftgate cannot be
locked when any door or the liftgate is
open.
yIt may require a few seconds for the
doors to unlock after the request switch
is pressed.
yA beep sound is heard for confirmation
when the doors and the liftgate are
locked/unlocked using the request
switch. If you prefer, the beep sound can
be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also
be changed. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate lock
and the beep sound activates at the
currently set volume. (If the beep
sound is currently set to not activate,
it will not activate.) The setting
changes each time the LOCK button
on the key is pressed and the beep
sound activates at the set volume. (If
the beep sound has been set to not
activate, it will not activate.)
yConfirm
that all doors and the liftgate
are securely locked.
For the liftgate, move it without
pressing the electric liftgate opener to
verify that the liftgate has not been left
ajar.
3–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the liftgate.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
y(With
theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights flash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-37.
yThe setting can be changed so that
the doors and the liftgate are locked
automatically without pressing the
request switch.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
(Auto-lock function)
A beep sound is heard when all doors
and the liftgate are closed while the
advanced key is being carried. All doors
and the liftgate are locked automatically
after about three seconds when the
advanced key is out of the operational
range. Also, the hazard warning lights
flash once. (Even if the driver is in the
operational range, all doors and the
liftgate are locked automatically after
about 30 seconds.) If you are out of
the operational range before the doors
and the liftgate are completely closed
or another key is left in the vehicle, the
auto-lock function will not work. Always
make sure that all doors and the liftgate
are closed and locked before leaving the
vehicle. The auto-lock function does not
close the power windows.
yAuto
re-lock function
After unlocking with the request
switch, all doors and the liftgate
will automatically lock if any of the
following operations are not performed
within about 60 seconds. If your
vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,
the hazard warning lights will flash for
confirmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yOpening
a door or the liftgate.
the ignition to any position
other than off.
ySwitching
Locking, Unlocking with
Transmitter
All doors and the liftgate can be locked/
unlocked by operating the keyless entry
system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry
System (page 3-3).
3–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Switch
All doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the lock side is
pressed. They all unlock when the unlock
side is pressed.
Driver's door
Auto Lock/Unlock Function
WARNING
Do not pull the inner handle on a front
door:
Pulling the inner handle on a front
door while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. Passengers can fall
out of the vehicle if the door opens
accidentally , which could result in
death or serious injury.
y
When
the vehicle speed exceeds 20
km/h (12 mph), all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically.
y
When the ignition is switched off,
all doors and the liftgate unlock
automatically.
Lock
Unlock
These functions can also be disabled so
that they do not operate.
Front passenger's door
Lock
Unlock
To lock all the doors/liftgate from an open
front door, press the lock side of the door
lock switch and then close the door.
NOTE
When locking the doors this way, be
careful not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
Auto lock/unlock function setting
change using door-lock switch
The doors and the liftgate can be set to
lock or unlock automatically by selecting
any one of the functions from the
following table and using the driver's doorlock switch on the interior door panel.
NOTE
yFunction number 3 is the factory setting
for your vehicle.
yThere are only a total of six auto lock/
unlock settings available. Be sure to
press the unlock side of the driver's
door-lock switch the correct number of
times according to the selected function
number. If the switch is mistakenly
pressed seven times, the procedure will
be cancelled. If this occurs, start the
procedure from the beginning.
3–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:50:34
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Function
number
Function*1
1
The auto door-lock function is
disabled.
2
All the doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the vehicle speed
is about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.
3
All the doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the vehicle speed
is about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.
All the doors and the liftgate unlock
when the ignition is switched from
ON to Off.
4
When the ignition is switched ON
and the shift lever is shifted from
park (P) to any other gear position,
all the doors and the liftgate lock
automatically.
5
6
When the ignition is switched ON
and the shift lever is shifted from
park (P) to any other gear position,
all the doors and the liftgate lock
automatically.
When the shift lever is shifted to park
(P) while the ignition is switched ON,
all the doors and the liftgate unlock
automatically.
All the doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the vehicle speed
is about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.
When the shift lever is shifted to park
(P) while the ignition is switched ON,
all the doors and the liftgate unlock
automatically.
*1 Other settings for the auto door lock function are
available at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For
details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Refer
to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Settings can be changed using the
following procedure.
1. Safely park the vehicle. All doors must
remain closed.
2. Switch the ignition ON.
3. Press and hold the lock side of the
driver's door-lock switch within 20
seconds of switching the ignition ON,
and make sure a beep sound is heard
about eight seconds afterwards.
4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock function
setting table, determine the function
number for the desired setting. Press
the unlock side of the driver's door-lock
switch the same number of times as the
selected function number (Ex. If you
select function 2, press the unlock side
of the switch only 2 times).
5. Three seconds after the function setting
has been changed, a beep sound will
beep in the amount of the selected
function number. (Ex. Function number
3 = 3 beep sounds)
Current Function Number
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Function Number 1
Press 2 times
Press lock side of
lock switch
Function Number 2
Press 3 times
Cancel setting
Function Number 3
Press 4 times
Function Number 4
Press 5 times
Function Number 5
Press 6 times
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Function Number 6
Press 7 times
Cancel setting
NOTE
yThe doors cannot be locked or unlocked
while the setting function is being
performed.
yThe procedure can be cancelled by
pressing the lock side of the driver's
door-lock switch.
3–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:50:35
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Knob
Operation from inside
To lock any door from the inside, press the
door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it outward.
This does not operate the other door locks.
Operation from outside
To lock any door with the door-lock knob
from the outside, press the door-lock
knob to the lock position and close the
door (holding the door handle in the open
position is not required).
This does not operate the other door locks.
Door-lock knob
Lock
Unlock
NOTE
The red indication can be seen when the
door-lock knob is unlocked.
NOTE
When locking the door this way, be careful
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
Red indication
3–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:50:35
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Rear Door Child Safety Locks
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them on both rear doors
whenever a child rides in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
If you slide the child safety lock to the
lock position before closing that door, the
door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can only be opened by pulling
the outside handle.
Unlock
Lock
Liftgate
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
luggage compartment:
Allowing a person to ride in the
luggage compartment is dangerous.
The person in the luggage
compartment could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden braking
or a collision.
Do not drive with the liftgate open:
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle
is dangerous. An open liftgate in a
moving vehicle will cause exhaust
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),
which is colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous, and it can cause loss of
consciousness and death. Moreover,
an open liftgate could cause occupants
to fall out in an accident.
Do not stack or leave loaded luggage
unsecured in the luggage compartment:
Otherwise, the luggage may move
or collapse, resulting in injury or an
accident. In addition, do not load
luggage higher than the seatbacks. It
may affect the side or rear field of view.
3–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:50:35
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CAUTION
¾Before opening the liftgate, remove
any snow and ice accumulation on it.
Otherwise, the liftgate could close under
the weight of the snow and ice resulting
in injury.
¾Be careful when opening/closing the
liftgate during strong winds. If a strong
gust blows against the liftgate, it could
close suddenly resulting in injury.
¾Fully open the liftgate and make sure
that it stays open. If the liftgate is only
opened partially, it could slam shut
by vibration or wind gusts resulting in
injury.
¾When loading or unloading luggage in
the luggage compartment, turn off the
engine. Otherwise, you could get burned
by the heat of the exhaust gas.
¾Be careful not to apply excessive force
to the damper stay on the liftgate such
as by putting your hand on the stay.
Otherwise, the damper stay may bend
and affect the liftgate operation.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
Opening the liftgate with Electric
liftgate opener
Unlock the doors and liftgate, then press
the electric liftgate opener on the liftgate
and raise the liftgate when the latch
releases.
Electric liftgate
opener
Damper stay
3–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
(With the advanced keyless function)
yA
locked liftgate can also be opened
while the key is being carried.
yWhen opening the liftgate with the
doors and the liftgate locked, it may
require a few seconds for the liftgate
latch to release after the electric liftgate
opener is pressed.
yThe liftgate can be closed when the
doors are locked with the key left in the
vehicle. However, to prevent locking the
key in the vehicle, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the electric liftgate
opener. If the liftgate cannot be opened
despite doing this procedure, press the
electric liftgate opener to fully open
the liftgate after pushing the liftgate
completely closed.
the liftgate latch is released by
pressing the electric liftgate opener,
the liftgate raises slightly to allow
it to be opened. If the liftgate is not
operated for a certain period of time
after the electric liftgate opener has
been pressed, the liftgate cannot be
raised any more from its slightly raised
position. Press the electric liftgate
opener again to fully open the liftgate.
To close the liftgate from its slightly
raised position, open it first by pressing
the electric liftgate opener, and waiting
for 1 second or longer then close it.
If the liftgate is not fully closed, the
driver is notified by a warning indicated
in the instrument cluster.
Closing the liftgate
CAUTION
When closing the liftgate, return the
luggage board to its original position.
If the liftgate is closed with the
luggage board standing upright, the
luggage compartment cover could be
damaged.
Luggage compartment cover
Luggage board
yWhen
Lower the liftgate slowly using the liftgate
grip recess, then push the liftgate closed
using both hands.
Do not slam it. Pull up on the liftgate to
make sure it is secure.
Liftgate grip recess
yIf
the vehicle battery is dead or there is
a malfunction in the electrical system
and the liftgate cannot be unlocked, the
liftgate can be opened by performing
the emergency procedure.
Refer to When Liftgate Cannot be
Opened on page 7-44.
3–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Luggage Compartment
Luggage compartment cover*
The luggage compartment can be accessed
by opening the liftgate when the straps are
attached to the sides of the liftgate.
WARNING
Do not place anything on top of the
cover:
Placing luggage or other cargo on top
of the luggage compartment cover is
dangerous. During sudden braking or
a collision, the cargo could become
a projectile that could hit and injure
someone. The vehicle has a light
weight luggage compartment cover to
keep the contents of your luggage area
out of sight; it will not retain heavy
objects that are not tied down in an
accident such as a rollover. Tie down
all heavy objects, whether luggage or
cargo, using the tie down hooks.
Make sure luggage and cargo are
secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
Strap
Removing the cover
This cover can be removed for more room.
1. Remove the straps from the hooks.
2. Lift the end of the luggage
compartment cover a little, pull it
outward, and remove it from the pins.
Pin
CAUTION
Make sure the luggage compartment
cover is firmly secured. If it is not
firmly secured, it could unexpectedly
disengage resulting in injury.
Pin
3. Lift the front end of the luggage
compartment cover and remove it.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
3–21
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
This vehicle will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel
Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)
Regular unleaded fuel
87 [(R M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
¾USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead to
deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
¾This vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanol by
volume. Damage to the vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this recommendation, or
if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of any kind if your vehicle engine
is performing poorly.
¾Never add fuel system additives, otherwise the emission control system could be damaged.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name "Gasohol".
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not be
covered by the warranty.
y
Gasohol
containing more than 10 % ethanol.
or gasohol containing methanol.
y
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
y
Gasoline
3–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Emission Control System
This vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is
part of this system) that enables the vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with the
engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and could ignite
anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside
the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will damage the
converter and cause poor performance.
¾USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
¾Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
¾Do not coast with the ignition switched off.
¾Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off.
¾Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
¾Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified technician.
¾Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
yUnder U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control
system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some
states, such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
yWhile the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear
of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle has a selfchecking device and it operates while the engine is off.
3–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Engine Exhaust (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness and
death. If you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, keep all windows fully open and contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss of
consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When the vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and
the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which contains
poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even death
could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe, before
starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The exhaust
pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin. Because
exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of consciousness or
even death to occupants in the cabin.
3–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:50:36
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
WARNING
When removing the fuel-filler cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop, then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel tank
and the fuel-filler cap is removed too
quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuelfiller cap or not using a fuel-filler cap
may result in a fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
Do not continue refueling after the fuel
pump nozzle shuts off automatically:
Continuing to add fuel after the
fuel pump nozzle has shut off
automatically is dangerous because
overfilling the fuel tank may cause
fuel overflow or leakage. Fuel overflow
and leakage could damage the vehicle
and if the fuel ignites it could cause a
fire and explosion resulting in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION
Always use only a genuine Mazda fuelfiller cap or an approved equivalent,
available at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in
a serious malfunction of the fuel and
emission control systems. It may also
cause the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
Fuel-Filler Lid
To open, pull the remote fuel-filler lid
release.
To close, press the fuel-filler lid until it
locks securely.
Remote fuel-filler lid release
3–25
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
2014/12/09 10:50:37
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel-Filler Cap
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
Attach the removed cap to the inner side
of the fuel lid.
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it
clockwise until a click is heard.
Open
Close
CAUTION
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates, the fuel-filler cap may not
be properly installed. If the warning
light illuminates, park your vehicle
safely off the right-of-way, remove the
fuel-filler cap and reinstall it correctly.
After the cap has been correctly
installed, the fuel cap warning light
may continue to illuminate until a
number of driving cycles have been
completed. A drive cycle consists of
starting the engine (after four or more
hours with the engine off ) and driving
the vehicle on city and highway roads.
Continuing to drive with the check
fuel cap warning light illuminated
could cause the check engine light to
illuminate as well.
3–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:50:37
Before Driving
Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control or
an accident.
NOTE
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked
firmly in place. If it is difficult to raise
the lever, lightly move the steering wheel
forward and back to pull up the lever.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To change the angle or length of the
steering wheel:
1. Stop the vehicle, and then pull down
the lock release lever under the steering
column.
Lock release lever
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the
steering column length to the desired
positions, then push the lever up to lock
the column.
3. Attempt to push the steering wheel
up and down to make sure it's locked
before driving.
3–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:50:37
Before Driving
Mirrors
Mirrors
Before driving, adjust the inside and
outside mirrors.
Outside Mirrors
WARNING
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
Changing lanes without taking
into account the actual distance of
the vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Mirror type
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (front passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
Power mirror adjustment
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON position.
To adjust:
1. Rotate the mirror switch to the left or
right to choose the left or right side
mirror.
2. Press the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
Center position
Mirror switch
After adjusting the mirror, lock the
control by rotating the switch in the center
position.
3–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:50:37
Before Driving
Mirrors
Folding mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors folded
in is dangerous. Your rear view will
be restricted, and you could have an
accident.
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
flush with the vehicle.
Rearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror, which
might cause you to hit another car
when changing lanes.
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
Reducing glare from headlights
Adjust the mirror with the day/night lever
in the day position.
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from vehicles at the rear.
Night
Day/Night lever
Day
3–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:50:37
Before Driving
Windows
Power Windows
The ignition must be switched ON for the
power windows to operate.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing a power window is dangerous.
A person's hands, head, or even neck
could be caught by the window and
result in serious injury or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
Never allow children to play with power
window switches:
Power window switches that are not
locked with the power window lock
switch would allow children to operate
power windows unintentionally, which
could result in serious injury if a child's
hands, head or neck becomes caught
by the window.
CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
do not open or close more than three
windows at once.
NOTE
A power window may no longer open/close
if you continue to press the switch after
fully opening/closing the power window.
If the power window does not open/close,
wait a moment and then operate the switch
again.
Operating the Driver's Side Power
Window
Normal opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
Master control switches
Driver's window
Close
Open
Auto-opening/closing
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down, then
release. The window will fully open
automatically.
To fully close the window automatically,
pull the switch completely up, then
release. The window will fully close
automatically.
To stop the window partway, pull or press
the switch in the opposite direction and
then release it.
3–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:50:38
Before Driving
Windows
Power window system initialization
procedure
If the battery was disconnected during
vehicle maintenance, or for other reasons
(such as a switch continues to be operated
after the window is fully open/closed),
the window will not fully open and close
automatically.
The power window auto function will only
resume on a power window that has been
reset.
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is
not depressed.
3. Press the switch and fully open the
window.
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the
window and continue holding the
switch for about 2 seconds after the
window fully closed.
Jam-safe window
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the auto-closing
operation, the window will stop and open
halfway.
NOTE
yDepending on driving conditions, a
closing power window could stop and
start opening when the window feels
a shock that is similar to something
blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function
activates and the power window cannot
be closed automatically, pull and hold
the switch and the window will close.
yThe jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system has been reset.
Engine-off power window operation
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition is
switched from ON to off with all doors
closed. If any door is opened, the power
window will stop operating.
NOTE
For engine-off operation of the power
window, the switch must be held up firmly
throughout window closure because the
auto-closing function will be inoperable.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while holding up the power
window switch:
Blocking the power window just before
it reaches the fully closed position or
while holding up the power window
switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
closing all the way. If fingers are
caught, serious injuries could occur.
3–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:50:38
Before Driving
Windows
Operating the Passenger Power
Windows
To open the window to the desired
position, hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, pull up the switch.
Close
Power Window Lock Switch
This feature prevents all power windows
from operating, except the driver's power
window. Keep this switch in the locked
position while children are in the vehicle.
Locked position (button depressed):
Only the driver's power window can be
operated.
Unlocked position (button not
depressed):
All power windows on each door can be
operated.
Open
Locked position
Unlocked position
NOTE
yThe power windows may be operated
when the power window lock switch
on the driver's door is in the unlocked
position.
yThe passenger windows may be opened
or closed using the master control
switches on the driver's door.
Master control switches
Driver's window
Left rear window
Front
passenger's
window
Right rear window
3–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:50:38
Before Driving
Windows
Moonroof*
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition is
switched ON.
Tilt/Slide switch
NOTE
Before washing your Mazda, make sure
the moonroof is completely closed so that
water does not get inside the cabin area.
After washing your Mazda or after it rains,
wipe the water off the moonroof before
operating it to avoid water penetration
which could cause rust and water damage
to your headliner.
Tilt Operation
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
WARNING
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of the body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a person,
especially a child, could be caught in
it as it closes, causing serious injury or
even death.
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch.
To stop tilting partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
Tilt up
Close (Tilt down)
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
3–33
2014/12/09 10:50:38
Before Driving
Windows
Slide Operation
Sunshade
To fully open automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the backward
direction.
To stop sliding partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Sunshade
Open
Close
Power Moonroof Reset Procedure
If the battery is disconnected, the
moonroof will not operate. The moonroof
will not operate correctly until it is reset.
Carry out the following procedure to reset
the moonroof and resume operation:
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tilt
open the rear of the moonroof.
3. Repeat Step 2. The rear of the
moonroof tilts open to the fully open
position, then closes a little.
CAUTION
¾The sunshade does not tilt. To avoid
damaging the sunshade, do not push up
on it.
¾Do not close the sunshade while the
moonroof is opening. Trying to force the
sunshade closed could damage it.
NOTE
If the reset procedure is performed while
the moonroof is in the slide position
(partially open) it will close before the
rear tilt opens.
3–34
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:50:38
Before Driving
Security System
Modification and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems' operation
if the system has been modified or if any
add-on equipment has been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems or the
vehicle.
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system allows the
engine to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine
will not start, thereby helping to prevent
vehicle theft.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
¾Radio equipment like this is governed by
laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
¾To avoid damage to the key, do not:
¾Drop the key.
¾Get the key wet.
¾Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
¾Expose the key to high temperatures
on places such as the dashboard or
hood, under direct sunlight.
¾If the engine does not start with the
correct key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or flashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3–35
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
yThe keys carry a unique electronic code.
For this reason, and to assure your
safety, obtaining a replacement key
requires some waiting time. They are
only available through an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
yAlways keep a spare key in case one
is lost. If a key is lost, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
yIf you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has
not been reset is not possible.
Operation
NOTE
yThe engine may not start and security
indicator light may illuminate or flash
if the key is placed in an area where it
is difficult for the system to detect the
signal, such as on the dashboard or in
the glove compartment. Move the key
to a location within the signal range,
switch the ignition off, and then restart
the engine.
ySignals from a TV or radio station, or
from a transceiver or mobile telephone
could interfere with your immobilizer
system. If you are using the proper key
and the engine fails to start, check the
security indicator light.
Arming
The system is armed when the ignition is
switched from ON to off.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes every 2 seconds
until the system is disarmed.
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the
ignition is switched ON with the correct
programmed key. The security indicator
light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
then turns off. If the engine does not start
with the correct key, and the security
indicator light remains illuminated or
flashing, try the following:
Make sure the key is within the
operational range for signal transmission.
Switch the ignition off, and then restart the
engine. If the engine does not start after
3 or more tries, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
yIf the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving,
do not shut off the engine. Go to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer and have it
checked. If the engine is shut off while
the indicator light is flashing, you will
not be able to restart it.
yBecause the electronic codes are
reset when the immobilizer system
is repaired, the keys are needed.
Make sure to bring all the keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer so that they
can be programmed.
3–36
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Security System
Theft-Deterrent System*
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle,
which could result in the vehicle or its
contents being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning lights.
The system will not function unless it's
properly armed. So when you leave the
vehicle, follow the arming procedure
correctly.
Operation
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights flash for about 30
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
y
Unlocking
a door with the key, door
lock switch, or an inside door-lock knob.
y
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
liftgate.
y
Opening the hood by operating the hood
release handle.
y
Switching the ignition ON without using
the push button start.
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until the driver's
door or the liftgate is unlocked with the
transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request switch
on a door.
NOTE
yThe liftgate does not open while the
theft-deterrent system is operating.
yIf the battery goes dead while the theft
deterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights
will flash when the battery is charged or
replaced.
How to Arm the System
1. Close the windows and the moonroof*
securely.
2. Switch the ignition OFF.
3. Make sure the hood, the doors, and the
liftgate are closed.
4. Press the lock button on the transmitter
or lock the driver's door from the
outside with the auxiliary key.
The hazard warning lights will flash
once.
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Press the door-lock switch “ ” while
any door is open and then close all of
the doors.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Press a request switch.
The security indicator light in the
instrument panel flashes twice per
second for 20 seconds.
5. After 20 seconds, the system is fully
armed.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
3–37
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
yThe theft deterrent system can also be
armed by activating the auto relock
function with all the doors, the liftgate
and the hood closed.
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4.
yThe system will disarm if one of the
following operations takes place within
20 seconds after pressing the lock
button:
yUnlocking
any door.
any door or the liftgate.
yOpening the hood.
ySwitching the ignition ON.
y(With the advanced keyless
function)
Pressing the electric liftgate opener
while the key is being carried.
yOpening
To rearm the system, do the arming
procedure again.
yWhen the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter
or using the auxiliary key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will flash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE
When the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the transmitter while
the theft-deterrent system is turned off, the
hazard warning lights will flash twice to
indicate that the system is turned off.
To Stop the Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
y
Pressing
the unlock button on the
transmitter.
y
Starting the engine with the push button
start.
y
(With the advanced keyless function)
y
y
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
Pressing the electric liftgate opener
while the key is being carried.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.
Theft-Deterrent Labels
To Turn Off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
y
Pressing
the unlock button on the
transmitter.
y
Starting the engine with the push button
start.
y
(With the advanced keyless function)
y
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove compartment.
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.
3–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
No special break-in is necessary, but a
few precautions in the first 1,000 km
(600 miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of the vehicle.
y
Do
not race the engine.
not maintain one constant speed,
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
y
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle or
high engine rpm for extended periods of
time.
y
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
y
Avoid full-throttle starts.
y
Do
Saving Fuel and
Protection of the
Environment
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save fuel and
reduce CO2.
y
Avoid
long warm-ups. Once the engine
runs smoothly, begin driving.
y
Avoid fast starts.
y
Drive at lower speeds.
y
Anticipate when to apply the brakes
(avoid sudden braking).
y
Follow the maintenance schedule
(page 6-4) and have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform inspections and
servicing.
y
Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
y
Slow down on rough roads.
y
Keep the tires properly inflated.
y
Do not carry unnecessary weight.
y
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
y
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
y
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
y
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going down
a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause damage
to the drivetrain. Any loss of steering
or braking control could cause an
accident.
3–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear
while driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazards:
y
Be
cautious and allow extra distance for
braking.
y
Avoid sudden braking and sudden
maneuvering.
y
Do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-58.
y
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front
wheels.
y
For more traction in starting on slippery
surfaces such as ice or packed snow,
use sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or
other nonslip material under the front
wheels.
Floor Mat
WARNING
Make sure the floor mats are hooked on
the retention pins to prevent them from
bunching up under the foot pedals:
Using a floor mat that is not secured is
dangerous as it will interfere with the
accelerator and brake pedal operation,
which could result in an accident.
Do not install two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one floor mat from sliding
forward.
If using a heavy duty floor mat for
winter use always remove the original
floor mat.
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.
When setting a floor mat, position the floor
mat so that its grommets are inserted over
the pointed end of the retention posts.
3–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:50:39
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at more than
56 km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning the
wheels at high speed is dangerous.
The spinning tire could overheat and
explode. This could cause serious
injuries.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transaxle failure, and tire
damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the accelerator
slightly and slowly move the shift lever
from D to R.
Winter Driving
Carry emergency gear, including tire
chains, window scraper, flares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag of
sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to check
the following:
y
Have
the proper ratio of antifreeze in the
radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 6-29.
y
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
y
Use an engine oil appropriate for the
lowest ambient temperatures that the
vehicle will be driven in (page 6-27).
y
Inspect the ignition system for damage
and loose connections.
y
Use washer fluid made with antifreeze—
but do not use engine coolant antifreeze
for washer fluid (page 6-31).
3–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:50:40
Before Driving
Driving Tips
NOTE
yDo not use the parking brake in freezing
weather as it may freeze. Instead, shift
to P and block the rear wheels.
yRemove snow before driving. Snow left
on the windshield is dangerous as it
could obstruct vision.
yDo not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
yNever use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows and
mirrors as it could result in the glass
cracking.
yDrive slowly. Braking performance
can be adversely affected if snow or
ice adheres to the brake components. If
this situation occurs, drive the vehicle
slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal
and lightly applying the brakes several
times until the brake performance
returns to normal.
Snow Tires
Use snow tires on all four wheels
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Inflate snow
tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi) more
than recommended on the tire pressure
label (driver's door frame), but never
more than the maximum cold-tire pressure
shown on the tires.
Except Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with
all season radials designed to be used all
year around. In some extreme climates you
may find it necessary to replace them with
snow tires during the winter months to
further improve traction on snow and ice
covered roads.
Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with
summer tires designed for optimum
traction on wet and dry roads. If your
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice
covered roads, Mazda recommends that
you replace the tires originally equipped
on your vehicle with snow tires during the
winter months.
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result in
an accident.
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
3–42
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:50:40
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Tire Chains
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
CAUTION
¾Chains may affect handling.
¾Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is lower.
¾Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes,
and sharp turns.
¾Avoid locked-wheel braking.
¾Do not use chains on a temporary spare
tire; it may result in damage to the
vehicle and to the tire.
¾Do not use chains on roads that are free
of snow or ice. The tires and chains could
be damaged.
¾Chains may scratch or chip aluminum
wheels.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, the system
may not function correctly when using tire
chains.
Driving In Flooded Area
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short circuiting
of electrical/electronic parts, or
engine damage or stalling from
water absorption. If the vehicle has
been immersed in water, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Install the chains on the front tires only.
Do not use chains on the rear tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Installing the chains
1. If your vehicle is equipped with wheel
covers remove them, otherwise the
chain bands will scratch them.
2. Secure the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible.
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Retighten the chains after driving
1/2—1 km (1/4—1/2 mile).
3–43
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
2014/12/09 10:50:40
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of the vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of the load by weighing the
items (or people) before putting them
in the vehicle.
3–44
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:50:40
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
y
Ascending
y
Ascending
or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
This vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use care
and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
3–45
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
2014/12/09 10:50:40
Before Driving
Towing
Trailer Towing
YourMazda is not designed for towing.
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda.
Recreational Towing
An example of "recreational towing" is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transaxle is not designed for towing
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer
to "Towing Description" (page 7-24)
and "Tiedown Hooks" (page 7-25) and
carefully follow the instructions.
3–46
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:50:40
4
When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Start/Stop Engine ................................4-4
Ignition Switch ...............................4-4
Starting the Engine .........................4-5
Turning the Engine Off ................4-10
Fuel Economy Monitor .....................4-62
Fuel Economy Monitor* ...............4-62
Drive Selection...................................4-64
Drive Selection.............................4-64
Instrument Cluster and Display ......4-12
Meters and Gauges .......................4-12
Active Driving Display* ...............4-22
Warning/Indicator Lights .............4-24
AWD ...................................................4-66
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Operation......................................4-66
Transaxle ............................................4-30
Automatic Transaxle Controls ......4-30
Power Steering...................................4-67
Power Steering .............................4-67
Switches and Controls ......................4-41
Lighting Control...........................4-41
Fog Lights* ...................................4-46
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......4-46
Windshield Wipers and Washer ......4-47
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ..........................................4-51
Rear Window Defogger ...............4-52
Horn .............................................4-53
Hazard Warning Flasher...............4-53
Brake ..................................................4-54
Brake System ...............................4-54
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)* ...........4-56
ABS/TCS/DSC ...................................4-58
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ......4-58
Traction Control System (TCS) ......4-59
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) ...........................................4-61
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
4–1
2014/12/09 10:50:40
i-ACTIVSENSE.................................4-68
i-ACTIVSENSE*..........................4-68
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)* ..........................................4-70
High Beam Control System
(HBC)*..........................................4-71
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)* ......................................4-74
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System*.........................................4-80
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS)* ........................................4-87
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)* .......................................4-90
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC)* ......................................4-93
Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS)* ......................................4-104
Smart Brake Support (SBS)* ......4-109
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)*.... 4-112
Radar Sensor (Front)*................. 4-115
Laser Sensor (Front)* ................. 4-118
Radar Sensors (Rear)* ................4-120
Cruise Control .................................4-122
Cruise Control* ...........................4-122
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..4-126
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System*.......................................4-126
Rear View Monitor..........................4-130
Rear View Monitor* ...................4-130
4–2
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:50:40
MEMO
4–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Ignition Switch
Push Button Start Positions
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Each time the push button start is pressed,
the ignition switches in the order of off,
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button
start again from ON switches the ignition
off.
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
yThe engine starts by pressing the push
button start while depressing the brake
pedal. To switch the ignition position,
press the push button start without
depressing the pedal.
yDo not leave the ignition switched ON
while the engine is not running. Doing
so could result in the battery going
dead. If the selector lever is in the P
position, and the ignition is in ACC, the
ignition switches off automatically after
about 25 minutes.
Off
The power supply to electrical devices
turns off and the push button start indicator
light (amber) also turns off.
In this position the steering wheel is
locked.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
switch the ignition off, set the parking
brake, and make sure the selector lever
is in P:
Leaving the driver's seat without
switching the ignition off, setting the
parking brake, and shifting the selector
lever to P is dangerous. Unexpected
vehicle movement could occur which
could result in an accident.
In addition, if your intention is to leave
the vehicle for even a short period, it
is important to switch the ignition off,
as leaving it in another position will
disable some of the vehicle's security
systems and run the battery down.
ACC (Accessory)
Some electrical accessories will operate
and the indicator light (amber) illuminates.
NOTE
The keyless entry system does not function
while the push button start has been
pressed to ACC, and the doors will not
lock/unlock even if they have been locked
manually.
4–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The indicator light
(amber) turns off. (The indicator light
(amber) illuminates when the ignition
is switched ON and the engine is not
running.)
Some indicator lights/warning lights
should be inspected before the engine is
started (page 4-24).
NOTE
When the push button start is pressed to
ON, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard.
This does not indicate an abnormality.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will affect
the device.
NOTE
yThe key must be carried because the key
carries an immobilizer chip that must
communicate with the engine controls at
short range.
yThe engine can be started when the
push button start is pressed from off,
ACC, or ON.
yThe push button start system functions
(function which can start the engine
by only carrying the key) can be
deactivated to prevent any possible
adverse effect on a user wearing a
pacemaker or other medical device. If
the system is deactivated, you will be
unable to start the engine by carrying
the key. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details. If the push button
start system functions have been
deactivated, you can start the engine by
following the procedure indicated when
the key battery goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When
Key Battery is Dead on page 4-8.
4–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
yAfter
starting a cold engine, the engine
speed increases and a whining sound
from the engine compartment can be
heard.
This is for improved exhaust gas
purification and does not indicate defect
of the parts.
yEngine-starting is controlled by the
spark ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Continue to press the brake pedal
firmly until the engine has completely
started.
5. Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
The starter will not operate if the selector
lever is not in P or N and the brake pedal
is not depressed sufficiently.
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light
(green) in the instrument cluster and the
push button start indicator light (green)
illuminate.
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
yIf the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes, make sure that the key is
being carried.
yIf the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes with the key being
carried, touch the key to the push
button start and start the engine. Refer
to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-8.
4–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button
start indicator light (amber) flashes,
this could indicate a problem with
the engine starting system and the
inability to start the engine or switch
the ignition to ACC or ON. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
yUnder the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) flashes after
the push button start is pressed to
inform the driver that the push button
start will not switch to ACC even if it is
pressed from off.
yThe
key battery is dead.
key is out of operational range.
yThe key is placed in areas where it is
difficult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7).
yA key from another manufacturer
similar to the key is in the
operational range.
yThe
.y(Forced engine starting method)
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, this
could indicate that the engine may not
start using the usual starting method.
Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. If this occurs, the engine can
be force-started. Press and hold the
push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting
the engine such as having the key in the
cabin, and depressing the brake pedal
are required.
yWhen
the engine is force-started,
the KEY warning light (red) remains
illuminated and the push button
start indicator light (amber) remains
flashing.
yWhen the selector lever is in the neutral
(N) position, the KEY indicator light
(green) and the push button start
indicator light (green) do not illuminate.
7. Press the push button start after both
the KEY indicator light (green) in the
instrument cluster and the push button
start indicator light (green) illuminate.
NOTE
yAfter starting the engine, the push
button start indicator light (amber)
turns off and the ignition switches to the
ON position.
yAfter pressing the push button start and
before the engine starts, the operation
sound of the fuel pump motor from near
the fuel tank can be heard, however, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about ten seconds.
NOTE
yWhether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without the use of the
accelerator.
yIf the engine does not start the first
time, refer to Starting a Flooded Engine
under Emergency Starting. If the engine
still does not start, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer (page 7-21).
4–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead
CAUTION
When starting the engine by holding
the transmitter over the push button
start due to a dead key battery or a
malfunctioning key, be careful not
to allow the following, otherwise the
signal from the key will not be received
correctly and the engine may not start.
NOTE
The push button start indicator light
(green) will flash even if the push button
start is pressed before depressing
the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is
depressed under this condition, the engine
can be started by resuming the procedure
following this.
3. Touch the push button start using the
backside of the key (as shown) while
the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes.
¾Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key.
Push button start
Indicator light
¾Spare keys or keys for other vehicles
equipped with an immobilizer system
touch or come near the key.
Transmitter
NOTE
When touching the push button start using
the backside of the key as shown in the
illustration, touch the push button start
with the lock switch side of the key facing
up.
¾Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage touch or come near the
key.
If the engine cannot be started due to a
dead key battery, the engine can be started
using the following procedure:
4. Verify that the push button start
indicator light (green) turns on.
5. Press the push button start to start the
engine.
1. Continue to depress the brake pedal
firmly until the engine has completely
started.
2. Verify that the push button start
indication light (green) flashes.
4–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
NOTE
yThe engine cannot be started unless the
brake pedal is fully depressed.
yIf there is a malfunction with the push
button start function, the push button
start indicator light (amber) flashes.
In this case, the engine may start,
however, have the vehicle checked at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
yIf the push button start indicator light
(green) does not illuminate, perform the
operation from the beginning again. If
it does not illuminate, have the vehicle
checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yTo switch the ignition position without
starting the engine, perform the
following operations after the push
button start indicator light (green) turns
on.
Emergency Operation for Starting
the Engine
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,
or the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, this could indicate that
the engine may not start using the usual
starting method. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible. If this occurs, the
engine can be force-started. Press and hold
the push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting
the engine such as having the key in the
cabin, and depressing the brake pedal are
required.
1. Release the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button start to switch
the ignition position. The ignition
switches in the order of ACC, ON,
and off each time the push button
start is pressed. To switch the
ignition position again, perform the
operation from the beginning.
4–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:50:41
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Turning the Engine Off
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle
is moving:
Stopping the engine while the vehicle
is moving for any reason other than in
an emergency is dangerous. Stopping
the engine while the vehicle is moving
will result in reduced braking ability
due to the loss of power braking, which
could cause an accident and serious
injury.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Shift the selector lever to the P position
and set the parking brake.
3. Press the push button start to turn off
the engine. The ignition position is off.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the push button start is off.
NOTE
yThe cooling fan in the engine
compartment could turn on for a few
minutes after the ignition is switched
from ON to OFF, whether or not the
A/C is on or off, to cool the engine
compartment quickly.
yWhen the push button start is pressed
from ON to ACC or OFF, the KEY
indicator light (green) may flash for
approximately 30 seconds indicating
that the remaining battery power of the
key is low.
Replace with a new battery before the
key becomes unusable.
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on
page 6-38.
yIf the engine is turned off while the
selector lever is in a position other than
P, the ignition switches to ACC.
Emergency Engine Stop
Continuously pressing the push button
start or quickly pressing it any number of
times while the engine is running or the
vehicle is being driven will turn the engine
off immediately. The ignition switches to
ACC.
4–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:50:42
MEMO
4–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:50:42
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Meters and Gauges
Instrument Cluster
Type A
(Digital Speedometer Type)
Type B
(Analog Speedometer Type (With Tachometer))
Type C
(Analog Speedometer Type (Without Tachometer))
Steering Switch
4–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:50:42
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Speedometer .......................................................................................................... page 4-13
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................... page 4-14
Tachometer ............................................................................................................ page 4-17
Fuel Gauge ............................................................................................................ page 4-18
Dashboard Illumination......................................................................................... page 4-18
Outside Temperature Display ................................................................................ page 4-19
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display ............................................................ page 4-19
Active Driving Display ......................................................................................... page 4-22
Trip Computer and INFO Switch .......................................................................... page 4-20
Speed Unit Selector............................................................................................... page 4-13
Odometer, Trip Meter, Trip Computer and Trip Meter Selector ........................... page 4-15
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the
vehicle.
NOTE
(Analog speedometer type)
If a few seconds have elapsed after
switching the ignition off, the needle may
deviate. However, this does not indicate a
problem.
Speed Unit Selector (Digital
Speedometer)
In some countries, you may have to
change the speed units between km/h and
mph.
Press the speed unit selector for 1.5
seconds or more.
The speed units for the speedometer will
change between km/h and mph.
Speed unit selector
Speedometer
4–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:50:42
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector*
The display mode can be changed from
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B
and then back to odometer by pressing the
selector while one of them is displayed.
The selected mode will be displayed.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total distance
of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter
A, and the other is recorded in trip meter
B.
Selector
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and
trip meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
Odometer
Press the selector
Trip meter A
Press the selector
Trip meter B
Press the selector
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter
is again reset. Return it to “0.0” by
depressing and holding the selector for
one second or more. Use this meter to
measure trip distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC or
off, the odometer or trip meters cannot be
displayed, however, pressing the selector
can inadvertently switch the trip meters or
reset them during an approximate tenminute period in the following cases:
yAfter
the ignition is switched to off from
ON.
yAfter the driver's door is opened.
4–14
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:50:42
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
y(Vehicles with type B audio)
If the fuel economy data is reset using
the fuel economy monitor, or trip A
is reset using the trip meter when the
function which synchronizes the fuel
economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, the fuel economy data and trip A are
reset simultaneously.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page
4-62.
yOnly the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
yThe trip record will be erased when:
Odometer, Trip Meter, Trip
Computer and Trip Meter
Selector*
The display mode can be changed
between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the selector while one of them
is displayed. The selected mode will be
displayed.
Selector
yThe
power supply is interrupted
(blown fuse or the battery is
disconnected).
yThe vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km
(mile).
Odometer
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
Distance-to-empty mode
Current fuel economy mode
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC or
off, the odometer or trip meters cannot be
displayed, however, pressing the selector
can inadvertently switch the trip meters or
reset them during an approximate tenminute period in the following cases:
yAfter
the ignition is switched to off from
ON.
yAfter the driver's door is opened.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
4–15
2014/12/09 10:50:43
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total distance
of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter
A, and the other is recorded in trip meter
B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and
trip meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding
the selector depressed for 1 second
or more. Use this meter to measure
trip distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
NOTE
y(Vehicles with type B audio)
If the fuel economy data is reset using
the fuel economy monitor, or trip A
is reset using the trip meter when the
function which synchronizes the fuel
economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, the fuel economy data and trip A are
reset simultaneously.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page
4-62.
yOnly the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
yThe trip record will be erased when:
yThe
power supply is interrupted
(blown fuse or the battery is
disconnected).
yThe vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km
(mile).
Trip Computer
The following information can be selected
by pressing the selector with the ignition
switched ON.
y
Approximate
distance you can travel on
the available fuel
y
Current fuel economy
If you have any problems with your trip
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Distance-to-empty mode
This mode displays the approximate
distance you can travel on the remaining
fuel based on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
4–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:50:43
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
yEven though the distance-to-empty
display may indicate a sufficient amount
of remaining driving distance before
refueling is required, refuel as soon as
possible if the fuel level is very low or
the low fuel warning light illuminates.
yThe display may not change unless you
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.
yThe distance-to-empty is the
approximate remaining distance the
vehicle can be driven until all the
graduation marks in the fuel gauge
indicating the remaining fuel supply
disappear.
yIf there is no past fuel economy
information such as after first
purchasing your vehicle or the
information is deleted when the battery
cables are disconnected, the actual
distance-to empty/range may differ from
the amount indicated.
Current fuel economy mode
This mode displays the current fuel
economy by calculating the amount of fuel
consumption and the distance traveled.
Current fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every 2 seconds.
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be
displayed.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine damage.
Type A
*1 Striped zone
*1 Red zone
*1 The range varies depending on the type
of gauge.
Type B
*1 Striped zone
*1 Red zone
*1 The range varies depending on the type
of gauge.
NOTE
When the tachometer needle enters the
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the
driver that the gears should be shifted
before entering the RED ZONE.
4–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:50:43
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately
how much fuel is remaining in the tank
when the ignition is switched ON. We
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.
Full
1/4 Full
Dashboard Illumination
When the position lights are turned
on with the ignition switched ON,
the brightness of the instrument panel
illumination is dimmed.
NOTE
When the position lights are turned on,
the position lights indicator light in the
instrument cluster turns on.
Refer to Headlights on page 4-41.
The brightness of the instrument panel and
dashboard illuminations can be adjusted
by rotating the knob.
y
The
Empty
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as
possible.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-24.
NOTE
yAfter refueling, it may require some
time for the indicator to stabilize. In
addition, the indicator may deviate
while driving on a slope or curve since
the fuel moves in the tank.
yThe display indicating a quarter or less
remaining fuel has more segments to
show the remaining fuel level in greater
detail.
yThe direction of the arrow (
) indicates
that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side
of the vehicle.
brightness decreases by rotating the
knob to the left. A beep sound will be
heard when the knob has been rotated to
the maximum dim position.
y
The brightness increases by rotating the
knob to the right.
Dim
Bright
4–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:50:43
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Function for cancelling illumination
dimmer
The illumination dimmer can be canceled
by rotating the dashboard illumination
knob to the right until a beep sound is
heard while the instrument cluster is
dimmed with the ignition switched ON.
If the instrument cluster's visibility is
reduced due to glare from surrounding
brightness, cancel the illumination
dimmer.
NOTE
yWhen the illumination dimmer is
canceled, the instrument cluster cannot
be dimmed even if the position lights are
turned on.
yWhen the illumination dimmer is
canceled, the screen in the center
display switches to constant display of
the daytime screen.
Outside Temperature Display
When the ignition is switched ON, the
outside temperature is displayed.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
outside temperature display may differ
from the actual outside temperature
depending on the surroundings and vehicle
conditions:
ySignificantly
cold or hot
temperatures.
ySudden changes in outside
temperature.
yThe vehicle is parked.
yThe vehicle is driven at low speeds.
The outside temperature unit can be
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit
using the following procedure.
1. Press the INFO button with the ignition
switched off and continue pressing the
INFO button for 5 seconds or longer
while switching the ignition ON. The
outside temperature display flashes.
2. Press the up or down part of the
INFO switch to change the outside
temperature unit.
3. Press and hold the INFO button for 3
seconds or longer while the outside
temperature display is flashing. The
outside temperature display illuminates.
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display*
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
4–19
2014/12/09 10:50:44
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Trip Computer and INFO Switch*
The following information can be selected
by pressing the up or down part of the
INFO switch with the ignition switched
ON.
y
Approximate
distance you can travel on
the available fuel
y
Average fuel economy
y
Current fuel economy
y
Average vehicle speed
If you have any problems with your trip
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Distance-to-empty mode
This mode displays the approximate
distance you can travel on the remaining
fuel based on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
NOTE
yEven though the distance-to-empty
display may indicate a sufficient amount
of remaining driving distance before
refueling is required, refuel as soon as
possible if the fuel level is very low or
the low fuel warning light illuminates.
yThe display may not change unless you
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.
yThe distance-to-empty is the
approximate remaining distance the
vehicle can be driven until all the
graduation marks in the fuel gauge
(indicating the remaining fuel supply)
disappear.
yIf there is no past fuel economy
information such as after first
purchasing your vehicle or the
information is deleted when the battery
cables are disconnected, the actual
distance-to empty/range may differ from
the amount indicated.
Average fuel economy mode
This mode displays the average fuel
economy by calculating the total fuel
consumption and the total traveled
distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection,
or resetting the data. The average fuel
economy is calculated and displayed every
minute.
To clear the data being displayed, press the
INFO button for more than 1.5 seconds.
After pressing the INFO button, - - - L/100
km (- - - mpg) will be displayed for about
1 minute before the fuel economy is
recalculated and displayed.
4–20
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:50:44
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Current fuel economy mode
This mode displays the current fuel
economy by calculating the amount of fuel
consumption and the distance traveled.
Current fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every 2 seconds.
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be
displayed.
Average vehicle speed mode
This mode displays the average vehicle
speed by calculating the distance and the
time traveled since connecting the battery
or resetting the data.
Average vehicle speed will be calculated
and displayed every 10 seconds.
To clear the data being displayed, press the
INFO button for more than 1.5 seconds.
After pressing the INFO button, - - - km/h
(- - - mph) will be displayed for about
1 minute before the vehicle speed is
recalculated and displayed.
4–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:50:44
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Active Driving Display*
Combiner
Mirror
Optical receiver
WARNING
Always adjust the display brightness and position with the vehicle stopped:
Adjusting the display brightness and position while driving the vehicle is dangerous as
doing so could distract your attention from the road ahead and lead to an accident.
CAUTION
¾Do not try to adjust the angle or open/close the active driving display manually.
Fingerprints on the display will make it difficult to view and using excessive force when
operating it could cause damage.
¾Do not place objects in the vicinity of the active driving display. The active driving display
may not operate or any interference with its operation could cause damage.
¾Do not place beverages near the active driving display. If water or other liquids are splashed
on the active driving display, it could cause damage.
¾Do not place objects above the active driving display screen or apply stickers to the
combiner as they will cause interference.
¾A sensor is integrated to control the display's luminosity. If the optical receiver is covered,
the display's luminosity will lower making the display difficult to view.
¾Do not allow intense light to hit the optical receiver. Otherwise, it could cause damage.
NOTE
yIt may be difficult to view the display when wearing sunglasses. Take off your sunglasses
or adjust the luminosity.
yIf the battery has been removed and re-installed or the battery voltage is low, the adjusted
position may deviate.
yThe display may be difficult to view or temporarily affected by weather conditions such as
rain, snow, light, and temperature.
yIf the audio system is removed, the active driving display cannot be operated.
4–22
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:50:45
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
The active driving display indicates the following information:
y
Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Operation Conditions and Warnings
to Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) on page 4-93.
y
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on page 4-74.
y
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Operation Conditions
Refer to Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) on page 4-104.
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Smart Brake Support (SBS) on page 4-109.
y
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) on page 4-87.
y
Vehicle Speed Setting Using Cruise Control
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-122.
y
Turn-by-Turn (TBT) (Direction and Distance) and Lane Guidance
y
Vehicle Speed
Refer
Each setting/adjustment for the active driving display can be performed on the center
display (Type B audio).
icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
1. Select the
2. Select the AD-Disp tab.
3. Select the desired item and perform the setting/adjustment.
Height : Active driving display position
Brightness Control : Method for adjusting screen brightness (Automatically/Manually)
y Calibration : Brightness initialization setting (when selecting automatic adjustment)
y Brightness : Brightness adjustment (when selecting manual adjustment)
y Navigation : On/Off
y Active Driving Display : On/Off
y Reset
y
y
4–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:50:45
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning/Indicator Lights
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and specifications.
Instrument Cluster
Type A
(Digital Speedometer Type)
Type B
(Analog Speedometer Type (With Tachometer))
Type C
(Analog Speedometer Type (Without Tachometer))
Center of Dashboard
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
4–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:50:45
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning Lights
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal
Warning Lights
Page
Master Warning Light*1
7-27
Brake System Warning Light*1*2
7-27
ABS Warning Light*1
7-27
Charging System Warning Light*1
7-27
Engine Oil Warning Light*1
7-27
Check Engine Light*1
7-27
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light*1
7-27
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light*1
7-27
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light*1
7-27
*
AWD Warning Light*1
7-27
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light*1
7-27
Low Fuel Warning Light
7-27
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light*1
7-27
(Red)
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
4–25
2014/12/09 10:50:45
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Warning Lights
Page
Seat Belt Warning Light (Front seat)
7-27
Door-Ajar Warning Light
7-27
*
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
7-27
*
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light*1
7-27
KEY Warning Light*1
7-27
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS)
Warning Light
7-27
*
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Light*1
7-27
*
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light*1
7-27
*
LED Headlight Warning Light
7-27
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Warning Light*1
7-27
(Red)
(Amber)
(Amber)
(Amber)
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*2 The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.
4–26
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:50:46
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Indicator Lights
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal
Indicator Lights
*
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light*1
*
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) OFF Indicator
Light*1
KEY Indicator Light
Page
4-85
4-77
3-8
(Green)
*
High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light
4-73
Wrench Indicator Light*1
4-29
(Green)
TCS/DSC Indicator Light*1
4-59, 4-61
TCS OFF Indicator Light*1
4-60
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS)
Indicator Light*1
4-111, 4-108
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS)
OFF Indicator Light*1
4-111, 4-108
(Red)
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light
4-29
Shift Position Indication
4-31
(Blue)
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light
4-44, 4-44
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
4–27
2014/12/09 10:50:46
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Indicator Lights
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
Page
4-46, 4-53
Security Indicator Light*1
3-36
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Indicator Light
4-97
*
Cruise Main Indicator Light
4-123
*
Cruise Set Indicator Light
4-123
Select Mode Indicator Light
4-65
Lights-On Indicator Light
4-41
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light*1
2-52
(Green)
(Amber)
(Green)
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–28
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:50:47
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Wrench Indicator Light
When the ignition is switched ON, the
wrench indicator light is illuminated and
then turns off after a few seconds.
The wrench indicator light is illuminated
when the preset maintenance period
arrives. Verify the content and perform
maintenance.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page
6-20.
Low Engine Coolant Temperature
Indicator Light (Blue)
The light illuminates continuously when
the engine coolant temperature is low and
turns off after the engine is warm.
If the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light remains illuminated after
the engine has been sufficiently warmed
up, the temperature sensor could have
a malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
4–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:50:48
When Driving
Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle Controls
Lock-release button
Various Lockouts:
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release
button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).
Indicates the selector lever can be shifted freely into any position.
Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.
NOTE
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle that
gives the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to
shift gears. Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional
automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode
and an inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the
engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally
slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-33).
4–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:50:48
When Driving
Transaxle
Shift Position Indication
CAUTION
¾Shifting into P, N or R while the vehicle is
moving can damage your transaxle.
¾Shifting into a driving gear or reverse
when the engine is running faster than
idle can damage the transaxle.
The selector position is indicated when the
ignition is switched ON.
Gear position indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication illuminates and the
numeral for the selected gear is displayed.
Warning Light
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
Transaxle Ranges
y
The
shift position indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates. Refer to
Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
y
The selector lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
P locks the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the selector lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Only setting the selector lever to the
P position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous.
If P fails to hold, the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete
stop before shifting to or from R, except
under rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 3-41).
N (Neutral)
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move suddenly,
causing an accident or serious injury.
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot
be applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
4–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:50:48
When Driving
Transaxle
Shift-Lock System
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle
damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the
brake pedal before moving the selector
lever from N to prevent the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly.
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position. Gears
can be shifted up or down by operating the
selector lever. Refer to Manual Shift Mode
on page 4-33.
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
automatically controls the transaxle shift
points to best suit the road conditions
and driver input. This improves driving
feel. The transaxle may switch to AAS
mode when driving up and down slopes,
cornering, driving at high elevations,
or depressing the accelerator pedal
quickly while the selector lever is in the
D position. Depending on the road and
driving conditions/vehicle operations, gear
shifting could be delayed or not occur,
however, this does not indicate a problem
because the AAS mode will maintain the
optimum gear position.
The shift-lock system prevents shifting out
of P unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift from P:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Start the engine.
Press and hold the lock-release button.
Move the selector lever.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or
the ignition is switched off, the selector
lever cannot be shifted from P.
yThe ignition cannot be switched to OFF
if the selector lever is not in P.
Shift-Lock Override
If the selector lever will not move from P
using the proper shift procedure, continue
to hold down the brake pedal.
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover
using a cloth-wrapped flat head
screwdriver.
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.
Cover
4–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:50:48
When Driving
Transaxle
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
5. Take the vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to have the system
checked.
Manual Shift Mode
The manual shift mode gives you the feel
of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by
allowing you to operate the selector lever
manually. This allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels
much like a manual transaxle when more
control is desired.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
To return to automatic shift mode, shift the
lever from M to D.
NOTE
yIf you change to manual shift mode
when the vehicle is stopped, the gear
will shift to M1.
yIf you change to manual shift mode
without depressing the accelerator
pedal when driving in D range, 5th
gear/6th gear, the gear will shift to M4/
M5.
Indicators
Manual shift mode indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication in the instrument panel
illuminates.
Gear position indication
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Type A
NOTE
y(For vehicles with type C instrument
cluster*1)
If the engine speed is about to exceed
the permissible engine speed, the buzzer
sounds.
Refer to Over Rev. Buzzer on page 7-43.
*1 To determine which instrument
cluster is equipped on your Mazda,
Refer to Meters and Gauges on page
4-12.
Gear position indication
Manual shift mode indication
yChanging
to manual shift mode while
driving will not damage the transaxle.
4–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:50:48
When Driving
Transaxle
Type B
Gear position indication
Manual shift mode indication
Type C
NOTE
yIf the gears cannot be shifted down
when driving at higher speeds, the gear
position indication will flash twice to
signal that the gears cannot be shifted
down (to protect the transaxle).
yIf the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
temperature becomes too high, there
is the possibility that the transaxle
will switch to automatic shift mode,
canceling manual shift mode and
turning off the gear position indication
illumination. This is a normal function
to protect the AT. After the ATF
temperature has decreased, the gear
position indication illumination turns
back on and driving in manual shift
mode is restored.
Manually shifting up
You can shift gears up by operating the
shift lever or the steering shift switches*.
M1 ĺ M2 ĺ M3 ĺ M4 ĺ M5 ĺ M6
Gear position indication
Manual shift mode indication
4–34
Using selector lever
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift
lever back once.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:50:49
When Driving
Transaxle
Using steering shift switch*
To shift up to a higher gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the UP switch
) toward you once with your
(
fingers.
UP switch
WARNING
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
NOTE
yWhen driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up.
yIn manual shift mode, do not run the
engine with the tachometer needle in
the RED ZONE. When the engine rpm is
high, a gear may shift up automatically
to protect the engine.
yWhen depressing the accelerator fully,
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
yThe steering shift switch can be used
temporarily even if the selector lever is
in the D position while driving. In
addition, it returns to automatic shift
) is
mode when the UP switch (
pulled rearward for a sufficient amount
of time.
Manually shifting down
You can shift gears down by operating the
shift lever or the steering shift switches*.
M6 ĺ M5 ĺ M4 ĺ M3 ĺ M2ĺ M1
Using selector lever
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the
selector lever forward once.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
4–35
2014/12/09 10:50:49
When Driving
Transaxle
Using steering shift switch*
To shift down to a lower gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the DOWN
switch toward you once with your
fingers.
DOWN switch
WARNING
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving
at high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident.
NOTE
yWhen driving at high speeds, the gear
may not shift down.
yDuring deceleration, the gear may
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
yWhen depressing the accelerator fully,
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
Second gear fixed mode
When the selector lever is moved back
while the vehicle speed is about 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) or less, the transaxle is set in the
second gear fixed mode. The gear is fixed
in second while in this mode for easier
acceleration from a stop and driving on
slippery roads such as snow-covered
roads.
If the selector lever is moved back or
forward while in the second gear fixed
mode, the mode will be canceled.
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
4–36
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:50:49
When Driving
Transaxle
Shift gear (shifting) speed limit
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows: When the
selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is shifted.
Shift up
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.
Shift down
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the gear
position indication flashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted.
Kickdown
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.
NOTE
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fixed mode.
Auto-shift down
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration.
NOTE
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fixed mode, the gear remains in
second.
4–37
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
2014/12/09 10:50:50
When Driving
Transaxle
Recommendations for shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration and cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:
Vehicle speed*1
Gear
M1 to M2
24 km/h (15 mph)
M2 to M3
40 km/h (25 mph)
M3 to M4
65 km/h (40 mph)
M4 to M5
73 km/h (45 mph)
M5 to M6
81 km/h (50 mph)
*1 Always observe local speed limit regulations.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the
engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.
4–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:50:50
When Driving
Transaxle
Direct Mode*
Type B
Direct mode can be used for temporarily
switching gears by operating the steering
shift switch while the vehicle is being
driven with the selector lever in the D
range.
While in direct mode, the D and M
indication illuminate and the gear position
in use is illuminated.
Direct mode is canceled (released) under
the following conditions.
y
The
UP switch (
) is pulled
rearward for a certain amount of time or
longer.
y
The vehicle is driven for a certain
amount of time or longer (time differs
depending on the driving conditions
while operating).
y
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a
slow speed.
Gear position indication
Direct mode indication
Type C
Direct mode indication
Type A
Gear position indication
Gear position indication
Direct mode indication
NOTE
Shifting up and down while in direct mode
may not be possible depending on the
vehicle speed. In addition, because direct
mode is canceled (released) depending
on the rate of acceleration or if the
accelerator is fully depressed, use of the
manual shift mode is recommended if you
need to drive the vehicle in a particular
gear for long periods.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
4–39
2014/12/09 10:50:50
When Driving
Transaxle
Driving Tips
WARNING
Do not let the vehicle move in a
direction opposite to the direction
selected by the selector lever:
Do not let the vehicle move backward
with the selector lever in a forward
position, or do not let the vehicle
move forward with the selector lever
in the reverse position. Otherwise, the
engine may stop, causing the loss of
the power brake and power steering
functions, and make it difficult to
control the vehicle which could result
in an accident.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while gradually
accelerating.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight and
grade steepness. Descend slowly, using the
brakes only occasionally to prevent them
from overheating.
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
NOTE
(Some models)
The accelerator pedal may initially feel
heavy as it is being depressed, then feel
lighter as it is depressed further. This
change in pedal force aids the engine
control system in determining how much
the accelerator pedal has been depressed
for performing kickdown, and functions to
control whether or not kickdown should be
performed.
4–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:50:50
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Lighting Control
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination on or off.
When the lights are turned on, the lights-on indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on.
NOTE
yIf the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30
seconds after switching the ignition off.
The time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
yTo prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless
safety requires them.
Without auto-light control
Switch Position
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Daytime running lights
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Ignition Position
ON
4–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:50:50
When Driving
Switches and Controls
With auto-light control
Switch Position
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Headlights
Ignition Position
Off
Off
Auto*1
Off
Off
Off
On
OFF
On
Daytime running lights
On
Off
Auto*1
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off
Off
Auto*1
Off
On
On
On
On
*1 The headlight and other light settings switch automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by
the sensor.
Auto-light control*
When the headlight switch is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON, the light
sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the headlights,
other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off (see chart above).
4–42
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:50:51
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CAUTION
¾Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise
the light sensor will not operate correctly.
¾The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands and
position and the
scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the
ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades could be
damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off completely when it is particularly tempting to leave the
engine running. This is particularly important when clearing ice and snow.
NOTE
yThe headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination may not turn off
immediately even if the surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor
determines that it is night time if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several
minutes such as inside long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.
In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the
position.
y(Without auto headlight off function)
When the headlight switch is in the
position and the ignition is switched to ACC or
the ignition is switched off, the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination will turn off.
yThe dashboard illumination can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument cluster.
Also, the day/night mode can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound is heard.
To adjust the brightness of the dashboard illumination:
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-18.
yThe sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4–43
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
2014/12/09 10:50:51
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Headlight High-Low Beam
The headlights switch between high and
low beams by moving the lever forward or
backward.
The headlight high-beam indicator light
in the instrument cluster illuminates
simultaneously. The lever will return to the
normal position when released.
High beam
Low beam
When the headlight high-beams are on,
the headlight high-beam indicator light is
turned on.
Flashing the Headlights
Coming Home Light System
The coming home light system turns on
the headlights (low beams) when the lever
is operated.
To turn on the system
When the lever is pulled with the ignition
switched to ACC or OFF, the low beam
headlights turn on.
The headlights turn off after a certain
period of time has elapsed after the doors
are closed.
Can be used when the ignition is switched
ON.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
towards you (the headlight switch does not
need to be on).
OFF
Flashing
4–44
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:50:51
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
yThe time until the headlights turn off
after all of the doors are closed can be
changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yIf no operations are done for 3 minutes
after the lever is pulled, the headlights
turn off.
yThe headlights turn off if the lever is
pulled again while the headlights are
illuminated.
Leaving Home Light System
The leaving home light system turns on
the lights when the transmitter unlock
button is pressed while away from the
vehicle.
To turn on the system
When the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are as indicated below,
the headlights will illuminate when the
transmitter unlock button is pressed and
the vehicle receives the transmitter signal.
The headlights turn off after a certain
period of time has elapsed (30 seconds).
y
Ignition
switch: off
switch:
y
Headlight
or
The following lights turn on when the
leaving home light system is operated.
Low beams, Parking lights, Taillights,
License lights
Unlock button
Lock button
NOTE
yOperation of the leaving home light
system can be turned on or off.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yWhen the transmitter lock button is
pressed and the vehicle receives the
transmitter signal, the headlights turn
off.
yWhen the headlight switch is in a
or , the
position other than
headlights turn off.
Headlight Leveling*
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
The angle of the headlights will be
automatically adjusted when turning on
the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights
Some countries require moving vehicles
to have their lights on (daytime running
lights) during the daytime.
The daytime running lights turn on
automatically when the vehicle starts
moving.
They turn off when the parking brake is
operated or the shift lever is shifted to the
P position .
NOTE
(Except Canada)
The daytime running lights can be
deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
4–45
2014/12/09 10:50:52
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Fog Lights*
The front fog lights can be used when the
ignition is switched ON.
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
The fog lights will improve visibility at
night and during foggy conditions.
The fog lights turn on when the fog light
switch is turned to the position and turn
off when the switch is turned to the
position.
The fog lights turn on when the headlights
are turned on. They will not turn on if the
position or
headlight switch is in the
position.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the turn and lane-change signals.
Turn Signals
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
If the indicator light continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to its
original position.
Right turn
Right lane change
Fog light switch
NOTE
yThe fog lights will turn off when the
headlights are set at high beams.
y(With auto-light control)
If the fog light switch is in the
position and the headlight switch is in
position, the fog lights will
the
turn on when the headlights, the
exterior lights and dashboard
illumination turn on.
4–46
OFF
Left lane change
Left turn
The turn signal indicators (green) in the
instrument cluster flash according to the
operation of the turn signal lever to show
which signal is working.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:50:52
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
yIf an indicator light stays on without
flashing or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out.
yA personalized function is available to
change the turn indicator sound volume.
(page 9-10)
Lane-Change Signals
Move the lever halfway toward the
direction of the lane change—until the
indicator flashes— and hold it there. It will
return to the off position when released.
Three-Flash Turn Signal
After releasing the turn signal lever, the
turn signal indicator flashes three times.
The operation can be cancelled by moving
the lever in the direction opposite to which
it was operated.
NOTE
The three-flash turn signal function can be
switched to operable/inoperable using the
personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the wipers.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
affect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Only use windshield washer fluid mixed
with anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions is dangerous as
it could freeze on the windshield and
block your vision which could cause
an accident. In addition, make sure
the windshield is sufficiently warmed
using the defroster before spraying the
washer fluid.
4–47
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 47
2014/12/09 10:50:53
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the
wiper blades, the wiper motor is protected
from motor breakdown, overheating
and possible fire by a circuit breaker.
This mechanism will automatically stop
operation of the blades, but only for about
5 minutes.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch
and park off the right-of-way, and remove
the snow and ice.
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and
the blades should operate normally. If
they do not resume functioning, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. Drive to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way. Wait until the
weather clears before trying to drive with
the wipers inoperative.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever
up or down.
With intermittent wiper
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
Single wipe cycle (mist)
Stop
Intermittent
Low speed
High speed
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the intermittent position
and choose the interval timing by rotating
the ring.
Slow
INT ring
Fast
4–48
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 48
2014/12/09 10:50:53
When Driving
Switches and Controls
With auto-wiper control
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
Auto-wiper control
When the wiper lever is in the
position, the rain sensor senses the amount
of rainfall on the windshield and turns the
wipers on or off automatically (off—
intermittent—low speed—high speed).
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted by turning the switch on the
wiper lever.
From the center position (normal), rotate
the switch downward for higher sensitivity
(faster response) or rotate it upward for
less sensitivity (slower response).
Single wipe cycle (mist)
Stop
Auto control
Low speed
Switch
Less sensitivity
Center
position
High speed
Higher sensitivity
4–49
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 49
2014/12/09 10:50:53
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CAUTION
¾Do not shade the rain sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on the
windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor
will not operate correctly.
¾When the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is
switched ON as fingers could be pinched
or the wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
NOTE
ySwitching the auto-wiper lever from the
to the
position while driving
activates the windshield wipers once,
after which they operate according to
the rainfall amount.
yThe auto-wiper control may not operate
when the rain sensor temperature is
about -10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about
85 °C (185 °F) or higher.
yIf the windshield is coated with water
repellent, the rain sensor may not be
able to sense the amount of rainfall
correctly and the auto-wiper control
may not operate properly.
yIf dirt or foreign matter (such as ice or
matter containing salt water) adheres
to the windshield above the rain sensor,
or if the windshield is iced, it could
cause the wipers to move automatically.
However, if the wipers cannot remove
this ice, dirt or foreign matter, the autowiper control will stop operation. In
this case, set the wiper lever to the low
speed position or high speed position
for manual operation, or remove the ice,
dirt or foreign matter by hand to restore
the auto-wiper operation.
yIf the auto-wiper lever is left in the
position, the wipers could operate
automatically from the effect of strong
light sources, electromagnetic waves, or
infrared light because the rain sensor
uses an optical sensor. It is
recommended that the auto-wiper lever
position other
be switched to the
than when driving the vehicle under
rainy conditions.
yThe auto-wiper control functions can
be turned off. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-10.
4–50
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 50
2014/12/09 10:50:54
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fluid.
OFF
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the wiper.
Rear Window Wiper
Washer
NOTE
With the wiper lever in the
or
position, the wipers will operate
continuously until the lever is released.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fluid level (page 6-31). If the fluid level
is normal, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear
wiper/washer switch.
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
Stop
Intermittent
Normal
Rear Window Washer
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/
washer switch to the position. After the
switch is released, the washer will stop.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fluid level (page 6-31). If the fluid level is
normal and the washer still does not work,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–51
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 51
2014/12/09 10:50:54
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger clears fog from
the rear window.
Fully Automatic Climate Control
Indicator light
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the defogger.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defogger. The rear window
defogger operates for about 15 minutes
and then turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates when the
defogger is operating.
To turn off the rear window defogger
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Manual Climate Control
Indicator light
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defogger grid inside the window.
NOTE
This defogger is not designed for melting
snow. If there is an accumulation of snow
on the rear window, remove it before using
the defogger.
Mirror Defogger*
To turn on the mirror defoggers, switch
the ignition ON and press the rear window
defogger switch (page 4-52).
4–52
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 52
2014/12/09 10:50:54
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Horn
To sound the horn, press the
the steering wheel.
Hazard Warning Flasher
mark on
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and
all the turn signals will flash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster flash simultaneously.
NOTE
yThe turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
yCheck local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle
is being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
4–53
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 53
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
Brake
Brake System
Foot Brake
This vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if
you pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously on
the brake pedal or steadily applying
the brakes for long distances is
dangerous. This causes overheated
brakes, resulting in longer stopping
distances or even total brake failure.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control and a serious accident. Avoid
continuous application of the brakes.
¾Do not drive with your foot held on the
brake pedal. Doing so could result in the
following:
¾The brake parts will wear out more
quickly.
¾The brakes can overheat and
adversely affect brake performance.
¾Always depress the brake pedal with
the right foot. Applying the brakes with
the unaccustomed left foot could slow
your reaction time to an emergency
situation resulting in insufficient braking
operation.
¾Wear shoes appropriate for driving in
order to avoid your shoe contacting
the brake pedal when depressing the
accelerator pedal.
4–54
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 54
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
Brake
Parking Brake
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on
will cause excessive wear of the brake
parts.
Releasing the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and pull the
parking brake lever upwards, then press
the release button. While holding the
button, lower the parking brake lever all
the way down to the released position.
NOTE
For parking in snow, refer to Winter
Driving (page 3-41) regarding parking
brake use.
Setting the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards
with sufficient force to hold the vehicle in
a stationary position.
Warning Light
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
Brake Pad Wear Indicator
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
4–55
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 55
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
Brake
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Brake Assist
During emergency braking situations
when it is necessary to depress the brake
pedal with greater force, the brake assist
system provides braking assistance, thus
enhancing braking performance.
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply
more firmly.
NOTE
yWhen the brake pedal is depressed hard
or depressed more quickly, the pedal
will feel softer but the brakes will apply
more firmly. This is a normal effect of
the brake assist operation and does not
indicate a malfunction.
yWhen the brake pedal is depressed
hard or depressed more quickly, a
motor/pump operation noise may be
heard. This is a normal effect of the
brake assist and does not indicate a
malfunction.
yThe brake assist equipment does not
supersede the functionality of the
vehicle's main braking system.
4–56
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)*
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is a function
which assists the driver in accelerating
from a stop while on a slope. When
the driver releases the brake pedal and
depresses the accelerator pedal while
on a slope, the function prevents the
vehicle from rolling. The braking force is
maintained automatically after the brake
pedal is released on a steep grade.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the selector lever
is in the reverse (R) position, and on an
upward slope when the shift lever is in a
forward gear.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on Hill Launch
Assist (HLA):
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is an auxiliary
device for accelerating from a stop
on a slope. The system only operates
for about two seconds and therefore,
relying only on the system, when
accelerating from a stop is dangerous
because the vehicle may move (roll)
unexpectedly and cause an accident.
The vehicle could roll depending on
the vehicle's load or if it is towing
something.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before starting to drive the
vehicle.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 56
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
Brake
NOTE
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate on a gentle slope. In addition,
the gradient of the slope on which the
system will operate changes depending
on the vehicle's load.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate if the parking brake is applied,
or if the vehicle has not stopped
completely.
yWhile Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is
operating, the brake pedal may feel
stiff and vibrate, however, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate while the TCS/DSC indicator
light is illuminated.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-24.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
turn off even if the TCS OFF switch is
pressed to turn off the TCS.
4–57
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 57
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Antilock Brake System
(ABS)
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If
one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS
responds by automatically releasing and
reapplying that wheel's brake.
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal ABS system operation. Continue to
depress the brake pedal without pumping
the brakes.
NOTE
yBraking distances may be longer on
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for
example) which usually have a hard
foundation. A vehicle with a normal
braking system may require less
distance to stop under these conditions
because the tires will build up a wedge
of surface layer when the wheels skid.
yThe sound of the ABS operating may
be heard when starting the engine
or immediately after starting the
vehicle, however, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe
and reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), driving on ice and snow,
and hydroplaning (reduced tire friction
and road contact because of water on
the road surface). You can still have an
accident.
4–58
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 58
2014/12/09 10:50:55
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by controlling
engine torque and braking. When the TCS
detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers
engine torque and operates the brakes to
prevent loss of traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels,
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
WARNING
Do not rely on the Traction Control
System (TCS) as a substitute for safe
driving:
The Traction Control System (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the TCS OFF
switch (page 4-60).
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
yIn addition to the indicator light
flashing, a slight lugging sound will
come from the engine. This indicates
that the TCS/DSC is operating properly.
yOn slippery surfaces, such as fresh
snow, it will be impossible to achieve
high rpm when the TCS is on.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at
reduced speeds when roads are covered
with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction devices
on snow and/or ice-covered roads
is dangerous. The Traction Control
System (TCS) alone cannot provide
adequate traction and you could still
have an accident.
4–59
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 59
2014/12/09 10:50:56
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
TCS OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.
It also illuminates when the TCS OFF
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.
Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 4-60.
If the light remains illuminated and the
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The DSC
may have a malfunction.
TCS OFF Switch
NOTE
yWhen TCS is on and you attempt to free
the vehicle when it is stuck, or drive
it out of freshly fallen snow, the TCS
(part of the DSC system) will activate.
Depressing the accelerator will not
increase engine power and freeing
the vehicle may be difficult. When this
happens, turn off the TCS.
yIf the TCS is off when the engine is
turned off, it automatically activates
when the ignition is switched ON.
yLeaving the TCS on will provide the
best traction.
yIf the TCS OFF switch is pressed and
held for 10 seconds or more, the TCS
OFF switch malfunction detection
function operates and the TCS system
activates automatically. The TCS OFF
indicator light turns off while the TCS
system is operative.
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Press the switch again to turn the TCS
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light will
turn off.
4–60
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 60
2014/12/09 10:50:56
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control (DSC)
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
when driving on slippery surfaces, or
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,
enhancing vehicle safety.
Refer to ABS (page 4-58) and TCS (page
4-59).
DSC operation is possible at speeds
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
CAUTION
¾The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
¾Use tires of the correct size specified
for your Mazda on all four wheels.
¾Use tires of the same manufacturer,
brand and tread pattern on all four
wheels.
¾Do not mix worn tires.
¾The DSC may not operate correctly when
tire chains are used or a temporary spare
tire is installed because the tire diameter
changes.
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
WARNING
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability
Control as a substitute for safe driving:
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–61
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 61
2014/12/09 10:50:56
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Fuel Economy Monitor*
For vehicles with type B audio, the Fuel Consumption are switched and displayed by
operating each icon in the display.
In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy efficiency to date is displayed in the
ending display when the ending display is turned on.
icon on the home screen to display the applications screen.
1. Select the
2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”.
3. Operate the commander switch or touch the screen and display the menu.
NOTE
When the menu is displayed by touching the screen, the display is hidden automatically after
6 seconds.
4. Select the icon in the menu and perform the operation. Each icon operates as follows:
Indication on display
Control status
Hides the menu display.
Displays the application screen.
Switches the Fuel Economy Monitor in the order of
Fuel Consumption.
Resets the fuel economy data.
Displays the following setting screen.
yEnding display on/off switching
yOn/off switching for function which
synchronizes
reset fuel economy data to trip meter (Trip A)
4–62
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 62
2014/12/09 10:50:56
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Fuel Consumption Display
Information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
Indication on display
Control status
Displays the fuel economy for the past 60 minutes.
the fuel economy every minute for the
past 1 to 10 minutes.
yDisplays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for the
past 10 to 60 minutes.
yDisplays
Displays the average fuel economy over the past 5
resets and after the current reset.
Calculates the average fuel economy every minute
after vehicle travel begins, and displays it.
NOTE
yThe fuel economy data can be reset by doing the following operation:
yPress
the reset switch from the menu screen.
the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, reset trip A of the trip meter.
yDelete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer.
yWhen
yAfter
resetting the fuel economy data, “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel economy
is calculated.
Ending Screen Display
When the ignition is switched off from ON after completing a trip, the actual performance
for the total fuel economy efficiency is displayed for 5 seconds.
4–63
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 63
2014/12/09 10:50:56
When Driving
Drive Selection
Drive Selection
Drive selection is a system to switch the vehicle's drive mode. When the sport mode
is selected, vehicle's response against accelerator operation is enhanced. This provides
additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely make maneuvers such as lane
changes, merging onto freeways, or passing other vehicles.
CAUTION
Do not use the sport mode when driving on slippery roads such as wet or snow-covered
roads. It may cause tire slipping.
NOTE
yWhen the sport mode is selected, driving at higher engine speeds increases and it may
increase fuel consumption. Mazda recommends that you cancel the sport mode on normal
driving.
yDrive mode cannot be switched in the following conditions:
yABS/TCS/DSC
ySteering
is operating
wheel is being operated abruptly
4–64
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 64
2014/12/09 10:50:57
When Driving
Drive Selection
Drive Selection Switch
Press the drive selection switch to the
side (forward) to select the sport
mode.
Pull the drive selection switch to the
side (backward) to cancel the sport mode.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched off, the
sport mode is canceled.
yDepending on the driving conditions
when sport mode is selected, the vehicle
may perform shift-down or slightly
accelerate.
Select Mode Indicator Light
When the sport mode is selected, the
select mode indicator light turns on in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE
If the mode cannot be switched to drive
mode, the select mode indicator light
flashes to notify the driver.
4–65
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 65
2014/12/09 10:50:57
When Driving
AWD
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Operation
AWD provides excellent drivability on
snow-covered and ice-packed roads, sand
and mud, as well as on steep slopes and
other slippery surfaces.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-25.
WARNING
Never spin a wheel that is off the
ground:
Spinning a wheel that is off the ground
as a result of the vehicle being stuck
or in a ditch is dangerous. The drive
assembly could be seriously damaged
which could lead to an accident or
could even lead to overheating, oil
leakage, and a fire.
AWD Driving
This vehicle has not been designed for the
purpose of off-road driving or rallies. Do
not attempt to drive over uneven or rocky
surfaces, or across rivers.
Although this vehicle is equipped with
AWD, acceleration, steering and braking
operations should be conducted in the
same manner as with a non-AWD vehicle,
with the emphasis placed on safe driving.
Tires and Tire Chains
The condition of the tires plays a large
role in the performance of the vehicle.
Moreover, to prevent adverse effects to the
drive assembly, please note the following:
Tires
y
When replacing tires, always replace all
front and rear tires at the same time.
y
All tires must be of the same size,
manufacture, brand and tread pattern.
Pay particular attention when equipping
snow or other types of winter tires.
y
Do not mix tread-worn tires with normal
tires.
y
Inspect tire inflation pressures at the
specified periods adjust to the specified
pressures, and initialize the tire pressure
monitoring system.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Initialization on page 4-129.
NOTE
Check the tire inflation pressure label
attached to driver's door frame for the
correct tire inflation pressure.
y
Make
sure to equip the vehicle with
genuine wheels of the specified size, on
all wheels. With AWD, the system is
calibrated for all four wheels being of
the same dimensions.
Tire chains
y
Install tire chains to the front tires.
y
Do not use tire chains on the rear
wheels.
y
Do not drive the vehicle faster than
30 km/h (19 mph) with the tire chains
installed.
y
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains
on road conditions other than snow or
ice.
Towing
If the vehicle requires towing, have it
towed with all four wheels completely off
the ground 7-24.
4–66
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 66
2014/12/09 10:50:57
When Driving
Power Steering
Power Steering
y
Power
steering is only operable when
the engine is running. If the engine is
off or if the power steering system is
inoperable, you can still steer, but it
requires more physical effort.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving or the steering
vibrates, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
y
The warning light notifies the driver
of system abnormalities and operation
conditions.
In addition, the buzzer may also activate
depending on the system abnormality or
operation condition.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
Refer to Power Steering Warning Buzzer
on page 7-42.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running. This
could damage the power steering
system.
4–67
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 67
2014/12/09 10:50:57
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
i-ACTIVSENSE*
i-ACTIVSENSE is a collective term covering a series of advanced safety and driver support
systems which make use of a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and radar sensors. These
systems consist of active safety and pre-crash safety systems.
These systems are designed to assist the driver in safer driving by reducing the load on the
driver and helping to avert collisions or reduce their severity. However, because each system
has its limitations, always drive carefully and do not rely solely on the systems.
Active Safety Technology
Active Safety Technology supports safer driving by helping the driver to recognize potential
hazards and avert accidents.
Driver awareness support systems
Nighttime visibility
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)..............................................................................4-70
High Beam Control System (HBC) ....................................................................................4-71
Forward/rear detection
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) .........................................................................4-74
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System ...............................................................................4-80
Inter-vehicle distance recognition
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) ..................................................................4-87
Rear obstruction detection when leaving a parking space
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ........................................................................................4-90
Driver support system
Inter-vehicle distance
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) ...............................................................................4-93
Pre-Crash Safety Technology
Pre-crash safety technology is designed to assist the driver in averting collisions or reduce
their severity in situations where they cannot be avoided.
Collision damage reduction in low vehicle speed range
Forward driving
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ...................................................................................4-104
Collision damage reduction in medium/high speed range
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ..............................................................................................4-109
4–68
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 68
2014/12/09 10:50:57
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Camera and Sensors
Forward sensing camera (FSC)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while
traveling at night and detects traffic lanes. The following systems also use the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
y
High
Beam Control system (HBC)
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Lane
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed at the top of the windshield near the
rearview mirror.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-112.
Radar sensor (front)
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead
sent from the radar sensor. The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
y
Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Distance
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the radiator grille.
Refer to Radar Sensor (Front) on page 4-115.
Laser sensor (front)
The laser sensor (front) emits a near-infrared laser beam and receives the beam reflected
off the reflective surface of a vehicle in front, and the detected beam is then used for
measurement. The following systems also use the laser sensor (front).
y
Smart
y
Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS)
Brake Support (SBS)
The laser sensor (front) is installed at the top of the windshield near the rearview mirror.
Refer to Laser Sensor (Front) on page4-118.
Radar sensors (rear)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensors. The following
systems also use the radar sensors (rear).
y
Blind
y
Rear
Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Refer to Radar Sensors (Rear) on page 4-120.
4–69
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 69
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)*
The adaptive front lighting system (AFS) automatically adjusts the headlight beams to the
left or right in conjunction with the operation of the steering wheel after the headlights have
been turned on.
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
NOTE
The Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) function can be switched to operable/inoperable
using the personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4–70
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 70
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
High Beam Control System (HBC)*
The High Beam Control System (HBC) determines the conditions in front of the vehicle
using the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) while driving in darkness to automatically switch
the headlights between high and low beams.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (18 mph), the headlights are switched
to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite direction.
The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs:
y
The
system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in the
opposite direction.
y
The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and
towns.
y
The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
The recognition distance of the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
varies according to the
surrounding conditions.
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
The warning light flashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
CAUTION
¾Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the camera,
otherwise the system will not operate normally.
¾Do not rely excessively on the High Beam Control System (HBC) and drive the vehicle while
paying sufficient attention to safety. Switch the headlights between the high beams and
low beams manually if necessary.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 71
4–71
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following
conditions. If the system does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch
between high and low beams according to the visibility as well as road and traffic
conditions.
yWhen
there are sources of light in the area such as street lamps, illuminated signboards,
and traffic signals.
yWhen there are reflective objects in the surrounding area such as reflective plates and
signs.
yWhen visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.
yWhen driving on roads with sharp curves or hilly terrain.
yWhen the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim
or not illuminated.
yWhen there is sufficient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.
yWhen the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats
are occupied.
yWhen visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires
onto your windshield.
4–72
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 72
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
To Operate the System
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
operates to switch the headlights
automatically between high and low
beams after the ignition is switched ON
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO
and high beam position. At the same time,
the High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Manual Switching
Switching to low beams
Shift the lever to the low beam position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off.
Switching to high beams
Turn the headlight switch to the
position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off and the
is illuminated.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
determines that it is dark based on the
brightness of the surrounding area.
NOTE
yWhen the vehicle speed is 30 km/h
(18 mph) or higher, the headlights
automatically switch to high beams
when there are no vehicles ahead or
approaching in the opposite direction.
When the vehicle speed is less than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the High Beam
Control System (HBC) switches the
headlights to low beams.
yThe low beams may not switch to high
beams when cornering.
yOperation of the High Beam Control
System (HBC) function can be disabled.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
4–73
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 73
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)*
The LDWS system notifies the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane.
The system detects the white or yellow lines on the traffic lane using the forward sensing
camera and if it determines that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane, it notifies the
driver using the active driving display (vehicles with active driving display), and by flashing
the LDWS warning light and activating the LDWS warning beep.
Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white or yellow lines.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera on page 4-112.
Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white or yellow lines.
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
LDWS warning light
The warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
WARNING
Do not use the LDWS under the following conditions:
The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions,
resulting in an accident.
¾Driving on roads with tight curves.
¾Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).
The functions of the LDWS have limitations:
Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive with care. The system is not
designed to compensate for a driver’s lack of caution and if you rely too much on the
LDWS it could lead to an accident. The driver is responsible for assuring lane changes and
other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which the vehicle is traveling
and the vehicle’s surroundings.
4–74
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 74
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension. If the vehicle height or the damping force of the
suspensions is changed, the LDWS may not operate correctly.
NOTE
yIf your vehicle deviates from its traffic lane, the LDWS operates (warning sound and
indicator light). Steer the vehicle adequately to drive the vehicle to the center of the lane.
yWhen the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the LDWS warning is
automatically canceled. The LDWS warning becomes operable when the turn signal lever
is returned and the system detects the white or yellow lines.
yIf the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the
vehicle moves close to a white or yellow line, the system determines that the driver is
making a lane change and the LDWS warning is automatically canceled.
yThe LDWS may not operate during the period immediately after the vehicle has deviated
from its lane and the LDWS has operated, or the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly
within a short period of time.
yThe LDWS does not operate if it does not detect the white or yellow lines of the traffic
lane.
4–75
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 75
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yUnder
the following conditions, the LDWS may not be able to detect white or yellow lines
correctly and the LDWS may not operate correctly.
yIf
an object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the
camera.
yHeavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the
vehicle is inclined.
yThe tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.
yWhen the vehicle is driven on the entry and exit to or from the rest area or tollgate of a
highway.
yThe white or yellow lines are less visible because of dirt or paint flaking.
yThe vehicle ahead is running near a white or yellow line and the line is less visible.
yA white or yellow line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).
yThe vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane due to
construction.
yA misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction,
or because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves filled with water.
yThe surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a
tunnel.
yThe illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is
deviated.
yThe windshield is dirty or foggy.
yBack-light is reflecting from the road surface.
yThe road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.
yThe shade of a guardrail parallel to a white or yellow line is on the road.
yThe width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.
yThe road is excessively uneven.
yThe vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.
yThere are two or more adjacent white or yellow lines.
yThere are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an
intersection.
4–76
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 76
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
When the System Operates
1. The system goes on operation standby
when the LDWS switch is pressed
and the LDWS OFF indicator light
in the instrument cluster turns off.
For vehicles equipped with the active
driving display, the driving lane (border
lines) is indicated in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in the center of the
driving lane while the LDWS OFF
indicator light is turned off. The system
becomes operational when all of the
following conditions are met.
The vehicle is driven in the center
of the driving lane with the white or
yellow lines on the left and right sides,
or on either side.
y The vehicle speed is 70 km/h (44 mph)
or faster.
y The vehicle is driven on a straight road
or road with gentle curves.
y
For vehicles equipped with the active
driving display, the driving lane is
indicated in the display.
Indication on display
Indication on display
The LDWS does not operate in the
following cases:
The system cannot detect white or
yellow lines.
y The vehicle speed is less than 65 km/h
(40 mph).
y The vehicle is making a sharp curve.
y The vehicle is making a curve at an
inadequate speed.
y
4–77
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 77
2014/12/09 10:50:58
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe LDWS does not operate until the
system detects a white or yellow line on
either the left or right.
yWhen the system detects a white or
yellow line on one side only, the system
will activate the warning only when the
vehicle deviates on the side where the
white or yellow line is being detected.
yThe distance and warning sensitivity
(likelihood of a warning) which the
system uses to determine the possibility
of a lane departure can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Auto cancel
In the following cases, the LDWS cancels
automatically and the LDWS warning
light in the instrument cluster turns on.
y
The
temperature inside the camera is
high or low.
y
The windshield around the camera is
foggy.
y
The windshield around the camera is
blocked by an obstruction, causing poor
forward visibility.
For vehicles equipped with the active
driving display, the lane (border lines) is
indicated in the display. The LDWS is
enabled automatically when the operation
conditions are met, and the LDWS
warning light turns off.
Auto cancel warning
When the following operations are
performed, the LDWS determines that
the driver intends to make a lane change
and the LDWS warning is canceled
automatically. The LDWS is enabled
automatically after the driver performs the
operation.
y
The
steering wheel is operated abruptly.
brake pedal is depressed abruptly.
y
The accelerator pedal is depressed
abruptly.
y
The turn signal lever is operated (after
the turn signal lever is returned, the
LDWS may not operate for about 3
seconds which is the period of time
required to make a lane correction).
y
The
NOTE
After about 60 seconds have elapsed with
the turn signal lever left operating, the
LDWS warning may operate if the vehicle
is close to a white or yellow line.
Canceling the System
Press the LDWS switch to cancel the
LDWS. The LDWS OFF indicator light
turns on.
For vehicles with the active driving
display, the driving lane indication in the
active driving display is not indicated
when the LDWS is cancelled.
4–78
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 78
2014/12/09 10:50:59
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
LDWS Warning
If the system determines that there is the
possibility of a lane departure, the LDWS
warning beep activates and the LDWS
warning light flashes. Operate the steering
wheel appropriately and steer the vehicle
to the center of the lane.
For vehicles equipped with the active
driving display, if there is the possibility of
a lane departure, the system indicates the
direction it determines that the vehicle is
deviating in the active driving display.
Indication on display
NOTE
yIf the LDWS warning sound is set to
rumble, the sound will be heard from
the vehicle speaker on the side which
the system determined the vehicle may
be deviating from its lane.
yIt may be difficult to hear the LDWS
warning beep depending on the
surrounding conditions such as outside
noise.
yThe type of warning sound and the
volume can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
4–79
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 79
2014/12/09 10:50:59
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System*
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is designed to assist the driver in checking the
area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides during lane changes by alerting the driver to the
presence of vehicles approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects vehicles approaching from the rear while
traveling in the forward direction at a speed of 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster and turns on the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors depending on
the conditions. If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change in the direction
in which the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light is illuminated, the system warns
the driver of a vehicle in the detection area by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning light and activating a beep sound.
The detection area on this system covers the driving lanes on both sides of the vehicle and
from the rear part of the front doors to about 50 m (164 ft) behind the vehicle.
Your vehicle
Detection areas
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before making an actual lane change:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when
making a lane change. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even
though a vehicle is in an adjacent driving lane. Always make it your responsibility as a
driver to check the rear.
4–80
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 80
2014/12/09 10:50:59
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system will operate when all of the following
conditions are met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is pressed and the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster is turned off.
yThe vehicle speed is about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster.
yThe
yThe
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system will not operate under the following
circumstances.
yThe
vehicle speed falls below about 5 km/h (3 mph) even though the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light is turned off.
yThe selector lever is shifted to reverse (R) and the vehicle is reversing.
yIn
the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator
light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
ySome
problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
lights is detected.
yA large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
yThere is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor
(rear). Remove any snow, ice or mud on the rear bumper.
yDriving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
yThe temperature near the radar sensors (rear) becomes extremely hot due to driving
for long periods on slopes during the summer.
yThe battery voltage has decreased.
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be difficult to detect them.
yA
vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but it does not
approach. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system determines the condition based on
radar detection data.
yA vehicle is traveling alongside your vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended
period of time.
yVehicles approaching in the opposite direction.
yA vehicle in an adjacent driving lane is attempting to pass your vehicle.
yA vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a road with extremely wide driving lanes. The
detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set at the road width of expressways.
4–81
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 81
2014/12/09 10:50:59
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yIn
the following cases, the activation of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights
and the warning beep may not occur or they may be delayed.
yA
vehicle makes a lane change from a driving lane two lanes over to an adjacent lane.
on steep slopes.
yCrossing the summit of a hill or mountain pass.
yThe turning radius is small (making a sharp curve, turning at intersections).
yWhen there is a difference in the height between your driving lane and the adjacent
lane.
yDirectly after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch and the system
becomes operable.
yDriving
yIf
the road width is extremely narrow, vehicles two lanes over may be detected.
The detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set according to the road width of
expressways.
yThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights may turn on in reaction to stationary
objects on the road or the roadside such as guardrails, tunnels, sidewalls, and parked
vehicles.
Objects such as guardrails and concrete walls
running alongside the vehicle.
Places where the width between guardrails or
walls on each side of the vehicle narrows.
The walls at the entrance and exits of tunnels,
turnouts.
yA
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may flash or the warning beep may be
activated several times when making a turn at a city intersection.
yTurn off the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system while pulling a trailer or while an
accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the
radar’s radio waves will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
4–82
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 82
2014/12/09 10:50:59
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yIn
the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors.
ySnow
yThe
or ice is adhering to the door mirrors.
front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
yThe
system switches to the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function when the selector lever is
shifted to the reverse (R) position.
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-90.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Lights/Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Warning Beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system notifies the
driver of the presence of vehicles in adjacent lanes to the rear of your vehicle using the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights and the warning beep while the systems are
operational.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights are equipped on the left and right door
mirrors. The warning lights turn on when a vehicle approaching from the rear in an adjacent
lane is detected.
When the ignition is switched ON, the malfunction warning light turns on momentarily and
then turns off after a few seconds.
4–83
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 83
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Forward driving (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system operation)
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects vehicles approaching from the rear and
turns on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors
according to the conditions. Additionally, while a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
light is illuminated, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction
in which the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light is illuminated, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning light flashes.
Reverse driving (Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operation)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left and
right of your vehicle and flashes the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights.
Function for cancelling illumination dimmer
or
position, the brightness of the Blind Spot
When the headlight switch is in the
Monitoring (BSM) warning lights is dimmed.
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights are difficult to see due to glare from
surrounding brightness when traveling on snow-covered roads or under foggy conditions,
press the dimmer cancellation button to cancel the dimmer and increase the brightness of
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights when they turn on.
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-18.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep is activated simultaneously with the
flashing of a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light.
4–84
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 84
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
Indicator Light
the ignition is switched ON, the
malfunction warning light turns on
momentarily and then turns off after a
few seconds.
y
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indicator light illuminates when the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch
is pressed to turn off the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems.
y
A malfunction in the system may
be indicated under the following
conditions. Have your vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Switch
y
When
The light does not turn on when the
ignition is switched ON.
y The light remains turned on even if the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch
is operated.
y It turns on while driving the vehicle.
y
When the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) switch is pressed, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems are turned off and
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indicator light in the instrument cluster
turns on.
If the switch is pressed again, the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become
operable and the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF indicator light turns off.
4–85
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 85
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched off, the
condition before the system was turned
off is maintained. For example, if the
ignition is switched OFF while the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems are
operational, the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) systems remain operational the
next time the ignition is switched ON.
yThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) and
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems
are turned off when the battery is
disconnected such as when the battery
terminals or fuses have been removed
and re-installed. To turn the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems back on,
press the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
switch.
4–86
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 86
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)*
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) measures the distance between your
vehicle and a vehicle ahead using a radar sensor (front) while the vehicle speed is 30 km/h
or faster (19 mph or faster), and indicates a recommended distance to maintain between the
vehicles. Furthermore, if your vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead more closely than the
appropriate distance to maintain between the vehicles, the vehicle-ahead indication in the
active driving display is flashed to advise the driver to keep a safer distance from the vehicle
ahead.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) and always
drive carefully:
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) provides advice for safer driving and
notifies the driver of a recommended, safer distance to maintain with a vehicle ahead.
The ability to detect a vehicle ahead is limited depending on the type of vehicle ahead,
the weather conditions, and the traffic conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator and brake
pedals are not operated correctly it could lead to an accident. Always verify the safety of
the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a
safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
NOTE
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) operates when all of the following
conditions are met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) is on.
yThe selector lever is in a position other than reverse (R).
yThe vehicle speed is 30 km/h or faster (19 mph or faster).
yThe
yThe
objects which activate the system are 4-wheeled vehicles.
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) may also operate in the presence of
motorcycles and bicycles.
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) may not operate normally under the
following conditions:
yThe
yThe
yThe
yThe
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) has a malfunction.
vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed.
system does not operate with the following objects:
yVehicles
approaching in the opposite direction.
objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
yStationary
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 87
4–87
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Indication on Display
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) operation status is displayed in the
active driving display.
Problems are indicated in the center display (Type B audio). If there is a problem, take
appropriate action according to the displayed message.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched off, the operation status before the system was turned off
is maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched off with the Distance Recognition
Support System (DRSS) operable, the system will be operable when the ignition is
switched ON the next time.
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) can be turned on/off and the system's
sensitivity can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Vehicle ahead
display
Distance between
vehicle display
4–88
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 88
2014/12/09 10:51:00
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Distance-between-vehicles guidelines*1
Indication on display
Distance between vehicles
guidelines
(During travel at about 40km/h
(25 mph))
Distance between vehicles
guidelines
(During travel at about 80km/h
(50 mph))
About 25 m (82 ft)
About 50 m (164 ft)
About 20 m (66 ft)
About 40 m (131 ft)
About 15 m (49 ft)
About 30 m (98 ft)
About 10 m (32 ft)
About 20 m (65 ft)
About 10 m (32 ft) or less
About 20 m (65 ft) or less
*1 The distance between vehicles differs depending on vehicle speed.
4–89
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 89
2014/12/09 10:51:01
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system is designed to assist the driver in checking the
area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is reversing by alerting the
driver to the presence of vehicles approaching the rear of the vehicle.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left and
right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is being reversed out of a parking space, and
notifies the driver of possible danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights
and the warning buzzer.
Your vehicle
Detection areas
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation
1. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operates when the selector lever is shifted
to the reverse (R) position.
2. If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle, the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light flashes and the warning beep is activated
simultaneously.
4–90
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 90
2014/12/09 10:51:01
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before actually putting the vehicle in
reverse:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at the rear when putting
the vehicle in reverse. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even
though a vehicle is behind your vehicle. Always make it your responsibility as a driver to
check the rear.
NOTE
yIn the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator
light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
ySome
problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
lights has occurred.
yA large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
yThere is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor
(rear).
yDriving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
yThe temperature near the radar sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long
periods on slopes during the summer.
yThe battery voltage has decreased.
4–91
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 91
2014/12/09 10:51:01
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be difficult to detect them.
yThe
vehicle speed when reversing is about 10 km/h (6 mph) or faster.
radar sensor (rear) detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or parked
vehicle. Reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor detection area is no
longer obstructed.)
yThe
Your vehicle
yA
vehicle is approaching directly from the rear of your vehicle.
Your vehicle
yThe
vehicle is parked on a slant.
Your vehicle
yDirectly
after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch and the system
becomes operable.
yIn
the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors.
ySnow
yThe
or ice adheres to the door mirrors.
front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
yTurn
off the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system while pulling a trailer or while an
accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise,
the radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate
normally.
4–92
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 92
2014/12/09 10:51:01
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)*
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to maintain headway control*1
according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor (front) to detect the distance to a vehicle
ahead, and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 145 km/h (90
mph), the driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brake pedals.
*1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.
Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because, for example, the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the display are
activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a sufficient distance between the vehicles.
Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system on expressways and other highways
which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 93
4–93
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system and always
drive carefully:
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to reduce load on the
driver, and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed, or specifically, it maintains
a constant distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle ahead according to
the vehicle speed, the system has detection limitations depending on the type of vehicle
ahead and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the road conditions. Additionally,
the system may be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoid hitting the vehicle ahead
if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or another vehicle cuts into the driving
lane, which could result in an accident. Always verify the safety of the surrounding area
and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safer distance from
vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system in the following locations.
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident:
¾Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient
space between vehicles. Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and
deceleration occur (Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not possible).
¾When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of highways
(If you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicle ahead will no longer
be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).
¾Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (The tires could spin causing you to
lose vehicle control).
¾Long descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system
automatically and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of
brake power).
For the purposes of safety, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system off
when it is not being used.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system off to prevent an incorrect operation.
4–94
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 94
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
yThe
vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on.
yThe parking brake is not applied.
yThe Smart Brake Support (SBS) is not malfunctioning.
yThe Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operating normally.
yThe selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).
yThe
yIn
the following cases, the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
yYou
are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system has been set.
yWhen the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is
released.
yAnother vehicle cuts into the driving lane.
yDirectly
yThe
following are not detected as physical objects.
yVehicles
approaching in the opposite direction
yPedestrians
yStationary
objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
yIf
a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it
correctly.
yDuring headway control travel, do not set the system on two-wheeled vehicles such as
motorcycles and bicycles.
yDo not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system under conditions in which
the close proximity warnings are frequently activated.
yDuring headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in
conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate
for a lane change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the
vehicle rapidly, accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake
pedal depending on the conditions.
yWhile the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is in use, it does not cancel
even if the selector lever is operated and any intended engine braking will not occur. If
deceleration is required, lower the vehicle speed setting or depress the brake pedal.
yThe brake lights are illuminated while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
automatic braking is operating.
4–95
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 95
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yThe
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) warning light (amber) turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
yThe headway control operation can be canceled and the system can be switched to only
cruise control.
Refer to Cruise Control Function on page 4-101.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display Indication
The setting status and operation conditions of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system are indicated in the active driving display.
Vehicle ahead display
MRCC Set vehicle
speed
MRCC Distance between vehicle display
Close Proximity Warning
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the vehicle ahead because the vehicle applies the brakes
suddenly while you are traveling in headway control, the warning sound activates and
the brake warning is indicated in the display. Always verify the safety of the surrounding
area and depress the brake pedal while keeping a safer distance from the vehicle ahead.
Additionally, always keep a safer distance from the vehicles behind you.
4–96
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 96
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Setting the System
CANCEL switch
RESUME switch
Switch
Switch
OFF switch
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
ON switch
When the ON switch is pressed, the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles while
in headway control can be set. The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) indication is
shown in the active driving display.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) is ON, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) remains ON automatically.
yWhen the ON switch is pressed continuously for about 2 seconds while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on, the system switches the function to only
cruise control.
4–97
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 97
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
How to Set the Speed
1. Adjust th-e vehicle speed to the desired
setting using the accelerator pedal.
2. Headway control begins when the
SET or SET switch is pressed. The
set speed and the inter-vehicle distance
display filled with white lines are
displayed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) indicator light (green)
is indicated simultaneously.
Travel status
NOTE
yIf a vehicle ahead is detected while
traveling at a constant speed, the
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed
and headway control is performed.
Additionally, when a vehicle ahead is
no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead
indication turns off and the system
switches back to travel at constant
speed.
yIf you are driving the vehicle at a speed
faster than the set speed, headway
control on the vehicle ahead is not
possible Adjust the system to the desired
vehicle speed using the accelerator
pedal.
Display
During travel at constant
speed
During travel under
headway control
4–98
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 98
2014/12/09 10:51:02
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
How to Set the Distance Between
Vehicles During Headway Control
The distance between vehicles is set to a
shorter distance each time the switch is
pressed. The distance between vehicles is
set to a longer distance by pressing the
switch. The distance-between-vehicles can
be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short,
and extremely short distance.
Distance-betweenvehicles guideline
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)
vehicle speed)
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed
Changing the set vehicle speed using the
SET switch
Press the SET switch to accelerate.
Press the SET switch to decelerate.
The set vehicle speed changes as follows
each time the SET switch is pressed.
Short press
1 km/h (1 mph)
Long press
10 km/h (5 mph)
Indication on display
Long (about 50 m (164
ft))
Medium (about 40 m
(131 ft))
Short (about 30 m (98
ft))
Extremely short (about
25 m (82 ft))
NOTE
yThe distance between vehicles differs
depending on the vehicle speed, and the
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the
distance.
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC
or OFF and then the engine is started
again, the system automatically sets
the distance between vehicles to the
previous setting.
NOTE
For example, the set vehicle speed is
changed by pressing the SET switch four
times as follows:
The vehicle speed accelerates or
decelerates by 4 km/h (4 mph).
To accelerate using the accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press
and release the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed. If a switch cannot be
operated, the system returns to the set
speed when you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The warnings and brake control do not
operate while the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
4–99
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 99
2014/12/09 10:51:03
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yWhen accelerating using the SET
switch while in headway control, the set
vehicle speed can be adjusted but
acceleration is not possible. If there is
no longer a vehicle ahead, acceleration
continues until reaching the set vehicle
speed. Check the set vehicle speed by
viewing the set vehicle speed display in
the active driving display.
yWhen depressing the accelerator pedal,
the inter-vehicle distance display in the
active driving display changes to the
white-line display.
yThe minimum settable speed is 30 km/h
(19 mph). If the set vehicle speed
reaches 30 km/h (19 mph) using the
switch operation, constant speed travel
is maintained at about 30 km/h (19
mph) even if the SET switch is
pressed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not canceled.
To Deactivate
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
is canceled when the OFF switch is
pressed.
When the system is temporarily
canceled
In the following cases, the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is
temporarily canceled. The Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) indicator light
(green) turns off simultaneously.
y
The
CANCEL switch is pressed.
brake pedal is depressed.
y
The parking brake is applied.
y
The
y
The
selector lever is shifted to park (P),
neutral (N) or reverse (R).
y
In
the following cases, the beep sounds
one time.
The vehicle speed decreases to less
than 25 km (16 mph).
y The DSC has operated.
y The TCS has operated for a certain
period of time.
y The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
has operated.
y The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has
operated.
y When traveling on a down slope for a
long period of time.
y There is a problem with the system.
y
4–100
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 100
2014/12/09 10:51:03
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system may be canceled during
rain, fog, snow or other inclement
weather conditions, or the front surface
of the radiator grille is dirty.
yIf you have temporarily canceled the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC),
you can return to your previously set
speed by pressing the RES switch and
after all of the operation conditions
have been met.
yIf the OFF switch is pressed to cancel
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC), the system does not return to
the previously set speed even if the RES
switch is pressed.
Cruise Control Function
While this function is operating, the
headway control operation is canceled and
only the cruise control function operates.
The vehicle speed can be set more than
about 25 km/h (16 mph).
Use the cruise control function on
expressways and other highways which do
not require a lot of repeated acceleration
and deceleration.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control function in
the following locations:
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident.
¾Roads with sharp curves and where
vehicle traffic is heavy and there is
insufficient space between vehicles.
(Driving under these conditions
using the cruise control function is
not possible)
¾Steep down slopes (Set speed may
be exceeded because sufficient
engine braking cannot be applied)
¾Slippery roads such as ice or snow
bound roads (Tires could spin
causing you to lose vehicle control)
Always drive carefully:
The warnings and brake control
will not operate after the headway
control function is canceled and the
system is switched to only the cruise
control function. Depress the brake
pedal to decelerate according to the
surrounding conditions while keeping
a safer distance from the vehicle ahead
and always driving carefully.
4–101
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 101
2014/12/09 10:51:03
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Switching to cruise control function
When the ON switch is pressed
continuously for about 2 seconds while
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is turned on, the system is switched
to the cruise control function.
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster turns off and the cruise control
indication is displayed in the active
driving display.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control
function when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control function
turned on when it is not in use
is dangerous as it could operate
unexpectedly, resulting in an accident.
How to set the speed
Adjust the system to the desired vehicle
speed using the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control function begins when the
SET or SET switch is pressed.
How to increase the set speed
The set speed can be increased using the
following operations:
To increase speed using the SET
switch
Press and hold the SET switch and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)
increments) by pressing the switch and
releasing it immediately. For example, if
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set speed
increases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the
SET or SET switch at the desired
speed.
If the switch is not operated, the system
returns to the set speed after you release
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
How to Decrease the Set Speed
Press the SET switch continuously and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph) increments)
by pressing the switch and releasing it
immediately. For example, if the switch
is pressed 4 times, the set vehicle speed
decreases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).
NOTE
yThe system may not be able to maintain
the set speed constantly depending on
driving conditions such as steep up or
down slopes.
yThe speed will continue increasing
while the SET switch is pressed and
held. The speed will continue
decreasing while the SET switch is
pressed and held.
4–102
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 102
2014/12/09 10:51:03
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Cancelling the function
Cancelling using OFF switch
When the OFF switch is pressed, the
cruise control function is cancelled.
Cancelling using ON switch
When the ON switch is pressed
continuously for about 2 seconds, the
cruise control function is canceled and
the headway control function is made
available for operation.
The cruise control function is canceled
automatically in the following cases. If
the RESUME switch is pressed while
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the speed returns to the original set
speed.
y
The
CANCEL switch is pressed.
brake pedal is depressed.
y
The parking brake is applied.
y
The
y
The
selector lever is shifted to P or N
position.
NOTE
yIf the vehicle speed decreases by about
15 km/h (9.4 mph) or more than the set
speed, the cruise control function may
be canceled.
yWhen the vehicle speed is less than
21 km/h (13 mph), the cruise control
function is canceled. In this case, the
vehicle speed will not return to the
original set speed even if the vehicle
is accelerated to 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher and the RES switch is pressed.
Reset the cruise control function.
4–103
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 103
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)*
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is designed to reduce damage in the event
of a collision by operating the brake control (SCBS brake) when the system's laser sensor
(front) detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with a vehicle ahead is
unavoidable. It may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your
vehicle and a vehicle ahead is less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal while the system is in the operation
range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph), the brakes are applied firmly and quickly to
assist. (Brake Assist (SCBS brake assist))
Laser sensor (front)
WARNING
Do not rely on the Smart City Brake Support System (SCBS) as a substitute for safer
driving:
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless
driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely), and driving on
slippery roads such as wet, snowy, and icy roads (reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface). You can still have an accident.
4–104
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 104
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system:
¾The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is only designed to reduce damage in the
event of a collision. Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident.
¾The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is a system which operates in response to a
vehicle ahead. The system may not be able to detect or react to two-wheeled vehicles
or pedestrians.
¾The laser sensor (front) for the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is installed near
the rearview mirror. To assure the correct operation of the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS), heed the following cautions.
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield near the laser sensor (front)
(including transparent stickers). Otherwise, the laser sensor (front) may not be able
to detect vehicles ahead which could result in an accident.
Do not apply coating agent to the windshield. Otherwise, the laser sensor (front)
may not be able to detect vehicles or obstructions in front which could result in an
accident.
Do not disassemble the laser sensor (front) .
If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser sensor
(front) , stop using the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system immediately and
have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If the vehicle continues
to be driven with cracks or scratch marks left on the windshield near the laser sensor
(front) , the system may operate unnecessarily and cause an unexpected accident.
Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page
4-108.
When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Do not modify the suspension:
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead. This will result in the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system not
operating normally or mistakenly operating, which could cause a serious accident.
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) when the vehicle is running on a chassis
roller or being towed:
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system to prevent mistaken operation when
the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed. See the next page on how to turn
off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS).
Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page 4-108.
4–105
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 105
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CAUTION
¾When driving off-road in areas where there is grass or forage, it is recommended that the
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system be turned off.
¾Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same manufacturer,
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with significantly different wear
patterns on the same vehicle as the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not
operate normally.
¾The laser sensor (front) includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield and informing
the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detect plastic shopping bags,
ice or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the system cannot accurately determine a
vehicle ahead and may not be able to operate normally. Always drive carefully and pay
attention to the road ahead.
NOTE
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will not operate if the driver is deliberately
performing driving operations (accelerator pedal and steering wheel).
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will operate under the following conditions.
yThe
engine is running.
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) warning light (amber) does not illuminate.
yThe vehicle speed is between about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is not turned off.
yThe DSC is not malfunctioning.
yThe
yThe
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) detects a vehicle ahead by emitting a near-infrared
laser beam and receiving the beam reflected off the reflector of the vehicle ahead, and
then using it for the measurement. Consequently, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
may not operate under the following conditions:
yReflection
of the laser is poor due to the shape of the vehicle ahead.
vehicle ahead is significantly dirty.
yUnder bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.
yThe window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's
raining.
yThe windshield is dirty.
yThe steering wheel is turned completely left or right, or the vehicle is accelerated
rapidly and comes close to the vehicle ahead.
yTrucks with low loading platforms and vehicles with an extremely low or high profile.
yVehicles with certain shapes such as a vehicle carrier.
yThe
4–106
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 106
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yUnder
the following conditions, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not
operate normally.
yHeavy
luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat.
there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead.
yWhen driving on continuously curving roads, and entering and exiting exits.
yElongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser
sensor (front) .
yExhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.
yWhen towing a malfunctioning vehicle.
yWhen driving with tires having significantly different wear.
yIf
yIn
the following cases, the laser sensor (front) may inadvertently determine that there is a
vehicle ahead and the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may operate.
yObjects
on the road at the entrance to a curve.
passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.
yMetal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
yWhen passing through a toll gate equipped with a bar.
yWhen passing under a vinyl curtain or flag.
yPlastic objects such as pylons.
yTwo-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.
yVehicles
yWhen
the system operates, the user is notified by the flashing Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) indicator light (red) and the active driving display*.
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) warning light (amber) turns on when the system
has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 107
4–107
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Indicator Light (Red)
Stopping the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) System Operation
If the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is
operating, the indicator light (red) flashes.
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
system can be temporarily deactivated.
When the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) system is turned off, the Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF indicator
light turns on.
Automatic Brake Operation
Display (Vehicles With Active
Driving Display)
“SCBS Automatic Brake” is displayed in
the active driving display while the SCBS
brakes or the brake assist (SCBS brake
assist) is operating.
NOTE
yThe collision warning beep sounds
intermittently while the SCBS brake
or brake assist (SCBS brake assist) is
operating.
yIf the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS
operation and the brake pedal is not
depressed, the warning beep sounds
one time after about 2 seconds and the
SCBS brake is automatically released.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes operational.
Without SCBS OFF switch
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
With SCBS OFF switch
Press the SCBS OFF switch to turn
off the system. The Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Press the switch again to turn the system
back on. The Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) OFF indicator light will turn off.
4–108
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 108
2014/12/09 10:51:04
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart Brake Support (SBS)*
Smart Brake Support (SBS) is a system which alerts the driver of a possible collision using
an indicator and warning sound in the instrument cluster while the vehicle is being driven at
about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster) and the system's radar sensor (front) determines
that your vehicle may hit a vehicle ahead. Furthermore, if the radar sensor (front) determines
that a collision is unavoidable, the automatic brake control is performed to reduce damage in
the event of a collision.
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal, the brakes operate more quickly to
assist the driver (vehicles with brake fluid pre-fill).
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system and always drive
carefully:
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) is designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision,
not avoid an accident. The ability to detect an obstruction is limited depending on the
obstruction, weather conditions, or traffic conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator pedal
or brake pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in an accident. Always verify the
safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while
keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Smart Brake Support (SBS)
system off to prevent a mistaken operation.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 109
4–109
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Smart Brake Support (SBS) system operates when all of the following conditions are
met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Smart Brake Support (SBS) system is on.
yThe vehicle speed is about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster).
yThe relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is about 15 km/h or
faster (10 mph or faster).
yThe Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is not operating.
yThe
yThe
Smart Brake Support (SBS) system may not operate under the following conditions:
yIf
the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.
vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
yThe accelerator pedal is depressed.
yThe brake pedal is depressed.
yThe steering wheel is being operated.
yThe selector lever is being operated.
yThe turn signal is being used.
yWhen the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off.
yWhen warnings and messages, such as a dirty windshield, related to the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC)/laser sensor (front) are being displayed in the center display.
yThe
yAlthough
the objects which activate the system are four-wheeled vehicles, the radar
sensor (front) could detect the following objects, determine them to be an obstruction, and
operate the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system.
yObjects
on the road at the entrance to a curve (including guardrails and snow banks).
vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve.
yWhen crossing a narrow bridge.
yWhen passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate.
yWhen entering an underground parking area.
yMetal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
yIf you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.
yWhen driving in areas where there is high grass or forage.
yTwo-wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles.
yPedestrians or non-metallic objects such as standing trees.
yA
yWhen
the system operates, the user is notified by the flashing Smart Brake Support (SBS)
indicator light (red) and the active driving display.
yThe Smart Brake Support (SBS) warning light (amber) turns on when the system has a
malfunction. Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-24.
4–110
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 110
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
Indicator Light (Red)
If the Smart Brake Support (SBS) is
operating, the indicator light (red) flashes.
NOTE
If the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
operation is turned off, the Smart City
Brake Support (SCBS) system operation is
turned off simultaneously.
Collision Warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated in
the active driving display.
Stopping The Smart Brake
Support (SBS) System Operation
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
can be temporarily deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Smart Brake Support (SBS)
system is turned off, the Smart Brake
Support (SBS) OFF indicator light turns
on.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes operational.
4–111
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 111
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)*
Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
y
High
Beam Control System (HBC)
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Lane
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while
traveling at night and detects traffic lanes. The distance in which the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions.
4–112
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 112
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CAUTION
¾Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC).
If the area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens is obstructed, it will cause
the system to not operate correctly. Consequently, each system may not operate normally
which could lead to an unexpected accident.
¾Do not disassemble or modify the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Disassembly or modification of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) will cause a malfunction
or mistaken operation. Consequently, each system may not operate normally which could
lead to an unexpected accident.
¾Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward Sensing Camera
(FSC).
¾The direction of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) has been finely adjusted, therefore
do not change the installation position or remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
¾Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to get dirty.
¾Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.
¾Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.
¾Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or fogging.
Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.
¾Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the
windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
¾Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
¾The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.
¾When performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
¾Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the area around
it. If strong force is applied, stop using the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS), the
High Beam Control System (HBC), and the Smart Brake Support (SBS) and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has been finely
adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
or remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.
4–113
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 113
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yIn the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects
correctly, and each system may be unable to operate normally.
yThe
height of the vehicle ahead is low.
drive your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
yHeadlights are not turned on during the night or when going through a tunnel.
yYou
yIn
the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be able to detect
target objects correctly.
yWhen
driving next to walls with no patterning (including fences and longitudinally
striped walls).
yThe taillights of the vehicle ahead are turned off.
yA vehicle is outside the illumination range of the headlights.
yThe vehicle is making a sharp curve, or ascending or descending a steep slope.
yEntering or exiting a tunnel.
yHeavy luggage is loaded causing the vehicle to tilt.
yStrong light is shone at the front of the vehicle (back light or high-beam light from on
coming vehicles).
yThere are many light emitters on the vehicle ahead.
yWhen the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off at
nighttime.
yThe vehicle ahead has a special shape.
4–114
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 114
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Radar Sensor (Front)*
Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor (front).
The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
y
Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Distance
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead
or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the front emblem.
Radar sensor (front)
If the Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) Warning Light (amber)
is illuminated, the area around the radar sensor may be dirty. Refer to “Warning Guidance”
in the center display (Type B audio).
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on page 7-27
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 115
4–115
2014/12/09 10:51:05
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
.
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.
¾Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the radiator
grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor (front), and do not replace
the radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not a genuine product
designed for use with the radar sensor (front).
¾The radar sensor (front) includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor's
front surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may
require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice or snow. If this
occurs, the system may not operate correctly, therefore always keep the radar sensor
(front) clean.
¾Do not install a grille guard.
¾If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the position of
the radar sensor (front) may have moved. Stop the system immediately and always
have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when
pulling out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor (front) could be hit and its
position deviated.
¾Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor (front).
¾For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor (front), consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modified, the vehicle's posture
could change and the radar sensor (front) may not be able to correctly detect a
vehicle ahead or an obstruction.
4–116
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 116
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yUnder the following conditions, the
radar sensor (front) may not be able to
detect vehicles ahead or obstructions
correctly and each system may not
operate normally.
yThe
rear surface of a vehicle
ahead does not reflect radio waves
effectively, such as an unloaded
trailer or an automobile with a
loading platform covered by a soft
top, vehicles with a hard plastic
tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.
yVehicles ahead with low vehicle
height and thus less area for
reflecting radio waves.
yVisibility is reduced due to a vehicle
ahead casting off water, snow, or
sand from its tires and onto your
windshield.
yThe luggage compartment is loaded
with heavy objects or the rear
passenger seats are occupied.
yIce, snow, or soiling is on the front
surface of the front emblem.
yDuring inclement weather such as
rain, snow, or sand storms.
yWhen driving near facilities or
objects emitting strong radio waves.
yUnder
the following conditions, the
radar sensor (front) may not be able to
detect vehicles ahead or obstructions.
yThe
beginning and end of a curve.
with continuous curves.
yNarrow lane roads due to road
construction or lane closures.
yThe vehicle ahead enters the radar
sensor's blind spot.
yThe vehicle ahead is running
abnormally due to accident or
vehicle damage.
yRoads with repeated up and down
slopes
yDriving on poor roads or unpaved
roads.
yThe distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead is extremely
short.
yA vehicle suddenly comes close such
as by cutting into the lane.
yRoads
yTo
prevent incorrect operation of the
system, use tires of the same specified
size, manufacturer, brand, and tread
pattern on all four wheels. In addition,
do not use tires with significantly
different wear patterns or tire pressures
on the same vehicle (Including the
temporary spare tire).
yIf the battery power is weak, the system
may not operate correctly.
yWhen driving on roads with little
traffic and few vehicles ahead or
obstructions for the radar sensor to
detect, Smart Brake Support/Smart City
Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) Warning
Light (amber) temporarily illuminates,
however, this does not indicate a
problem.
4–117
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 117
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Laser Sensor (Front)*
Your vehicle is equipped with a laser sensor (front). The laser sensor (front) is positioned
near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
y
Smart
y
Smart
Brake Support (SBS)
City Brake Support (SCBS)
Laser sensor (front)
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of the system.
¾Keep the windshield clean at all times.
¾Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield (including transparent stickers).
¾If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser sensor
(front), stop using the system immediately and have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
See the next page on how to turn off the system. Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
¾Do not apply a coating agent to the windshield.
¾When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
¾Never remove the sensor.
¾A removed sensor will not meet the conditions for a class 1M laser under the IEC
60825-1 specification and therefore eye safety cannot be assured.
¾Do not peer into the sensor using optical instruments with a magnification function
such as magnifying glasses, and microscopic and objective lenses within a distance
of 100 mm (3.94 in) from the sensor.
4–118
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 118
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Laser sensor radiation data
Maximum average power:45 mW
Pulse duration:33 ns
Wavelength:905 nm
Divergence angle (horizontal×vertical):28 degrees×12 degrees
NOTE
yIn the following cases, the laser sensor (front) cannot detect vehicles ahead correctly, and
each system may be unable to operate normally.
yThe
windshield is dirty.
luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser
sensor (front).
yExhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.
yElongated
yIf
there are recognizable cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris on the
windshield, always have the windshield replaced. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
for replacement.
4–119
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 119
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Radar Sensors (Rear)*
Your vehicle is equipped with radar sensors (rear). The following systems also use the radar
sensors (rear).
y
Blind
y
Rear
Spot Monitoring system (BSM)
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
Radar sensors (rear)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Always keep the surface of the rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) clean so that the
radar sensors (rear) operate normally. Also, do not apply items such as stickers.
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-57.
CAUTION
If the rear bumper receives a severe impact, the system may no longer operate normally.
Stop the system immediately and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
4–120
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 120
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe detection ability of the radar sensors (rear) has limitations. In the following cases,
the detection ability may lower and the system may not operate normally.
yThe
rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) has become deformed.
ice or mud adheres to the radar sensors (rear) on the rear bumper.
yUnder bad weather conditions such as rain, snow and fog.
ySnow,
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be difficult to detect them.
yStationary
objects on a road or a road side such as small, two-wheeled vehicles,
bicycles, pedestrians, animals, and shopping carts.
yVehicle shapes which do not reflect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low
vehicle height and sports cars.
yVehicles
are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors (rear) adjusted for each
vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors (rear) detect approaching
vehicles correctly. If the direction of the radar sensors (rear) has deviated for some
reason, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yFor repairs or replacement of the radar sensors (rear), or bumper repairs, paintwork,
and replacement near the radar sensors, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yTurn off the system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier
is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted by the radar will
be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
yThe radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which
the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is driven abroad, authorization from the country in
which the vehicle is driven may be required.
4–121
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 121
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Control*
With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about
25 km/h (16 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:
Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
¾Hilly terrain
¾Steep inclines
¾Heavy or unsteady traffic
¾Slippery or winding roads
¾Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed
Cruise Control Switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME switch
ON switch
OFF switch
4–122
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 122
2014/12/09 10:51:06
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
NOTE
When the ignition is switched OFF, the
system status before it was turned off is
maintained. For example, if the ignition
is switched OFF with the cruise control
system operable, the system will be
operable when the ignition is switched ON
the next time.
To Set Speed
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the cruise control system is
activated.
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
Activation/Deactivation
To activate the system, press the ON
switch. The cruise main indicator light
(Amber) illuminates.
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light (Amber)
turns off.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control system
when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control system in an
activation-ready state while the cruise
control is not in use is dangerous as
the cruise control could unexpectedly
activate if the activation button is
accidentally pressed, and result in loss
of vehicle control and an accident.
1. Activate the cruise control system
by pressing the ON switch. The
cruise main indicator light (Amber)
illuminates.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).
3. Set the cruise control by pressing the
SET or SET switch at the desired
speed. The cruise control is set at the
moment the SET or SET switch is
pressed. Release the accelerator pedal
simultaneously. The cruise set indicator
light (Green) illuminates.
NOTE
yThe cruise control speed setting cannot
be performed under the following
conditions:
yThe
selector lever is in the P or N
position.
yThe parking brake is applied.
yRelease
the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed, otherwise the speed
will continue increasing while the SET
switch is pressed and held, and
continue decreasing while the SET
switch is pressed and held (except when
the accelerator pedal is depressed).
yOn a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while
ascending, or speed up while
descending.
4–123
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 123
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Cruise Control
yCruise
control will cancel if the vehicle
speed decreases below 21 km/h (13
mph) when cruise is activated, such as
when climbing a steep grade.
yCruise control may cancel at about 15
km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed,
such as when climbing a long, steep
grade.
To Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press the SET switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will accelerate. Release the switch
at the speed you want.
Press the SET switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will increase the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Increasing speed with a single SET
switch operation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To Decrease Cruising Speed
Press the SET switch and hold it. The
vehicle will gradually slow.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Press the SET switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will decrease the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Decreasing speed with a single SET
switch operation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 25 km/h (16 mph)
If some other method besides the OFF
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
(such as applying the brake pedal) and the
system is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume when
the RESUME switch is pressed.
If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to
25 km/h (16 mph) or more and press the
RESUME switch.
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed. Press the SET or
SET switch and release it immediately.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up
temporarily when the cruise control is on.
Greater speed will not interfere with or
change the set speed. Take your foot off the
accelerator to return to the set speed.
4–124
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 124
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Cruise Control
To Temporarily Cancel
To temporarily cancel the system, use one
of these methods:
y
Slightly
y
Press
depress the brake pedal.
the CANCEL switch.
If the RESUME switch is pressed when
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the system reverts to the previously
set speed.
NOTE
yIf any of the following conditions occur,
the cruise control system is temporarily
canceled.
yThe
parking brake is applied.
selector lever is in the P or N
position.
yThe
yWhen
the cruise control system is
temporarily canceled by even one of the
applicable cancel conditions, the speed
cannot be re-set.
yThe cruise control cannot be cancelled
while driving in manual mode (selector
lever shifted from D to M position).
Therefore, engine braking will not be
applied even if the transaxle is shifted
down to a lower gear. If deceleration is
required, lower the set speed or depress
the brake pedal.
To Deactivate
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
4–125
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 125
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System*
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all four tires. If
the air pressure of one or more tires is too low, the system warns the driver by indicating the
tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster and operating a beep
sound. The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the data sent from the ABS
wheel speed sensors.
To allow the system to operate correctly, the system needs to be initialized with the specified
tire pressure (value on the tire pressure label). Follow the procedure and perform the
initialization.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-129.
The warning light flashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-25.
ABS wheel speed sensor
4–126
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 126
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CAUTION
¾Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
¾To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem. As
a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow out.
4–127
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 127
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
NOTE
Because this system detects slight changes in tire conditions, the timing of the warning may
be faster or slower in the following cases:
yThe
size, manufacturer, or the type of tires is different from the specification.
size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the level of tire
wear is excessively different between them.
yA run-flat tire, studless tire, snow tire, or tire chains are used.
yAn emergency tire is used (The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may flash
and then continue illuminating).
yA tire is repaired using the emergency flat tire repair kit.
yThe tire pressure is excessively higher than the specified pressure, or the tire pressure is
suddenly lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving.
yThe vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) (including when the vehicle is
stopped), or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes.
yThe vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road.
yHard steering and rapid acceleration/deceleration are repeated such as during aggressive
driving on a winding road.
yLoad on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of
the vehicle.
ySystem initialization has not been implemented with the specified tire pressure.
yThe
4–128
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 128
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization
In the following cases, system
initialization must be performed so that the
system operates normally.
y
A tire
pressure is adjusted.
rotation is performed.
y
A tire or wheel is replaced.
y
The battery is replaced or completely
drained.
y
The tire pressure monitoring system
warning light is illuminated.
y
Tire
Initialization method
1. Park the car in a safe place and firmly
apply the parking brake.
2. Let the tires cool, then adjust the tire
pressure of all four (4) tires to the
specified pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label located on the door jamb
of the driver's door (door open).
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
3. Switch the ignition ON.
4. While the vehicle is parked, press
and hold the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch and verify that
the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light in the instrument cluster
flashes twice and a beep sound is heard
once.
CAUTION
If the system initialization is performed
without adjusting the tire pressure,
the system cannot detect the normal
tire pressure and it may not illuminate
the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light even if a tire pressure is
low, or it may illuminate the light even
if the pressures are normal.
Adjust the tire pressure on all four
tires and initialize the system when
the warning light is turned on. If the
warning light turns on for a reason
other than a flat tire, the tire pressure
of all four tires may have decreased
naturally.
The system initialization will not be
performed if the switch is pressed while
the vehicle is being driven.
4–129
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 129
2014/12/09 10:51:07
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Rear View Monitor*
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.
WARNING
Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions
by looking directly with your eyes:
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an
accident or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device
when reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different from the actual
conditions.
CAUTION
¾Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear view
monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in injury or vehicle
damage or both.
¾Icy or snow-covered roads.
¾Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.
¾The trunk lid/liftgate is not fully closed.
¾The vehicle is on a road incline.
¾When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be
dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming the surrounding conditions
of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding
conditions by looking directly with your eyes.
¾Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may deviate.
¾Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.
¾The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic solvents,
wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on the cover, wipe off
with a soft cloth immediately.
¾Do not rub the cover excessively, or polish it using an abrasive compound or a hard brush.
The cover may be damaged affecting the image.
4–130
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 130
2014/12/09 10:51:08
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
NOTE
yIf water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it
cannot be wiped off, use a mild detergent.
yIf the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view
monitor may not operate correctly.
yWhen replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could
result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.
yIf the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of
the rear view parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
yIf “No Video Signal Available” is indicated in the display, there could be a problem with
the camera. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Rear View Parking Camera Location
Rear view parking camera
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display
Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear view
monitor display.
NOTE
When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to the
previous display.
4–131
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 131
2014/12/09 10:51:08
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Displayable Range on the Screen
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.
(Screen display)
Garnish
Bumper
(Actual view)
Object
NOTE
yThe displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.
yThe displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends
cannot be displayed.
yThe distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.
ySome optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not
install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating
parts or parts made of reflective material.
yIt may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
yIn
darkened areas.
the temperature around the lens is high/low.
yWhen the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.
yWhen foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.
yWhen the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.
yWhen
yImage
display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.
4–132
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 132
2014/12/09 10:51:08
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Viewing the Display
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen as a
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking
space you are about to back into.
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.
a
b
a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)
These guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.
b) Distance guide lines.
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).
The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm (19 in) for the red line and 100
cm (39.3 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of the
lines).
CAUTION
The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver's turning
of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's rear and the
surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.
4–133
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 133
2014/12/09 10:51:08
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Rear View Monitor Operation
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on
the traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies
depending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and
steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.
NOTE
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images
(mirror images).
1. Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.
2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.
(Display condition)
(Vehicle condition)
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left
and right are roughly equal.
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to
the left and right sides of the parking space.
4–134
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 134
2014/12/09 10:51:08
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle
in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the
vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)
(Display condition)
(Vehicle condition)
6. When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to
the previous display.
NOTE
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below,
and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle
and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.
yIn
the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed below, even though the back end
and distance guide lines appear parallel in the monitor, they may not actually be parallel
on the ground.
yWhen parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the
division line and the vehicle width guide line may appear parallel on the monitor, but they
may not actually be parallel on the ground.
4–135
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 135
2014/12/09 10:51:09
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may cause
a variance in distance perspective.
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the
actual distance.
Object
Variance
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.
A
B
Appears
farther than
actual
distance
B
A
Appears
closer than
actual
distance
Object on screen
Object at actual position
Object on screen
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.
Object at actual
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.
position
4–136
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 136
2014/12/09 10:51:09
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.
(Screen display)
(Actual condition)
A
A
B
C
C B
(Actual distance) B>C=A
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C
Picture Quality Adjustment
WARNING
Always adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast, color,
and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to an accident.
Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse (R).
There are four settings which can be adjusted including, brightness, contrast, tint, and color.
When adjusting, pay sufficient attention to the vehicle surroundings.
1. Select the icon on the screen to display the tabs.
2. Select the desired tab item.
3. Adjust the brightness, contrast, tint, and color using the slider.
If you need to reset, press the reset button.
4. Select the icon on the screen to close the tab.
4–137
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 137
2014/12/09 10:51:09
MEMO
4–138
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 138
2014/12/09 10:51:09
5
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and
audio system.
Climate Control System..................................................................... 5-2
Operating Tips ............................................................................... 5-2
Vent Operation .............................................................................. 5-3
Manual Type ................................................................................. 5-5
Fully Automatic Type.................................................................. 5-10
Audio System .................................................................................... 5-14
Antenna ....................................................................................... 5-14
Operating Tips for Audio System ............................................... 5-14
Audio Set (Type A) ..................................................................... 5-22
Audio Set (Type B) ..................................................................... 5-34
Audio Control Switch Operation ................................................ 5-55
AUX/USB/iPod mode ................................................................. 5-57
Bluetooth® ......................................................................................... 5-73
Bluetooth®* .................................................................................. 5-73
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A)* ............................................... 5-95
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B)* ............................................. 5-101
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A)* ...................................................... 5-111
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B)* ...................................................... 5-113
Troubleshooting* ....................................................................... 5-128
Interior Equipment ........................................................................ 5-131
Sunvisors ................................................................................... 5-131
Interior Lights ........................................................................... 5-131
Accessory Sockets .................................................................... 5-133
Cup Holder ................................................................................ 5-134
Bottle Holder ............................................................................. 5-135
Storage Compartments .............................................................. 5-135
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
5–1
2014/12/09 10:51:09
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Operating Tips
y
Operate
the climate control system with
the engine running.
y
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the fan control
dial on for a long period of time with the
ignition switched ON when the engine is
not running.
y
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system efficiency.
y
Use the climate control system to defog
the windows and dehumidify the air.
y
The recirculate mode should be used
when driving through tunnels or while in
a traffic jam, or when you would like to
shut off outside air for quick cooling of
the interior.
y
Use the outside air position for
ventilation or windshield defrosting.
y
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then
run the climate control system.
y
Have
the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
efficient.
The refrigerant specifications are
indicated on a label attached to the
inside of the engine compartment. Check
the label before refilling the refrigerant.
If the wrong type of refrigerant is used,
it could result in a serious malfunction
of the air conditioner.
For details, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Label
y
Run
the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
5–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:51:09
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Center vents (front passenger)
Air vent open/close
Vent Operation
Adjusting the Vents
Close
Open
Directing airflow
To adjust the direction of airflow, move the
adjustment knob.
NOTE
When using the air conditioner under
humid ambient temperature conditions,
the system may blow fog from the vents.
This is not a sign of trouble but a result of
humid air being suddenly cooled.
Center vents (driver) and Side vents
Air vent open/close
Knob
Airflow direction adjustment
Knob
NOTE
The air vents can be fully opened and
closed by operating the knob.
Open
Close
Knob
Airflow direction adjustment
Knob
5–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:51:10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Selecting the Airflow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
Floor Vents
5–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:51:10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Manual Type
Type A
Temperature control dial
Rear window defogger switch
Fan control dial
A/C switch
Mode selector dial
Air intake selector (outside air position)
Air intake selector (recirculated air position)
Type B
Rear window defogger switch
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
A/C switch
Mode selector dial
Air intake selector
5–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:51:10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Control Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
NOTE
(Type A)
When the mode is set to or with the
fan control dial in a position other than 0
and the temperature control dial in the
maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
position and the A/C turns on
automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch
to turn it off.
Fan control dial
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
0—Fan off
1—Low speed
2—Medium low speed
3—Medium high speed
4—High speed
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 5-4).
NOTE
yThe mode selector dial can be set at the
intermediate positions ( ) between
each mode. Set the dial to an
intermediate position if you want to split
the airflow between the two modes.
yFor example, when the mode selector
dial is at the position between the
and positions, airflow from the floor
vent is less than that of the position.
A/C switch
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan control
dial is set at position 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
Air intake selector (Type A)
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Press the air intake selector switch to
alternate between the outside air and
recirculated air positions.
)
Recirculated air position (
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
)
Outside air position (
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the recirculated air position
in cold or rainy weather:
Using the recirculated air position in
cold or rainy weather is dangerous as it
will cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
5–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:51:10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Air intake selector (Type B)
This lever controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
It is recommended that under normal
conditions the switch be kept in the
outside air position.
)
Recirculated air position (
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
Outside air position (
)
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use
this position for normal ventilation and
heating.
WARNING
Do not use the
position in cold or
rainy weather:
position in cold or rainy
Using the
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
Heating
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. (Type A)
Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position.
(Type B)
Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
NOTE
yIf the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
yIf cooler air is desired at face level, set
the mode selector dial to the position
and adjust the temperature control dial
to maintain maximum comfort.
yThe air to the floor is warmer than air
to the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or
cold position).
Cooling (With air conditioner)
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
5. After cooling begins, adjust the fan
control dial and temperature control
dial as needed to maintain maximum
comfort.
CAUTION
If the air conditioner is used while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, monitor the engine coolant
temperature warning light to see if it is
illuminated or flashing (page 4-24).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the warning light is
illuminated or flashing, turn the air
conditioning off (page 7-22).
5–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:51:11
Interior Features
Climate Control System
NOTE
yWhen maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control dial to the
extreme cold position and set the air
intake selector to the recirculated air
position, then set the fan control dial to
position 4.
yIf warmer air is desired at floor level,
set the mode selector dial at the
position and adjust the temperature
control dial to maintain maximum
comfort.
yThe air to the floor is warmer than air
to the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or
cold position).
Ventilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. (Type A)
Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position.
(Type B)
Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. (Type B)
Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
control set to the cold position:
position with the
Using the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident. Set
the temperature control to the hot or
warm position when using the
position.
NOTE
yFor maximum defrosting, turn on the air
conditioner, set the temperature control
dial to the extreme hot position, and the
fan control dial to position 4.
yIf warm air is desired at the floor, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
y(Type A)
In the
or
position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
and the outside air position is
automatically selected to defrost the
position, the
windshield. In the or
outside air position cannot be changed
to the recirculated air position.
5–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:51:11
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Dehumidifying (With air
conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the desired
position.
2. (Type A)
Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position.
(Type B)
Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner
is dehumidifying the air and, to use
this function, the temperature does not
have to be set to cold. Therefore, set the
temperature control dial to the desired
position (hot or cold) and turn on the air
conditioner when you want to dehumidify
the cabin air.
5–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Fully Automatic Type
Type A
Temperature control dial
A/C switch
Fan control dial
Air intake selector switch
Mode selector dial
Rear window defogger switch
Type B
Temperature control dial
A/C switch
Fan control dial
Air intake selector switch
Mode selector dial
Rear window defogger switch
5–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Control Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
Fan control dial
The fan has seven speeds.
AUTO position
The amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled in accordance
with the set temperature.
Except AUTO position
The airflow amount can be adjusted to the
desired level by turning the dial.
0 position
To turn off the system, set the dial to 0
position.
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 5-4).
AUTO position
The airflow mode automatically adjusts to
the selected temperature.
Except AUTO position
The desired airflow position can be
selected by turning the dial.
NOTE
yWith the airflow mode set to the
position and the temperature control
dial set at a medium temperature,
heated air is directed to the feet and air
at a comparably lower temperature will
flow through the central, left and right
vents.
yWhen the fan control dial is ON, and the
mode selector dial is in the or
position, the air conditioner is
automatically turned on and the outside
air position is automatically selected to
defrost the windshield. In the or
position, the outside air position cannot
be changed to the recirculated air
position.
A/C switch
The air conditioning (cooling/
dehumidifying functions) can be turned on
or off by pressing the switch while the fan
control dial is at a position other than 0.
The indicator light turns on while the air
conditioning is operating.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
Air intake selector
Outside or recirculated air positions can be
selected. Press the switch to select outside/
recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (indicator light
illuminated)
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traffic (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
5–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Outside air position (indicator light
turned off)
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the
position in cold or
rainy weather:
position in cold or rainy
Using the
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
Operation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Set the mode selector dial to the AUTO
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
NOTE
If the recirculated air position is used
for long periods in cold weather or high
humidity, the windshield may fog up more
easily.
3. Set the fan control dial to the AUTO
position.
4. Press the A/C switch to operate the air
conditioning (turn indicator light on).
5. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
6. To turn off the system, set the fan
control dial to the 0 position.
NOTE
ySetting the temperature to maximum
hot or cold will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
yWhen selecting heat, the system will
restrict airflow until it has warmed to
prevent cold air from blowing out of the
vents.
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
Set the mode selector dial to the
position and turn the fan control dial to the
desired speed.
In this position, the outside air position
is automatically selected, and when the
fan control dial is ON, the air conditioner
automatically turns on. The air conditioner
will directly dehumidify the air to the front
windshield and side windows (page 5-4).
Airflow amount will be increased.
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
position with the
Using the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to
increase the air flow temperature and
defog the windshield more quickly.
5–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Sunlight/Temperature Sensor
The climate control system measures
inside and outside temperatures, and
sunlight. It then sets temperatures inside
the passenger compartment accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the climate control system
will not operate properly.
Sunlight sensor
Interior temperature sensor
5–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Audio System
Antenna
Antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
WARNING
Always adjust the audio while the
vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the audio while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a
serious accident.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level that
allows you to hear sounds outside of
the vehicle including car horns and
particularly emergency vehicle sirens.
NOTE
yTo prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio
system on for a long period of time
when the engine is not running.
yIf a cellular phone or CB radio is used
in or near the vehicle, it could cause
noise to occur from the audio system,
however, this does not indicate that the
system has been damaged.
5–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:51:12
Interior Features
Audio System
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40—50 km (25—30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
FM Station
Do not insert any objects, other than CDs,
into the slot.
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Radio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere.
Therefore, they can reach longer distances
than FM signals.
Because of this, two stations may
sometimes be picked up on the same
frequency at the same time.
Ionosphere
Station 1
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reflect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
Ionosphere
FM wave
AM wave
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days may
provide better reception than clear days.
Station 2
5–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:51:13
Interior Features
Audio System
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal
at the same time. This causes a slight
delay in reception and may be heard as a
broken sound or a distortion. This problem
may also be encountered when in close
proximity to the transmitter.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from the
transmitter. Reception in such fringe areas
is characterized by sound breakup.
Reflected wave
Direct
Flutter/Skip noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
Strong signal noise
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are extremely
strong, so the result is noise and sound
breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Station 1
88.1 MHz
Station 2
88.3 MHz
5–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:51:13
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for CD Player
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in
the CD player may become clouded with
condensation. At this time, the CD will
eject immediately when placed in the unit.
A clouded CD can be corrected simply by
wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded optical
components will clear naturally in about
an hour. Wait for normal operation to
return before attempting to use the unit.
Handling the CD player
The following precautions should be
observed.
y
Do
not use deformed or cracked CDs.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
y
Do
not use non-conventional discs such
as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, etc.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
y
If
the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use the
disc.
Transparent
y
A new
CD may have rough edges on its
inner and outer perimeters. If a disc with
rough edges is used, proper setting will
not be possible and the CD player will
not play the CD. In addition, the disc
may not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance
by using a ball-point pen or pencil as
shown below. To remove the rough
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.
y
When
driving over uneven surfaces, the
sound may jump.
5–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:51:13
Interior Features
Audio System
y
CDs
bearing the logo shown in the
illustration can be played. No other discs
can be played.
y
Use
discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system may
not operate properly.
y
Be sure never to touch the signal surface
when handling the CDs. Pick up a CD
by grasping the outer edge or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
y
Do
not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
y
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should become
soiled, gently wipe it with a soft cloth
from the center of the CD to the edge.
y
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
y
The
CD player ejects the CD if the CD
is inserted upside down. Also dirty and/
or defective CDs may be ejected.
y
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player.
y
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affixed to it.
y
This unit may not be able to play certain
CD-R/CD-RWs made using a computer
or music CD recorder due to disc
characteristics, scratches, smudges, dirt,
etc., or due to dust or condensation on
the lens inside the unit.
y
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
y
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
y
This unit may not be able to play certain
discs made using a computer due to the
application (writing software) setting
used. (For details, consult the store
where the application was purchased.)
y
It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical data
(CD-DA) is playing.
y
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
y
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
y
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels,
or adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
5–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:51:14
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for MP3
MP3 stands for MPEG Audio Layer 3,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO*1 working group
(MPEG).
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be
compressed to approximately a tenth of
the source data size.
This unit plays files with the extension
(.mp3) as MP3 files.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a
license for private, non-commercial
use and does not convey a license nor
imply any right to use this product in any
commercial (i.e. revenue-generating)
real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems,
such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand
applications. An independent license for
such use is required. For details, please
visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.
y
The
number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Operating Tips for WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and is the audio compression format used
by Microsoft.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays files with the extension
(.wma) as WMA files.
*
Microsoft
and Windows Media are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation U.S. in the United States
and other countries.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
WMA files
written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the file extension “.wma”
to the end of the file name, and then
write it to the disc.
y
This
audio system handles MP3 files
that have been recorded on CD-R/CDRW/CD-ROMs.
y
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after
the file name.
5–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:51:14
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for AAC
AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO*1 working group
(MPEG). Audio data can be created and
stored at a higher compression ratio than
MP3.
This unit plays files with the extensions
(.aac/.m4a/.wav*2) as the AAC files.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
*2 Type B
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
AAC
files written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the file extension “.aac ”,
“.m4a”, or “.wav*2” to the end of the file
name, and then write it to the memory.
*2 Type B
Operating Tips for OGG
OGG is the audio compression format for
Xiph. Org Foundation.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays files with the extension
(.ogg) as OGG files.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
OGG
files written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the file extension “.ogg” to
the end of the file name, and then write
it to the disc.
Operating Tips for USB device
This unit plays audio files as follows:
Extension
Playback with this unit
.mp3
MP3
.wma
WMA
.aac
.m4a
AAC
.wav*1
.ogg*1
OGG
*1 Type B
5–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:51:14
Interior Features
Audio System
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
NOTE
yPlayback may not be possible
depending on the type and condition of
the USB flash memory even if the audio
file complies with the standard above.
yA copyright protected WMA/AAC file
cannot be played in this unit.
yThe order of the music data stored in
the device may differ from the playback
order.
yTo prevent loss or damage of stored
data, we recommend that you always
back up your data.
yIf a device exceeds the maximum
electric current value of 1,000 mA,
it may not operate or recharge when
connected.
yDo not pull out the USB device while in
the USB mode (only pull it out while in
FM/AM radio or CD mode).
yThe device will not operate if the data is
password protected.
MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG*1 files written
under specifications other than the
indicated specification may not play
normally or files/folder names may not
display correctly.
*1 Type B
Operating Tips for iPod
This unit supports playback of music files
recorded to an iPod.
y
iPod
is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
The iPod may not be compatible
depending on the model or OS version. In
this case, an error message is displayed.
CAUTION
¾Remove the iPod when it is not in
use. Because the iPod is not designed
to withstand excessive changes in
temperature inside the cabin, it could be
damaged or the battery may deteriorate
due to the excessive temperature or
humidity inside the cabin if it is left in the
vehicle.
¾If data in the iPod is lost while it is
connected to the unit, Mazda cannot
guarantee recovery of any lost data.
¾If the iPod battery is deteriorated, the
iPod may not recharge and playback
may not be possible when it is connected
to the unit.
¾For details on using the iPod, refer to the
iPod instruction manual.
¾When connecting the iPod to a USB port,
all commands are made from the audio
unit. iPod control is not possible.
NOTE
The audio unit cannot display images or
videos stored in an iPod.
5–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:51:14
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Set (Type A)
Power/Volume/Sound Controls ............................................................................. page 5-24
Clock ..................................................................................................................... page 5-26
Operating the Radio .............................................................................................. page 5-28
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player............................................................. page 5-30
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB port .................................................................... page 5-33
Error Indications ................................................................................................... page 5-33
5–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:51:14
MEMO
5–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:51:15
Interior Features
Audio System
Power/Volume/Sound Controls
Audio display
Menu button
Power/Volume/Audio control dial
Power ON/OFF
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Press
the power/volume dial to turn the audio
system on. Press the power/volume dial
again to turn the audio system off.
Volume adjustment
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial. Turn the power/volume
dial clockwise to increase volume,
counterclockwise to decrease it.
Audio sound adjustment
) to select
1. Press the menu button (
the function. The selected function will
be indicated.
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
Setting value
Indication
Turn
Turn
Counterclockwise Clockwise
ALC
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Level
decrease
Level
increase
BASS
(Low pitch sound)
Decrease bass
Increase
bass
TREB
(Treble sound)
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
FADE
(Front/back volume
balance)
Shift the
sound to the
front
Shift the
sound to
the rear
BAL
(Left/right volume
balance)
Shift the
sound to the
left
Shift the
sound to
the right
BEEP
(Audio operation
sound)
Off
On
BT SETUP*
24Hr
12Hr
(12 Hr/24 Hr time
adjustment)
Select mode
12Hr
(Flashing)
24Hr
(Flashing)
*
Depending
on the model, this function
may not be available.
5–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:51:15
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
If not operated for several seconds, the
display returns to the previous display. To
reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press
) for 2 seconds.
the menu button (
The unit will beep and “CLEAR” will be
displayed.
ALC (Automatic volume adjustment)
The automatic level control (ALC)
changes the audio volume automatically
according to the vehicle speed. The faster
the vehicle speed, the higher the volume
increases. ALC has ALC OFF and ALC
LEVEL 1 to 7 modes. At ALC LEVEL 7,
the amount that the volume can increase
is at the maximum. Select the mode
according to the driving conditions.
BEEP (Audio operation sound)
The setting for the operation sound when
pressing and holding a button can be
changed. The initial setting is ON. Set to
OFF to mute the operation sound.
BT SETUP mode*
Music and other audio such as voice data
recorded on portable audio devices and
mobile phones available on the market
which are equipped with the Bluetooth®
transmission function can be listened to
via wireless transmission over the vehicle's
speakers. Using the BT SETUP mode,
these devices can be programmed to the
Bluetooth® unit or changed (page 5-76).
12Hr
24Hr (12 Hr/24 Hr time
adjustment)
Rotating the audio control dial switches
the display between 12 and 24-hour clock
time (page 5-26).
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
5–25
2014/12/09 10:51:15
Interior Features
Audio System
Clock
:00 button
Audio control dial
Clock button
Hour/Minute set switch
Setting the time
The clock can be set at any time when the
ignition is switched to ACC or ON.
1. To adjust the time, press the clock
) for about 2 seconds until
button (
a beep is heard.
2. The clock's current time will flash.
Time adjustment
To adjust the time, press the hour/
minute set button ( , ) while the
clock's current time is flashing.
y The hours advance while the hour set
button ( ) is pressed. The minutes
advance while the minute set button
( ) is pressed.
Audio display
Menu button
Time resetting
) for about
1. Press the clock button (
2 seconds until a beep is heard.
2. Press the :00 button (1).
3. When the button is pressed, the time
will be reset as follows:
(Example)
12:01—12:29ĺ12:00
12:30—12:59ĺ1:00
y
3. Press the clock button (
start the clock.
) again to
NOTE
yWhen the :00 button (1) is pressed, the
seconds will start at “00”.
ySwitching between 12 and 24-hour
clock time:
Press the menu button (
) several
times until 12 and 24-hour clock time
are displayed. Turn the audio control
dial in either direction, select the
desired clock setting while the preferred
clock time is flashing.
5–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:51:15
MEMO
5–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:51:16
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
Audio display
Channel preset buttons
Tuning button Scan button
Band selector button
Radio ON
Press a band selector button (
turn the radio on.
Auto memory button
) to
Band selection
Successively pressing the band selector
) switches the bands as
button (
follows: FM1ĺFM2ĺAM.
The selected mode will be indicated.
NOTE
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise.
Tuning
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Manual tuning
Select the station by pressing the tuning
button ( , ) lightly.
Seek tuning
Automatic search for radio stations starts
when the tuning button ( , ) is pressed
until a beep sound is heard. The search
stops when a station is found.
NOTE
If you continue to press and hold the
button, the frequency will continue
changing without stopping.
Scan tuning
) to
Press and hold the scan button (
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press and hold
) again during this
the scan button (
interval.
Preset channel tuning
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press a channel preset button for
about 2 seconds until a beep is heard.
The preset channel number or station
frequency will be displayed. The
station is now held in the memory.
5–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:51:16
Interior Features
Audio System
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its channel
preset button. The station frequency or
the channel number will be displayed.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known.
Press and hold the auto memory button
) for about 2 seconds until a beep
(
is heard; the system will automatically
scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations
with the strongest frequencies in each
selected band in that area.
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed. Press and
)
release the auto memory button (
to recall stations from the auto-stored
stations. One stored station will be
selected each time and its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “A” will be displayed.
5–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:51:16
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
Repeat button
Text button
Play/Pause button
Random button Audio display
Track down/
Reverse button
Track up/
Fast-forward button
Folder up button
Folder down button
Media/Scan button
CD eject button
Type
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
CD slot
Playable data
yMusic data (CD-DA)
yMP3/WMA/AAC file
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the
two or three file types differs depending on
how the disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play
begins while the player reads the digital
signals on the CD.
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
Playback
) to switch
Press the media button (
to CD mode and start playback.
NOTE
The CD mode cannot be selected if a CD
has not been inserted.
Pause
To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button (4).
Press the button again to resume playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
5–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:51:16
Interior Features
Audio System
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Folder search (during MP3/WMA/AAC
CD playback)
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the folder
up button ( ) to advance to the next
folder.
Music scan
During music CD playback
This function scans the titles on a CD and
plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you
in finding a song you want to listen to.
Press and hold the scan button (
)
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will flash).
)
Press and hold the scan button (
again to cancel scan playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to. Press and
) during
hold the scan button (
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
)
Press and hold the scan button (
again to cancel scan playback.
Repeat playback
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is displayed
( is displayed next to RPT at the
bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
(Track repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is displayed
( is displayed next to RPT at the
bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
(Folder repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RPT at the bottom of
the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
5–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:51:17
Interior Features
Audio System
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks on the CD
randomly. “DISC RDM” is displayed
( is displayed next to RDM at the
bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button (3) is pressed during playback.
Music CD
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
Track number/Elapsed
time
Track number
Track name
Album name
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
Artist name
(Folder random)
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RDM
at the bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
(CD random)
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. “DISC
RDM” is displayed ( is displayed
next to RDM at the bottom of the
display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
MP3/WMA/AAC CD
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed
time
Folder number/File
number
File name
Folder name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
NOTE
yThe information viewable in the display
is only CD information (such as artist
name, song title) which has been
recorded to the CD.
yThis unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
5–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:51:17
Interior Features
Audio System
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button (3). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
(3) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert it. If the message
appears again, insert another known good
CD. If the message continues to appear,
take the unit to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for service.
Error Indications
If you see an error indication on the audio
display, find the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
CD is
inserted
upside
down
Insert the CD properly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CD is
defective
Insert another CD
properly. If the error
indication continues
to display, consult an
Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
CHECK
CD
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB
port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-57.
5–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:51:17
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Set (Type B)
NOTE
The explanation of functions described in this manual may differ from the actual
operation, and the shapes of screens and buttons and the letters and characters displayed
may also differ from the actual appearance.
Additionally, depending on future software updates, the content may successively change
without notice.
Audio Set (Type B) has three different human interfaces.
y
Commander
switch
panel
y
Voice recognition with steering switch and microphone
y
Touch
Commander switch operation
NOTE
For safety reasons, some operations are disabled while the vehicle is being driven.
Volume dial operation
Volume dial
Press the volume dial to switch the audio MUTE on and off.
Turn the volume dial to adjust the volume. The volume increases by turning the dial
clockwise, and decreases by turning it counterclockwise.
5–34
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:51:18
Interior Features
Audio System
Switches around commander knob
The following operations can be done by pressing the switches around the commander knob.
: Displays the home screen.
: Displays the Entertainment screen.
: Displays the Navigation screen (Only navigation-equipped vehicles). For operation
of the Navigation screen, refer to the navigation system manual. If the SD card for the
navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction in which the vehicle
is moving is displayed.
: Displays the Favorites screen. Long-press to store particular items in Favorites. (Radio,
phonebook and destination of the navigation system can be programmed.)
: Returns to previous screen.
5–35
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
2014/12/09 10:51:18
Interior Features
Audio System
Commander knob operation
(Selection of icons on screen)
1. Tilt or turn the commander knob and move the cursor to the desired icon.
2. Press the commander knob and select the icon.
NOTE
Long-press operation of the commander knob is also possible for some functions.
Touch panel operation
CAUTION
Do not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object. Otherwise, the
screen could be damaged.
NOTE
For safety reasons, touch panel operation is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
5–36
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:51:18
Interior Features
Audio System
Basic Operation Method
TOUCH & TAP
1. Touch or tap on the item indicated on the screen.
2. The operation is launched and the next item is displayed.
SLIDE
1. Touch the setting item displaying a slider bar.
2. Touch the slider with your finger and move to the desired level.
SWIPE
1. Touch the screen with your finger and move up or down.
2. Items which were not displayed can be displayed.
5–37
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
2014/12/09 10:51:19
Interior Features
Audio System
Return to previous screen
1. Touch the .
Displaying the home screen
1. Touch the .
Home screen
Icon
Function
Applications
Information such as average fuel economy, maintenance, and warnings can be verified.
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
Entertainment
Operates audio such as the radio and CDs. The audio source most recently used is
displayed. An audio source which cannot be used at that time is skipped and the previous
audio source is displayed.
To change the audio source, select the
icon displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Communication
Bluetooth® related functions are available.
Navigation
Navigation screen is displayed (vehicles with navigation system).
If the SD card for the navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction
in which the vehicle is moving is displayed.
The compass may not indicate the correct bearing when the vehicle is stopped or traveling
at a slow speed.
Settings
Overall setting menu (Such as display, sound, Bluetooth® and Language).
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
5–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:51:19
MEMO
5–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:51:19
Interior Features
Audio System
Volume/Display/Sound Controls
Commander switch
Audio control switch
Volume switch
Volume dial
Volume adjustment
Turn the commander switch volume dial.
The volume switch on the steering switch
can also be pressed.
Display setting
icon on the home screen and
Select the
display the Settings screen.
tab to select the item you
Select the
would like to change.
Display OFF/Clock
The center display can be turned off.
to turn the display off.
Select
is
When
selected the center display turns off and
the clock is displayed.
The center display can be turned back on
as follows:
y
Touch
the center display.
the commander switch.
y
Operate
Daytime/nighttime (System) screen
setting
The daytime or nighttime screen can be
selected.
: Switches screen automatically
according to headlight illumination
condition*1
: Daytime screen setting
: Nighttime screen setting
*1 The display is constantly on daytime
screen when the illumination dimmer is
cancelled.
Brightness adjustment
Adjust the center display brightness using
the slider.
Contrast adjustment
Adjust the center display contrast using
the slider.
Display setting reset
All of the screen setting values can be
reset to their initial settings.
1. Select
2. Select
.
.
5–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:51:19
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio sound adjustment
icon on the home screen and
Select the
display the Settings screen.
tab to select the item you
Select the
would like to change.
Indication
Setting value
Bass
(Low pitch sound)
Side: Low pitch
enhancement
Side: Low pitch
reduction
Treble
(Treble sound)
Side: Treble
enhancement
Side: Treble reduction
Fade
(Front/Rear volume
balance)
Front: Front speaker
volume enhancement
Rear: Rear speaker
volume enhancement
Balance
(Left/right volume
balance)
Right: Right speaker
volume enhancement
Left: Left speaker
volume enhancement
ALC
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Off—Adjustment at
seven levels
Beep
On/Off
(Audio operation sound)
ALC (Automatic volume adjustment)
The automatic level control (ALC) is a
feature that automatically adjusts audio
volume and sound quality according to
the vehicle speed. The volume increases
in accordance with the increase in vehicle
speed, and decreases as vehicle speed
decreases.
5–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:51:20
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
Radio ON
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When selecting
Select the
the desired radio, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center display.
AM/FM Radio
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
to display the frequencies of up to ten radio stations on the auto
Select
memory preset list.
Select the desired frequency.
Displays the Favorites list. Long-press to store radio station currently being aired.
Switches the
on and off. Displays the multi-cast channel list of the
.
You can search for receivable radio stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about five seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the radio station.
You can change the radio frequency manually.
Rotate the commander knob, slide the screen, or touch the radio frequency.
Press
or
to change the radio frequency one step at a time.
When or is long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you
remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Launches the iTunes Tagging function (for Apple devices with USB use only). Can be used
when the
is on.
Automatic radio station selection.
When long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you remove
your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
5–42
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:51:20
Interior Features
Audio System
Favorites Radio
Selected stations can be registered for
convenient operation. Up to 50 stations
can be registered. The Favorites list is
common to AM, FM, and satellite radio.
4. Select a radio station or radio
frequency. The selected radio station
can be moved.
5. Slide the radio station or move it using
.
the commander switch, then select
Registering to Favorites
icon to register the
Long-press the
current radio station. The registration can
also be performed using the following
procedure.
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS)*
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. The station is added to the bottom of
the Favorites list.
Radio text information display
Radio text information sent from a
broadcasting station is displayed in the
center display.
NOTE
Radio text information is a function of FM
radio. Text information is not displayed in
the following:
yDuring
reception
an RBDS broadcast
yRBDS broadcast, but radio text is not
transmitted from the radio station
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, your
Favorites list will be not deleted.
yNot
Selecting radio station from Favorites
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
2. Select the radio station name or radio
frequency to tune in the radio station.
Genre Seek
Some FM stations transmit Genre codes
(Program type like a Rock, News, and so
on). This code enables alternative stations
transmitting the same Genre code to be
found quickly.
Deleting from Favorites
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. Select the radio station or radio
frequency you want to delete.
.
5. Select
Changing Favorites list order
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
(To scan for Genre Seek:)
icon while in the FM
1. Select the
mode.
to open the genre list.
2. Select
3. Select the genre type you want to
select.
4. Select the , icon.
NOTE
To change the desired genre, select the
icon.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
5–43
2014/12/09 10:51:26
Interior Features
Audio System
Ex.)
89.3 is currently being received. With
Rock selected as the Genre, the radio
stations broadcasting Rock are at the
following frequencies.
98.3*1, 98.7, 104.3*1, 107.1
*1 Radio stations with good reception
The frequency changes as follows each
time
is pressed.
89.3ĺ98.3ĺ104.3ĺ98.3
NOTE
yOnly one Genre can be selected.
yIt may not be possible to receive any
station even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
yIf a program in the selected genre is not
broadcast to a region, reception is not
possible even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
yThe Genre Seek function searches for
genre code (program type) which FM
analog broadcasts transmit.
specialty programs (HD2-HD8) cannot
be searched because they are not FM
analog broadcasts.
yIf radio stations which are selected by
scanning using the Genre Seek function
broadcasting stations,
are
they are changed from analog
broadcasts
broadcasts to
after a few seconds if the reception
conditions are good. The genre is
displayed after the switch, however, the
genre for FM analog broadcasts may
differ.
HD Radio*
What is HD Radio™ Technology and
how does it work?
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio. For more
information, and a guide to available radio
stations and programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
Benefits of HD Radio™ Technology
(Information)
The song title, artist name, album name
and genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.
(Multicast)
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on each FM station.
Listening to HD Radio™ Technology
icon turns on by selecting a radio
If
broadcasting
station which is an
station, the analog broadcast is switched to
broadcast automatically after
an
a few seconds and then received.
broadcast is stopped and
If the
changed to an analog broadcast, press
to turn off .
down
Multicast channel selection (FM)
If multi-cast channels are available for an
broadcast currently being
received, the multi-cast channel list is
displayed. Select the desired radio station.
5–44
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:51:27
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
yIf an analog broadcast is received once
is received while HD1 is
and
selected, the audio unit switches to the
station automatically.
yWhen the
icon is illuminated, there
could be a noticeable difference in
sound quality and volume when a
change from digital to analog signals
occurs. If the sound quality and volume
become noticeably diminished or cut
icon to turn off
off, select the
(
icon is not illuminated).
yOnce an analog broadcast is received
when HD1 is selected from the Favorite
channels, it is switched to
automatically. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, or HD is off,
broadcasts is
switching to
not possible.
yWhen an HD specialty channel (HD2 to
HD8) is selected from the Favorite
channels, “Signal Lost” is displayed
and no audio is output until
is received. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, “Signal Lost”
continues to be displayed.
yIf the
icon is not illuminated,
information such as song titles of the
station are received,
however, the audio output is analog.
iTunes Tagging (for Apple devices with
USB use only)
By tagging a song currently being aired,
the song can be easily purchased from the
iTunes Store. Up to 100 tags can be stored.
icon. The tag is stored in
1. Select the
the audio unit.
2. Connect the device via USB. The
tag is sent to the connected device
automatically.
3. Synchronize the device with iTunes.
The tagged song can now be purchased
from the iTunes Store.
NOTE
yBoth AM and FM
can be
used.
yBecause iTunes Tagging only supports
purchasing from the iTunes Store, direct
downloading from the equipped vehicle
audio is not possible.
yIf the available memory for the
connected device is insufficient, the tag
is not sent.
yIf an error occurs while the tag is being
sent, reconnect the device.
Operating the Satellite Radio*
What is satellite radio?
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM
Satellite Radio brings you more of what
you love. Get channels and channels of
commercial-free music, plus sports, news,
talk, entertainment and more.
Commercial-free music from nearly
every genre —rock to pop, hip-hop to
country, jazz, classical and more. Plus
live performances and artist-dedicated
channels.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
5–45
2014/12/09 10:51:27
Interior Features
Audio System
Live sports Play-by-Play & Expert Talk
—every NFL game, every NASCAR®
race, 24/7 sports talk, college sports and
more.
Exclusive entertainment, comedy and
talk —The biggest names, compelling
talk, hilarious comedy.
World-class news plus local traffic and
weather.
Sign up for SiriusXM Satellite Radio
today!
NOTE
yTo listen to SiriusXM, a prior
subscription (fee-based) is required.
yThe channels which you can receive
depend on the package you subscribe
to.
ySatellite radio is broadcast as Sirius,
XM, and SiriusXM in the U.S.A.,
and Sirius and XM in Canada. In
this owner’s manual, only the name
SiriusXM is used.
yFor traffic and weather channels, map
information is not displayed and only
audio broadcasts can be received.
yCall 888-539-7474 to activate. For
more information, visit www.siriusxm.
com. Satellite radio is only available in
regions providing satellite radio service
(some areas of the United States and
Canada). Contact Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details.
How to Activate Satellite Radio
You must call SiriusXM to activate your
service. Activation is free and takes only a
few minutes.
SiriusXM service uses an ID code to
identify your radio. This code is needed to
activate SiriusXM service, and report any
problems.
Please have the following information
ready:
y
Radio
ID (8-digit electronic serial no See below for how to find your ESN)
y
Valid credit card information (may not
be required at initial sign-up)
Be sure you are parked outside with a clear
view of open sky, you will be instructed
to turn on your radio (in SiriusXM mode
and tuned to channel 184 (Sirius)/1 (XM
and SiriusXM)). Activation typically takes
only 2—5 minutes.
Displaying the Radio ID (ESN)
When channel 0 is selected, the radio ID is
displayed. Use the PREVIOUS or NEXT
channel buttons to select channel 0.
5–46
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:51:28
Interior Features
Audio System
SiriusXM operation
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When
Select the
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
is
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the channel list of the current category.
Displays the favorites list. Long-press to store the channel currently being aired.
Refer to Operating the Radio on page 5-42.
Indicates that the parental lock function is in use.
Switching of Lock/Unlock and PIN code setting changes can be performed.
Plays each channel in the current channel list for 5 seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the channel.
Plays the previous channel.
Plays the next channel.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
5–47
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 47
2014/12/09 10:51:28
Interior Features
Audio System
Selection from channel list
Receivable channels can be displayed on
the channel list screen. You can easily
select the channel you want to listen
from the list. Each category can be also
displayed.
icon to display the
1. Select the
channel list.
2. Select a desired channel.
(Select from category list)
icon to display the
1. Select the
channel list.
to display the category
2. Select
list.
3. Select a desired category.
PIN code reset
If the registered code has been forgotten,
reset the code to the default [0000] code.
1. Select the icon.
2. If the selected channel is locked, input
the PIN code to cancel the parental lock
temporarily.
.
3. Select
4. Input the default code [0000] using the
number buttons.
.
5. Select
6. Input the new PIN code using the
number buttons.
.
7. Select
Parental lock
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
To use the parental lock function, the PIN
code must be initialized first.
By using the session lock, the parental
lock can be enabled or disabled during the
current drive cycle (from when the ignition
is switched on to switched off). When
the session lock is on, the parental lock is
available. When the session lock is off, the
parental lock is temporarily cancelled.
When canceling the parental lock or
session lock, or when changing the PIN
code, PIN code input is required.
5–48
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 48
2014/12/09 10:51:28
MEMO
5–49
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 49
2014/12/09 10:51:28
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD eject button
Type
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
CD slot
Playable data
yMusic data (CD-DA)
yMP3/WMA/AAC file
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the
two or three file types differs depending on
how the disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play
begins while the player reads the digital
signals on the CD.
5–50
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 50
2014/12/09 10:51:28
Interior Features
Audio System
Playback
icon on the home screen with a CD inserted and display the Entertainment
Select the
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center
screen. When
display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(Music CD)
Displays the track list of the CD.
Select the track you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Displays the top level folder/file list.
Select the folder you want to select.
The files in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the file you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/ACC CDs only)
Displays the file list of the folder currently being played.
Select the song you want to listen to.
(Music CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
Plays songs on the CD in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the CD are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
The beginning of each track on a CD is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
The beginning of each track in a folder is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
If the audio is operated during scan-play, the track being scan-played is played normally.
Then, the audio operation is performed.
If selected within a few seconds of a song which has started to play, the previous song is
selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed after a song has begun to play, the song currently
being played is replayed from the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
5–51
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 51
2014/12/09 10:51:29
Interior Features
Audio System
Icon
Function
Plays a CD. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
Example of use (When searching for
a song from the top level of an MP3/
WMA/AAC CD)
icon and display the
1. Select the
folder/file list at the top level.
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB
port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-57.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/file
lists in the folder are displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
ySelect
to move to a folder one level
higher.
yThe appearance of the repeat and
shuffle icons changes depending on the
type of operation in which the function
is used.
5–52
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 52
2014/12/09 10:51:29
Interior Features
Audio System
Settings
NOTE
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
Select the
Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab
AD-Disp
Item
Height
Brightness Control
Other
Function
Refer to Active Driving Display on page 4-22.
Display
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
Safety
Distance Recognition Support System
SBS/SCBS
Other
Sound
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Adjust Time
Displays the currently set time is displayed.
Press to advance the hour/minute, and select
to move the hour/minute back.
AM/PM can only be selected with the 12-hour
clock display.
GPS Sync
When ON is selected, “Adjust Time” is
disabled.
Time Format
Changes the display between 12 and 24-hour
clock time.
Clock
Time Zone Select
Selects the time zone.
Daylight Savings Time
Turns the daylight saving time setting on/off.
When ON, the time advances 1 hour. When
OFF, it returns to normal time.
Vehicle
Rain Sensing Wiper
Door Locks
Other
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Devices
Bluetooth®
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on
page 5-90.
5–53
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 53
2014/12/09 10:51:29
Interior Features
Audio System
Tab
Item
Tool Tips
Function
Turns button explanations ON/OFF.
Language
Changes the language.
Temperature
Changes the setting between Fahrenheit and
Celsius.
Distance
Changes the setting between miles and
kilometers.
Used to update Gracenote®. Gracenote is used
with USB Audio, and provides:
Music Database Update
System
Restore All Factory Settings
1.Supplemental music information (Such as
song name, artist name)
2.Voice recognition assistance for Play Artist
and Play Album
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda
Handsfree Website.
Refer to Gracenote Database (Type B) on page
5-71.
Memory and settings are initialized to the
factory settings.
The initialization launches by selecting the
button.
About
Agreements and
Disclaimers
Verify the disclaimer and agree.
Version Information
Can verify the current audio unit OS version
and Gracenote Database version.
5–54
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 54
2014/12/09 10:51:30
Interior Features
Audio System
Applications
NOTE
Depending on the grade and specification,
the screen display may differ.
Audio Control Switch
Operation
Without Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Select the
icon on the home screen to
display the Applications screen. The
following information can be verified.
Top screen
HD
Radio™
Traffic
Map
Fuel
Economy
Monitor
Item
Function
—
—
Refer to Fuel
Fuel Consumption
Economy Monitor
Settings
on page 4-62.
Scheduled
Maintenance
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Oil Change
Warning
Guidance
Warnings
currently active
can be verified.
Refer to
Maintenance
Monitor (Type B
audio) on page
6-20.
With Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Refer to If a
Warning Light
Turns On or
Flashes on page
7-27.
5–55
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 55
2014/12/09 10:51:30
Interior Features
Audio System
Adjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, press up the
volume switch ( ).
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch ( ).
Seek Switch
AM/FM radio
Press the seek switch ( , ). The radio
switches to the next/previous stored station
in the order that it was stored.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
seek all usable stations at a higher or lower
frequency whether programmed or not.
Radio stations which have been previously
stored in the auto memory tuning (Type
A)/favorite radio (Type B) can be called
up by pressing the seek switch ( , )
while any radio station stored in the auto
memory tuning (Type A)/favorite radio
(Type B) is being received. Radio stations
can be called up in the order they were
stored with each press of the switch
( , ).
5–56
USB Audio/Bluetooth® Audio /CD
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press the seek switch ( ) within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the seek switch ( ) after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
continuously switch the tracks up or down.
Pandora®/Aha™/Stitcher™ Radio
(Type B)
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Like”.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Dislike”.
Mute Switch*
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off with the
audio muted, the mute will be canceled.
Therefore, when the engine is restarted,
the audio is not muted. To mute the audio
again, press the mute switch ( ).
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 56
2014/12/09 10:51:30
Interior Features
Audio System
AUX/USB/iPod mode
Type A
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
A commercially-available, non-impedance
(3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable is required.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
NOTE
(Type B)
The SD card slot is for the navigation
system. For vehicles with the navigation
system, the SD card (Mazda genuine) with
stored map data is inserted into the SD
card slot and used.
Auxiliary jack/USB port
Type B
Auxiliary jack
USB port
How to use AUX mode
(Type A) ................................ page 5-59
How to use USB mode
(Type A) ................................ page 5-60
How to use iPod mode
(Type A) ................................ page 5-64
How to use AUX mode
(Type B) ................................ page 5-67
How to use USB mode
(Type B) ................................ page 5-67
5–57
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 57
2014/12/09 10:51:31
Interior Features
Audio System
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving the
vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a serious
accident. Always adjust the portable
audio unit or a similar product while
the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION
¾Always close the auxiliary jack/USB port
lid when it is not in use. If foreign matter
or liquid penetrates the auxiliary jack/
USB port, it may cause a malfunction.
¾Depending on the portable audio
device, noise may occur when the device
is connected to the vehicle accessory
socket. (If noise occurs, do not use the
accessory socket.)
NOTE
yThis mode may not be usable depending
on the portable audio device to be
connected.
yBefore using the auxiliary jack/USB
port, refer to the instruction manual for
the portable audio device.
yUse a commercially-available, non
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to
the auxiliary jack. Before using the
auxiliary jack, read the manufacturer's
instructions for connecting a portable
audio unit to the auxiliary jack.
yTo prevent discharging of the battery,
do not use the auxiliary input for long
periods with the engine off or idling.
yWhen connecting a device to the
auxiliary jack or USB port, noise may
occur depending on the connected
device. If the device is connected to the
vehicle's accessory socket, the noise can
be reduced by unplugging it from the
accessory socket.
How to connect USB port/
Auxiliary jack
Type A
USB port Auxiliary jack
5–58
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 58
2014/12/09 10:51:31
Interior Features
Audio System
Type B
USB port Auxiliary jack
NOTE
yInsert the plug into the auxiliary jack/
USB port securely.
yInsert or pull out the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack/USB
port hole.
yInsert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
How to use AUX mode (Type A)
Connecting a device
1. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
2. Connect the connector on the device to
the USB port.
Connecting with a connector cable
1. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
2. Connect the device plug/connector
cable to the auxiliary jack/USB port.
WARNING
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever is dangerous as it could
interfere with driving, resulting in an
accident.
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
) of the
3. Press the media button (
audio unit to change to the AUX mode.
NOTE
yWhen the device is not connected to the
auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch
to the AUX mode.
yAdjust the audio volume using the
portable audio device or audio unit.
yAudio adjustments other than audio
volume can only be done using the
portable audio device.
yIf the connection plug is pulled out from
the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode,
noise may occur.
CAUTION
Do not place objects or apply force to
the auxiliary jack/USB port with the
plug connected.
5–59
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 59
2014/12/09 10:51:31
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use USB mode (Type A)
Random button Audio display
Repeat button Text button Play/Pause button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Type
USB mode
Media/Scan button
Playable data
MP3/WMA/AAC file
This unit does not support a USB 3.0
device. In addition, other devices may not
be supported depending on the model or
OS version.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
) to
3. Press the media button (
switch to the USB mode and start
playback.
Folder up button
Folder down button
NOTE
ySome devices such as smart phones
may require a setting change to allow
operation using a USB connection.
yWhen the USB device is not connected,
the mode does not switch to USB mode.
yWhen there is no playable data in the
USB device, “NO CONTENTS”is
flashed.
yPlayback of the USB device is in the
order of the folder numbers. Folders
which have no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
skipped.
yDo not remove the USB device while
in the USB mode. The data may be
damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button (4).
Press the button again to resume playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
5–60
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 60
2014/12/09 10:51:32
Interior Features
Audio System
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Folder search
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the folder
up button ( ) to advance to the next
folder.
Music scan
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays ten
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to.
)
Press and hold the scan button (
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will flash).
)
Press and hold the scan button (
again to cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
Track repeat
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is displayed
( is displayed next to RPT at the
bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
Folder repeat
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RPT at the bottom of
the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Folder random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RDM
at the bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
All random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the USB device randomly.
“ALL RDM” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RDM at the bottom of
the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
5–61
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 61
2014/12/09 10:51:32
Interior Features
Audio System
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button (3) is pressed during playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed
time
Error Messages
When the message “CHECK USB” is
displayed, it indicates that there is some
error in the USB device. Verify that the
content recorded in the USB device has
MP3/WMA/AAC files and re-connect
correctly. If the message reappears, have
the unit checked by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Folder number/File
number
File name
Folder name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
NOTE
yThe information (artist name, music
name) is displayed only when the USB
device information in the USB device
has information which can be displayed
on the screen.
yThis unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button (3). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
(3) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
5–62
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 62
2014/12/09 10:51:32
MEMO
5–63
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 63
2014/12/09 10:51:32
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use iPod mode (Type A)
Audio display
Text button
Random button
Repeat button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Play/Pause button
Category down button
Category up button
Media/Scan button
An iPod may not be compatible depending
on the model or OS version. In this case,
an error message is displayed.
NOTE
The iPod functions on the iPod cannot
be operated while it is connected to the
unit because the unit controls the iPod
functions.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
) to
3. Press the media button (
switch to the iPod mode and start
playback.
NOTE
yWhen an iPod is not connected, the
mode does not switch to the iPod mode.
yWhen there is no playable data in the
iPod, “NO CONTENTS” is flashed.
yDo not remove the iPod while in the
iPod mode. Otherwise, the data could
be damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button (4).
Press the button again to resume playback.
List up button
List down button
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds (depends on iPod software
version) after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds (depends on iPod software
version) have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Category search
Press the category down button (5) to
select the previous category and press the
category up button (6) to select the next
category.
NOTE
The types of categories include Playlist,
Artist, Album, Song, Podcast, Genre,
Composer, and Audio book.
5–64
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 64
2014/12/09 10:51:32
Interior Features
Audio System
List search
Press the list down button ( ) to select the
previous list and press the list up button
( ) to select the next list.
NOTE
When the selected category is Song or
Audio book, there is no list.
Music scan
This function scans the titles in a list
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to.
)
Press and hold the scan button (
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will flash).
)
Press and hold the scan button (
again to cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is displayed
( is displayed next to RPT at the
bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Song random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the list
randomly. “SONG RDM” is displayed
( is displayed next to RDM at the
bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
Album random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the iPod randomly. “ALBUM
RDM” is displayed ( is displayed
next to RDM at the bottom of the
display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
NOTE
The track number being played randomly
is in the order of the iPod shuffle table.
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button (3) is pressed during playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed
time
File number
Category name
Artist name
Album name
Song name
NOTE
yThe information (artist name, music
name) is displayed only when the iPod
has information which can be displayed.
yThis unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
5–65
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 65
2014/12/09 10:51:36
Interior Features
Audio System
Display scroll
13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button (3). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
(3) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Error Messages
If the message “CHECK iPod” is
displayed, it indicates that there is a
malfunction in the iPod. Verify that the
content recorded in the iPod has playable
files and connect correctly. If the message
reappears, have the unit checked by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Error Indications (Type A)
If you see an error indication on the
display, find the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
CHECK
USB
Verify that the content
recorded in the USB
device has MP3/WMA/
AAC files and reUSB device
connect correctly.
malfunction
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CHECK
iPod
Verify that the content
recorded in the iPod has
playable files and reconnect correctly.
iPod
malfunction If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
5–66
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 66
2014/12/09 10:51:37
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use AUX mode (Type B)
1. Select the
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
to switch to the AUX mode. The following icons are displayed in the lower
2. Select
part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
NOTE
yIf a device is not connected to the auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch to the AUX
mode.
yAdjust the audio volume using the portable audio device, commander switch, or audio
control switch.
yAudio adjustments can also be made using the portable audio device's volume setting.
yIf the connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise may
occur.
How to use USB mode (Type B)
Type
USB mode
Playable data
MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG file
This unit does not support a USB 3.0 device. In addition, other devices may not be
supported depending on the model or OS version.
USB devices formatted to FAT32 are supported (USB devices formatted to other formats
such as NTFS are not supported).
5–67
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 67
2014/12/09 10:51:37
Interior Features
Audio System
Playback
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
1. Select the
or
to switch the USB mode. The following icons are displayed in the
2. Select
lower part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Category list is displayed.
Current track list is displayed.
Select a desired track to play it.
Plays the current track repeatedly.
Select it again to play the tracks in the current track list repeatedly.
When selected again, the function is canceled.
Tracks in the current track list are played randomly.
Select it again to cancel.
Starts playing a track similar to the current track using Gracenote's More Like This™.
Select the desired song from the category list to cancel More Like This™.
If selected within a few seconds from the beginning of a song which has started to play, the
previous song is selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed, the song currently being played is replayed from
the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Track is played. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
NOTE
yTo move to the desired location on the track, move the slider indicating the playback time.
yThe appearance of the repeat and shuffle icons changes depending on the type of
operation in which the function is used.
5–68
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 68
2014/12/09 10:51:41
Interior Features
Audio System
Category list
icon and display the following category list.
Select the
Select a desired category and item.
Category
Playlist
Artist
Album
Function
Displays playlists on the device.
Displays the artist name list.
All the tracks or tracks for each album of the selected artist can be played.
Displays the album name list.
Song
All the tracks in the device are displayed.
Genre
Displays the genre list.
All the tracks or tracks per album or artist in the selected genre can be played.
Audiobook
Displays the audiobook list.
Chapters can be selected and played.
Podcast
Displays the podcast list.
Episode can be selected and played.
(Special service for some Apple devices.)
Folder
Displays the folder/file list.
5–69
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 69
2014/12/09 10:51:42
Interior Features
Audio System
Example of use (to play all tracks in
USB device)
(Method 1)
to display the category list.
1. Select
.
2. Select
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
3. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired category
selected in Step 2 are played.
(Method 2)*1
1. Select
to display the category list.
.
2. Select
All the folders in the USB device are
displayed.
.
3. Select
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
4. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
*1 Can be operated using an Android™
device or USB flash memory.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired folder
selected in Step 3 are played.
5–70
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 70
2014/12/09 10:51:42
Interior Features
Audio System
Gracenote Database (Type B)
When a USB device is connected to this unit and the audio is played, the album name,
artist name, genre and title information are automatically displayed if there is a match in
the vehicle's database compilation to the music being played. The information stored in this
device uses database information in the Gracenote music recognition service.
CAUTION
For information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be used and
how to install it, go to the Mazda Hands Free Website:
http://www.mazdahandsfree.com
Introduction
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
5–71
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 71
2014/12/09 10:51:42
Interior Features
Audio System
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will
be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue
its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© 2000 to present. Gracenote, Inc.
Updating the database
The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote.
icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
Select the
tab and select
.
Select the
. The list of the update package stored in the USB device and the version are
Select
displayed.
5. Select the package to use the update.
.
6. Select
NOTE
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands-free Website.
5–72
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 72
2014/12/09 10:51:43
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®*
Bluetooth® Hands-Free outline
When a Bluetooth® device (mobile phone) is connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit via
radio wave transmission, a call can be made or received by pressing the talk button, pickup button, or hang-up button on the audio remote control switch, or by operating the center
display. For example, even if a device (mobile phone) is in your coat pocket, a call can be
made without taking the device (mobile phone) out and operating it directly.
Bluetooth® audio outline
When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth® communication function is paired
to the vehicle, you can listen to music stored on the paired portable audio device from the
vehicle's speakers. It is not necessary to connect the portable audio device to the vehicle's
external input terminal. After programming, operate the vehicle audio control panel to play/
stop the audio.
NOTE
yFor your safety, a device can be paired only when the vehicle is parked. If the vehicle
starts to move, the pairing procedure will end. Park the vehicle in a safe place before
pairing.
yThe communication range of a Bluetooth® equipped device is about 10 meters (32 ft) or
less.
yBasic audio operation is available using voice commands even if Bluetooth® is not
connected.
CAUTION
Some Bluetooth® mobile devices are not compatible with the vehicle. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda's call center or Web support center for information
regarding Bluetooth® mobile device compatibility:
¾U.S.A.
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
¾Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
¾Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web:
www.mazdamexico.com.mx
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 73
5–73
2014/12/09 10:51:43
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Applicable Bluetooth® specification (Recommended)
Type A: Ver. 2.0
Type B: Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0 (conformity)
Component Parts
Audio unit
Type A
Type B
Talk button, Pick-up button and Hang-up button
Talk button
Pick-up button
Hang-up button
Microphone
Microphone
Microphone (hands-free)
The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or when making a Hands-free call.
Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-Up button (hands-free)
The basic functions of Bluetooth® Hands-Free can be used for such things as making calls or
hanging up using the talk, pick-up and hang-up buttons on the steering wheel.
Commander switch (Type B)
The commander switch is used for volume adjustment and display operation. Tilt or turn the
commander knob to move the cursor. Press the commander knob to select the icon.
5–74
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 74
2014/12/09 10:51:43
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Volume adjustment
The power/volume dial of the audio unit*1 or the volume dial of the commander switch*2
is used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial to the right to increase volume, to the left to
decrease it.
The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.
*1 Type A
*2 Type B
NOTE
If the volume is lower compared to other audio modes, increase the volume from the device
side.
(Type B)
Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set in
advance.
1. Select the
2. Select
3. Adjust the
icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
.
and the
using the slider.
5–75
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 75
2014/12/09 10:51:43
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Preparation (Type A)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Preparation
Pairing code setting
The 4-digit pairing code setting for
registration of your cell phone (pairing)
can be set beforehand.
NOTE
The initial setting value is “0000”.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Set pairing code”
7. Prompt: “Your current pairing code is
XXXX. Do you want to change it to a
different pairing code?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing
code.”
10.Say: [Beep] “YYYY”
11. Prompt: “YYYY is this correct?”
12.Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13.If “Yes”, go to Step 14. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 9.
14.Prompt: “Your new pairing code is
YYYY. Use this pairing code when
pairing devices to the Hands free
system. Do you want to pair a device
now?”
15.Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
16.If “Yes”, the system switches to the
device registration mode. If “No”, the
system returns to standby status.
Device pairing
To use Bluetooth® Hands-Free, the device
equipped with Bluetooth® has to be paired
to the Bluetooth® unit using the following
procedure.
A maximum of seven devices including
hands-free mobile phones and Bluetooth®
audio devices can be paired to one vehicle.
NOTE
If a Bluetooth® device has already been
paired to the vehicle as a Bluetooth® audio
device, it does not need to be paired again
when using the device as a hands-free
mobile phone. Conversely, it does not need
to be paired again as a Bluetooth® audio
device if it has already been paired as a
hands-free mobile phone.
1. Activate the Bluetooth® application of
the device.
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
2. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
3. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
4. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
5. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
6. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
7. Say: [Beep] “Pair”
8. Prompt: “Start the pairing process on
your Bluetooth® device. Your pairing
code is 0000 (XXXX). Input this on
your Bluetooth® device when prompted
on the device. See device manual for
instructions.”
5–76
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 76
2014/12/09 10:51:44
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
9. Using the device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth® device (Peripheral
device).
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
10.Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
11. Input the 4-digit pairing code to the
device.
12.Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device after the beep.”
13.Say: [Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Say a
“device tag”, an arbitrary name for the
device.) Example: “Stan's device.”
NOTE
Say a paired “device tag” within 10
seconds.
If more than two devices are to be paired,
they cannot be paired with the same or
similar “device tag”.
14.Prompt: “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag). Is this correct?”
15.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
16.Prompt: “Pairing complete”
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifies the device. By
activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again,
or by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free
first after switching the ignition from
OFF to ACC, the system reads out a voice
guidance, “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag) is connected”.
NOTE
yWhen the pairing is completed, the
symbol is displayed.
ySome Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
yDevice registration can also be done by
operating the audio unit.
yDepending on the device, the
registration status may be lost after a
certain period of time. If this occurs,
repeat the entire process from Step 1.
Registered device read-out
Bluetooth® Hands-Free can read-out the
devices registered to its system.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code”
6. Say: [Beep] “List”
5–77
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 77
2014/12/09 10:51:44
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. Device A, device B,
device C)” (The voice guidance reads
out the device tags registered to the
hands-free system.)
Press the talk button with a short press
during the read-out at the desired
device, and then say one of the
following voice commands to execute
it.
“Select phone”: Selects device (Mobile
phone) when the talk button is shortpressed.
y “Select music player”: Selects device
(Music player) when the talk button is
short-pressed.
y “Edit”: Edits device when the talk
button is short-pressed.
y “Continue”: Continues the list readout.
y “Delete”: Deletes the registered device
when the talk button is short-pressed.
y “Previous”: Returns to the previous
device in read-out when the talk button
is short-pressed.
y
8. Prompt: “End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
9. Say: [Beep] “No”
10.Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a different
paired device, it is necessary to change the
link. The order of device priority after the
link has been changed is maintained even
when the ignition is switched off.
(Hands-free phone)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Select phone”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B).
Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10.Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
(Music player)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Select music player”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B).
Is this correct?”
5–78
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 78
2014/12/09 10:51:44
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10.Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
NOTE
yWhen the selected device connection is
completed, the or symbol is
displayed.
ySome Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the or
symbol is displayed.
yDevice (Music player) selection can
also be done by operating the panel
button.
Deleting a device
Registered devices (Mobile phone) can be
deleted individually or collectively.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
NOTE
A registered device (Mobile phone) can be
deleted using the registration list.
6. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
7. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to delete.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device
B), XXXXX... (Ex. device C), or all.
Which device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be deleted.)
NOTE
Say “All” to delete all devices (Mobile
phone).
9. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
device B...) (Registered device tag). Is
this correct?”
10.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Deleted”
Registered device editing
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
7. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device you would like to edit. Available
devices are XXXXX... (Ex. device A),
XXXXX... (Ex. device B), XXXXX...
(Ex. device C). Which device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be edited.)
9. Prompt: “New name please?”
10.Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
C)” (Speak a “device tag” an arbitrary
name for the device.)
5–79
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 79
2014/12/09 10:51:44
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
11. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device C)
(Device tag), is this correct?”
12.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
13.Prompt: “New name saved.”
2. Turn the audio control dial and select a
desired mode.
Bluetooth® Audio Preparation
Bluetooth® audio device set-up
Bluetooth® audio pairing, changes,
deletions, and display of paired device
information can be performed.
1. The mode changes as follows each time
) is pressed.
the menu button (
Select “BT SETUP”.
Display
PAIR
DEVICE
*
Mode
Pairing mode
LINK
Link change
CHANGE mode
*
* Depending on the mode selected, the
indication changes.
Function
Bluetooth® audio
device pairing
Changing link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
PAIR
DELETE
Pairing
deletion
mode
Deleting link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
DEVICE
INFO
Device
information
display mode
Displaying vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit
information
3. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
Bluetooth® audio device pairing
Any Bluetooth® audio device must be
paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit
before it can be listened to over the
vehicle's speakers.
A maximum of seven devices including
Bluetooth® audio devices and handsfree mobile phones can be paired to one
vehicle.
5–80
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 80
2014/12/09 10:51:44
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yIf a Bluetooth® device has already been
paired to the vehicle as a hands-free
mobile phone, it does not need to be
paired again when using the device as
a Bluetooth® audio device. Conversely,
it does not need to be paired again as
a hands-free mobile phone if it has
already been paired as a Bluetooth®
audio device.
yDevice registration can also be done
using voice recognition.
Concerning the operation of a Bluetooth®
audio device itself, refer to its instruction
manual.
Some Bluetooth® audio devices have PIN
codes (four digits). Refer to the audio
device's instruction manual because the
pairing procedure differs depending on
whether it has a PIN code or not.
Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device which
has a four-digit PIN code
1. Using the audio control dial, select
the pairing mode “PAIR DEVICE”
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ENTER
PIN” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “PIN 0000” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
3. Input the PIN code of your Bluetooth®
audio device by pressing channel preset
buttons 1 to 4 while “PIN 0000” is
displayed.
Press channel preset button 1 to input
the first digit, 2 for the second, 3 for the
third, and 4 for the forth. For example,
if the PIN code were “4213” press
channel preset button 1 four times (1,
2, 3, 4), button 2 twice (1, 2), button
3 once (1), and button 4 three times
(1, 2, 3). If the “PIN 0000” display
disappears before finishing the PIN
code input, repeat the procedure from
Step 1.
NOTE
Some devices accept only a particular
pairing code (Usually, “0000” or
“1234”).
If pairing cannot be completed, refer to the
owner's manual of your mobile device, and
try those numbers if necessary.
4. Press the audio control dial while
the input PIN code is displayed.
“PAIRING” flashes on the audio
display.
5. Operate the Bluetooth® audio device
and set it to the pairing mode while
“PAIRING” is flashing.
6. When the pairing is completed, and
“PAIR SUCCESS” are displayed after
about 10-30 seconds, after which
“PAIR SUCCESS” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
5–81
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 81
2014/12/09 10:51:45
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
ySome Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
yIf the pairing failed, “Err” flashes for
three seconds .
yPairing cannot be performed while
the vehicle is moving. If you attempt
to perform pairing while the vehicle is
moving, “PAIR DISABLE” is displayed
.
yIf seven Bluetooth® audio devices have
already been paired to the vehicle,
pairing cannot be performed and
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed. Delete
one paired device to pair another one.
Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device which
does not have a four-digit PIN code
1. Using the audio control dial, select
the pairing mode “PAIR DEVICE”
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio set up” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ENTER
PIN” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “PIN 0000” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
3. Press the audio control dial while “PIN
0000” is displayed. “PAIRING” flashes
on the audio display.
4. Operate the Bluetooth® audio device
and set it to the pairing mode while
“PAIRING” is flashing.
5. As the Bluetooth® audio device
requires a PIN code, input “0000”.
6. When the pairing is completed, and
“PAIR SUCCESS” are displayed after
about 10-30 seconds, after which
“PAIR SUCCESS” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
NOTE
yIf pairing cannot be completed, try
“1234” instead. Refer to the owner's
manual of your mobile device for the
right PIN code.
ySome Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
yIf the pairing failed, “Err” flashes for
three seconds.
yPairing cannot be performed while
the vehicle is moving. If you attempt
to perform pairing while the vehicle is
moving, “PAIR DISABLE” is displayed
.
yIf seven Bluetooth® audio devices have
already been paired to the vehicle,
pairing cannot be performed and
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed. Delete
one paired device to pair another one.
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a different
paired device, it is necessary to change the
link. The order of device priority after the
link has been changed is maintained even
when the ignition is switched off.
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
link change mode “LINK CHANGE”
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the currently linked
Bluetooth® audio device is displayed.
If no Bluetooth® audio device is
currently linked, the name of the first
device among the paired devices is
displayed.
5–82
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 82
2014/12/09 10:51:45
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
4. Turn the audio control dial to select the
name of the device you would like to
link.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
5. Press the audio control dial to select the
device you would like to link. The
symbol disappears, and “PAIRING”
flashes in the audio display.
NOTE
When “GO BACK” is selected and the
audio control dial is pressed, the display
returns to “LINK CHANGE”.
6. If the link to the desired device is
successful, the symbol is displayed
again, together with “LINK
CHANGED”. “LINK CHANGED” is
displayed for three seconds, then it
returns to the normal display.
NOTE
ySome Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
yIf a hands-free type mobile phone has
been the most recently paired device,
the Bluetooth® unit links this device.
If you would like to use a Bluetooth®
audio type device which has been
previously paired to the Bluetooth® unit,
the link must be changed to this device.
yIf an error occurs while trying to link
a device, “Err” flashes in the audio
display for three seconds, and the
display returns to “LINK CHANGE”.
If this occurs, check the pairing status
of the Bluetooth® audio device and the
location of the device in the vehicle
(not in the luggage compartment or a
metal-type box), and then try the link
operation again.
yDevice selection can also be done using
voice recognition.
How to confirm the device currently
linked
Switch to the link-change mode. (Refer to
“Changing the link to a Bluetooth® audio
device”)
The device name displayed first is the
device which is currently linked.
Deleting a device
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pairing delete mode “PAIR DELETE”
in the “BT SETUP”mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the first device among the
paired devices is displayed.
5–83
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 83
2014/12/09 10:51:45
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
4. Rotate the audio control dial and select
the name of the paired device you
would like to delete.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
NOTE
Only the names of paired devices can be
displayed. If only one device is paired,
only the name for this device is displayed.
5. If a selection other than “GO BACK”
is made and the audio control dial is
pressed, “SURE ? NO” is displayed.
6. Rotate the audio control dial clockwise
and switch the display to “SURE ?
YES”.
NOTE
The display changes as follows depending
on whether the audio control dial is
rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.
-Clockwise: “SURE ? YES” displayed
-Counterclockwise: “SURE ? NO”
displayed
7. Press the audio control dial to delete
the selected device.
NOTE
Select “GO BACK” and press the audio
control dial to return to the “PAIR
DELETE” display.
8. “PAIR DELETED” is displayed for
three seconds after the deletion is
completed, and then it returns to the
normal display.
NOTE
If an error occurs while trying to delete
the paired device, “Err” flashes in the
display for three seconds and the display
returns to “LINK DELETE”.
Bluetooth® audio device information
display
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pair device information display mode
“DEVICE INFO” in the “BT SETUP”
mode. (Refer to “Bluetooth® audio
device set-up” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the Bluetooth® unit device
is displayed.
4. Rotate the audio control dial to select
the information for the Bluetooth® unit
which you would like to view.
Device name
BT address
NOTE
When “GO BACK” is selected and the
audio control dial is pressed, the display
returns to “DEVICE INFO”.
5–84
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 84
2014/12/09 10:51:45
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Available Language (Type A)
The available languages are English,
Spanish, and Canadian French. If the
language setting is changed, all of the
voice guidance and voice input commands
are done in the selected language.
NOTE
yIf the language setting is changed,
device registration is maintained.
yPhonebook records are not cleared,
but each language has a separate
phonebook. Therefore, entries created in
one language will need to be re-entered
in the phonebook of the new language.
yDo these steps before you start driving.
These less used functions are too
distracting to undertake while driving
until you are fully familiar with the
system.
(Method 1)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,
French, or Spanish.”
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the
desired language: “English”, “French”
or “Spanish”)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying
the name of the language in the native
pronunciation.
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected” (Spoken in the newly selected
language).
(Method 2)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired
language: “English”, “French” or
“Spanish”). (Change the desired
language by saying the language
name.)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying
the name of the language in the native
pronunciation.
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change
the language to French (Desired
language)?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to
French phonebook. French selected”
(Spoken in the newly selected
language).
Voice Recognition (Type A)
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
To Activate the Main Menu: Press the
pick-up button or talk button with a short
press.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
y
Press
y
Press
and hold the talk-button.
the hang-up button.
7. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected. Is this correct?”
5–85
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 85
2014/12/09 10:51:45
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk-button.
NOTE
yThe Bluetooth® Hands-Free system
is operable several seconds after the
ignition is switched to ACC or ON
(requires less than 15 seconds).
yWhen operating the audio unit or the
A/C while using Bluetooth® HandsFree, the beep sounds or voice guidance
(audio unit)/cannot be heard.
Tutorial
The tutorial explains how to use
Bluetooth® Hands-Free.
To activate the tutorial, do the following:
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Tutorial”
3. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance instructions.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Help” or “Go Back” are commands
which can be used at anytime during voice
recognition.
Help function use
The help function informs the user of all
the available voice commands under the
current conditions.
1. Say: [Beep] “Help”
2. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance instructions.
Returning to previous operation
This command is for returning to the
previous operation while in the voice
recognition mode.
Say: [Beep] “Go Back”
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
y
The voice recognition cannot be
performed while voice guidance or
the beep sound is operating. Wait
until the voice guidance or the beep
sound is finished before saying your
commands.
y
Dialects or different wording other
than hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
y
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
y
Do not speak too slow or too loud.
y
Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
y
Close the windows and/or the moonroof
to reduce loud noises from outside
the vehicle, or turn down the airflow
of the air-conditioning system while
Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.
y
Make sure the vents are not directing air
up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Voice Recognition Learning
Function (Speaker Enrollment) (Type A)
on page 5-88.
Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-128.
5–86
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 86
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Security Setting (Type A)
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be
activated unless the passcode is input.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
Passcode setting
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would
you like to enable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit
passcode. Remember this passcode. It
will be required to use this system.”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired
4-digit passcode, “PCode”.)
9. Prompt:“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,
PCode). Is this correct?”
10.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled.”
Using Bluetooth® Hands-Free with a
passcode
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Prompt: “Hands-Free system is
locked. State the passcode to continue.”
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set
passcode “PCode”.)
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
device”) (Device tag) is connected” is
announced.
If the passcode is incorrect, voice
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try
again” is announced.
Canceling the passcode
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled. Would
you like to disable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Passcode is disabled.”
5–87
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 87
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Confirmation Prompts
The confirmation prompt confirms the
command content to the user before
advancing to the operation requested by
the user. When this function is turned
on, the system reads out the voice
input command previously received
and confirms whether the command is
correct before advancing to the command
execution.
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned on:
(Ex. “Calling John's device. Is this
correct?”)
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned off:
(Ex. “Calling John's device.”)
NOTE
If the confirmation prompt function is
turned off when making an emergency
call, the system reads out and confirms the
command before executing it.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Confirmation prompts”
5. Prompt: “Confirmation prompts
are on/off. Would you like to turn
confirmation prompts off/on?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Confirmation prompts are
off/on.”
Voice Recognition Learning
Function (Speaker Enrollment)
(Type A)
The voice recognition learning function
enables voice recognition appropriate to
the characteristics of the user's voice. If the
recognition of the voice input commands
to the system is not adequate, this function
can largely improve the system's voice
recognition of the user. If your voice can
be recognized sufficiently without using
this function, you may not realize the
added benefit of the function. To register
your voice, the voice input command
list must be read out. Read out the list
when the vehicle is parked. Perform the
registration in as quiet a place as possible
5-85. The registration must be performed
completely. The required time is a few
minutes. The user needs to be seated in the
driver's seat with the voice input command
list for voice recognition learning open to
the page indicated below.
When voice recognition learning is done
for the first time
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
4. Press the talk button with a short press.
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
5–88
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 88
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say
the voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice
recognition learning, re-learning can be
done by pressing the talk button with a
short press.
Voice recognition re-learning
If voice recognition learning has already
been done.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Retrain”
5. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
6. Press the talk button with a short press.
7. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
8. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say
the voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
9. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice
recognition learning, re-learning can be
done by pressing the talk button with a
short press.
Voice input command list for voice
recognition learning
When reading out, the following points
must be observed:
y
Read
out the numbers one at a time
correctly and naturally.
(For example, “1234” must be read out
“one, two, three, four” not “twelve,
thirty four”.)
y
Do not read out parentheses. “(” and
hyphens “-” are used for separating
numbers in a phone number.
Ex.
“(888) 555-1212” must be spoken “Eight,
eight, eight, five, five, five, one, two, one,
two.”
Phrase
Command
1
0123456789
2
(888) 555-1212
3
Call
4
Dial
5
Setup
6
Cancel
7
Continue
8
Help
NOTE
yThe applicable phrase appears in the
audio display.
yAfter user voice registration is
completed, voice guidance “Speaker
enrollment is complete” is announced.
5–89
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 89
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Voice recognition learning on/off
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Disable” or “Enable”
5. When “Disable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned off.
When “Enable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned on.
6. Prompt: “Speaker Enrollment is
disabled/enabled.”
Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B)
Device pairing
To use Bluetooth® audio and Hands-Free,
the device equipped with Bluetooth® has
to be paired to the unit using the following
procedure. A maximum of seven devices
including Bluetooth® audio devices and
hands-free mobile phones can be paired.
NOTE
The Bluetooth® system may not operate
for 1 or 2 minutes after the ignition
is switched to ACC or ON. However,
this does not indicate a problem. If the
Bluetooth® system does not connect
automatically after 1 or 2 minutes have
elapsed, make sure that the Bluetooth®
setting on the device is normal and attempt
to reconnect the Bluetooth® device from
the vehicle side.
Pairing Procedure
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
to display the
5. Select
message and switch to the device
operation.
6. Using your device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth® device (Peripheral
device).
7. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
8. (Device with Bluetooth® version 2.0)
Input the displayed 4-digit pairing code
into the device.
(Device with Bluetooth® version 2.1
or higher)
Make sure the displayed 6-digit code
on the audio is also displayed on the
.
device, and touch the
Connection permission and phonebook
access permission for your mobile
device may be required depending on
the mobile device.
9. If pairing is successful, the functions of
the device connected to Bluetooth® are
displayed.
10.(Devices compatible with Mazda
Email / SMS function)
SMS (Short Message Service)
messages, and E-mail for the device are
downloaded automatically. A download
permission operation for your device
may be required depending on the
device.
NOTE
When Call history and messages are
downloaded automatically, each automatic
download setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110.
5–90
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 90
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifies the device. By
activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again, or
by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free first
after switching the ignition from OFF to
ACC, the device connection condition is
indicated in the center display.
IMPORTANT note about pairing and
automatic reconnection:
y
If pairing is redone on the same
mobile phone device, first clear
“Mazda” displayed on the Bluetooth®
setting screen of the mobile device.
y
When the OS of the device is updated,
the pairing information may be deleted.
If this happens, reprogram the pairing
information to the Bluetooth® unit.
y
Before you pair your device, make sure
that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your
phone and on the vehicle.
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a different
paired device, it is necessary to change the
link. The order of device priority after the
link has been changed is maintained even
when the ignition is switched off.
Connecting other devices
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the name of the device you
would like to connect.
6.
selection
Connects both devices as hands-free
and Bluetooth® audio.
selection
Connects as a hands-free device.
selection
Connects as Bluetooth® audio.
NOTE
The following functions can be used for
the Hands-free or audio.
yHands-free:
Phone calls and E-mail/
SMS
yAudio: Bluetooth® audio, Pandora®,
Aha™, Stitcher™ radio
Disconnecting a device
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which is
currently connected.
.
6. Select
Deleting a device
Selecting and deleting devices
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which you
would like to delete.
.
6. Select
.
7. Select
5–91
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 91
2014/12/09 10:51:46
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Deleting all devices
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
.
5. Select
.
6. Select
Changing PIN code
PIN code (4 digits) can be changed.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
.
5. Select
6. Input the new PIN code to be set.
7. Select .
Available Language (Type B)
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free System
applies to the following languages:
y
English
y
Spanish
y
French
Refer to Settings on page 5-53.
Voice Recognition (Type B)
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
y
Press
the hang-up button.
“Cancel”.
y
Operate the commander switch or the
center display (only when vehicle is
stopped).
y
Say,
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk button.
Troubleshooting for Voice Recognition
If you do not understand an operation
method while in the voice recognition
mode, say “Tutorial” or “Help”.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Go Back” and “Cancel” are commands
which can be used at anytime during voice
recognition.
Returning to previous operation
To return to the previous operation, say,
“Go Back” while in voice recognition
mode.
Cancel
To put the Bluetooth® Hands-Free system
in standby mode, say, “Cancel” while in
voice recognition mode.
Activating Voice Recognition
Press the talk button.
5–92
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 92
2014/12/09 10:51:47
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
y
The voice recognition cannot be
performed while voice guidance or
the beep sound is operating. Wait
until the voice guidance or the beep
sound is finished before saying your
commands.
y
Phone related commands are available
only when your phone is connected via
Bluetooth®. Make sure your phone is
connected via Bluetooth® before you
operate phone related voice commands.
y
Music play commands, such as Play
Artist and Play Album can be used only
in USB audio mode.
y
Do not speak too slowly or loudly (no
loud voice).
y
Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
y
Dialects or different wording other
than hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
y
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
y
Close the windows and/or the moonroof
to reduce loud noises from outside
the vehicle, or turn down the airflow
of the air-conditioning system while
Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.
y
Make sure the vents are not directing air
up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-128.
5–93
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 93
2014/12/09 10:51:47
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Audio Operation Using Voice Recognition (Type B)
Main audio operation
The below commands are examples of the available commands.
When the talk button is pressed and the following command is spoken out, the audio can be
operated. The commands in the () can be omitted. The specified name and number are put
into the {}.
Voice command
Function
Corresponding audio
source
(Go to/Play) AM (Radio)
Switches the audio source to AM radio.
All
(Go to/Play) FM (Radio)
Switches the audio source to FM radio.
All
(Go to/Play) Bluetooth (Audio) Switches the audio source to BT audio.
All
(Go to/Play) Pandora
Switches the audio source to Pandora®
All
(Go to/Play) Aha (Radio)
Switches the audio source to Aha™ Radio.
All
(Go to/Play) Stitcher
Switches the audio source to Stitcher™ Radio.
All
(Go to/Play) USB 1
Switches the audio source to USB 1.
All
(Go to/Play) USB 2
Switches the audio source to USB 2.
Play Playlist {Playlist name}
Plays the selected playlist.
USB
Play Artist {Artist name}
Plays the selected artist.
USB
Play Album {Album name}
Plays the selected album.
USB
Play Genre {Genre name}
Plays the selected genre.
USB
Play Folder {Folder name}
Plays the selected folder.
USB
All
NOTE
ySome commands cannot be used depending on devices and use conditions.
yIf the Bluetooth® device, USB, or AUX is not connected, the related commands cannot be
used.
5–94
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 94
2014/12/09 10:51:47
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
(Type A)*
Making a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the name of a person (voice tag) whose
phone number has been registered in
Bluetooth® Hands-Free in advance. Refer
to Phonebook registration.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Call” command and the voice tag
can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Call John's phone”,
then, Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “New entry”
5. Prompt: “Name please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice tag).
Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
10.Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home” ,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”, for the
desired location to be registered.)
11. Prompt: “Mobile (Location to be
registered). Is this correct?”
12.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
13.Prompt: “Number, please.”
14.Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX”
(Say the phone number to be
registered.)
15.Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Phone
number registration). After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
save the number.”
Phonebook registration
Phone numbers can be registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 95
5–95
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
16.(Registration)
Press the pick-up button or say “Enter”,
then go to Step 17.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 15.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 13.
17.Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to add another number for this
entry?”
18.Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
19.If “Yes”, an additional phone number
registration can be made for the same
entry.
If “No”, the system returns to standby
status.
6. Device (Mobile phone) operation:
Select one entry from the phonebook
and send it using Bluetooth®.
7. Prompt: “X (Number of locations
which include data) numbers have been
imported. What name would you like to
use for these numbers?”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
9. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Voice tag). Is this
correct?”
10.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to import another contact?”
12.Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13.If “Yes”, the procedure proceeds to
Step 5.
If “No”, the system returns to standby
status.
(Import contact)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth®.
Editing phonebook
The data registered to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free phonebook can be edited.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Import contact”
5. Prompt: “The hands free System
is ready to receive a contact from a
phone. Only a home, a work, and a
mobile number can be imported, This
process requires operation of a mobile
phone. refer to the phone's manual for
more information”
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to edit or say,
“List names”.”
5–96
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 96
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the
registered name to be edited in the
phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Home” (Say the
registered location to be edited:
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Other”.)
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX
(Ex. “Home”) (Registered location). Is
this correct?”
10.Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “The current number is
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)
(Currently registered number). New
number, please.”
NOTE
If there was no previous phone number
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”),
the prompt will only read out “Number,
please”
12.Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-5678”)” (Say the new phone
number to be registered.)
13.Prompt: “XXXXXXXX (Telephone
number) After the beep, continue to add
numbers, or say Go-Back to re-enter
the last entered numbers, or press the
Pick-Up button to save the number.”
14.(Number Change)
Press the pick-up button, then go to
Step 15.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 13.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed. Number, please.”.
Then go back to Step 12.
15.Prompt: “Number changed.”
Phonebook data deletion
(Erasing individual phonebook data)
Individual data registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook can be
cleared.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to delete or say,
“List names”. ”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) ” (Say the registered voice tag
to be deleted from the phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)
Home (Registered location). Is this
correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5–97
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 97
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home
(Registered location) deleted.”
(Complete deletion of the phonebook
data)
All data registered to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free phonebook can be erased.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to
erase everything from your Hands Free
system phonebook?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete
everything from your Hands Free
system phonebook. Do you want to
continue?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the
Hands Free system phonebook.”
10.Prompt: “Hands-Free system
phonebook erased.”
Read-out of names registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook
Bluetooth® Hands-Free can read out the
list of names registered to its phonebook.
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”, Mary's
phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice guidance
reads out the voice tags registered to
the phonebook.)
Press the talk button with a short press
during the read-out at the desired name,
and then say one of the following voice
commands to execute it.
“Continue”: Continues the list readout.
“Call”: Calls the registered phonebook
data when the talk button is shortpressed.
y “Edit”: Edits the registered phonebook
data when the talk button is shortpressed.
y “Delete”: Deletes the registered
phonebook data when the talk button is
short-pressed.
y “Previous”: Returns to the previous
phonebook data in read-out when the
talk button is short-pressed.
y
y
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
7. Say: [Beep] “No”
8. The procedure returns to Step 3.
Redial Function
Redialing the number of the person
previously dialed using the phone is
possible.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
5–98
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 98
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a
non-taxing road situation. If you are not
completely comfortable, make all calls
from a safe parking position, and only
start driving when you can devote your full
attention to driving.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Dial” command and a telephone
number can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Dial 123-4567” then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
Emergency calls
A call can be made to the emergency
phone number (911: U.S.A./Canada, 066:
Mexico) using the voice input command.
It may not function properly in some areas
in Mexico.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”
3. - U.S.A./Canada vehicles - Prompt:
“Dialing “911”, is this correct?”
- Mexico vehicles - Prompt: “Dialing
“066”, is this correct?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Dialing”
Receiving an Incoming Call
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the
pick-up button to answer”
2. To accept the call, press the pick-up
button.
To reject the call, press the hang-up
button.
Hanging Up a Call
Press the hang-up button during the call. A
beep sound will confirm that call is ended.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a
call.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”
3. Prompt:“Microphone muted”
Canceling mute
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”
3. Prompt:“Microphone unmuted”
5–99
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 99
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Transferring a Call from HandsFree to a Device (Mobile Phone)
Communication between the hands-free
unit and a device (Mobile phone) is
canceled, and the line can be switched
to a standard call using a device (Mobile
phone).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt:“Transferred call to phone”
Transferring a Call from a Device
(Mobile Phone) to Hands-Free
Communication between devices (Mobile
phone) can be switched to Bluetooth®
Hands-Free.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt:“Transferred call to Hands
Free system”
Call interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
Switch to a new incoming call using the
following methods.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
NOTE
yTo refuse an incoming call, press the
hang-up button.
yAfter receiving a new incoming call, the
previous call is placed on hold.
Switching calls
Switching back to the previous call can
also be done.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Three-way call function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Join calls”
3. Prompt: “Joining calls”
Making a call using a telephone number
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
5–100
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 100
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Making calls using the phonebook
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
Redialing function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
Ending the current call
Press the hang-up button during the call.
DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver
of a DTMF transmission is generally a
home telephone answering machine or
a company's automated guidance call
center (When you send tone signals
back according to the voice guidance
recording).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say
DTMF code)
3. Prompt:“Sending XXXX... (DTMF
code)”
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
(Type B)*
Making a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the contact name in the downloaded
phonebook or the name of a person whose
phone number has been registered in the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free. Refer to Import
contact (Download Phonebook).
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)
Mobile”.
4. Follow the voice guidance to place the
call.
Screen operation
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the contact
2. Select
list.
3. Select the contact you would like
to call to display the details for the
contact.
4. Select the desired phone number to
make the call.
Import contact (Download Phonebook)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth®.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 101
5–101
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Contacts”
setting must be on. When hands-free is
connected to the device, the phonebook is
downloaded automatically.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110.
(Manually downloading)
If the “Auto Download Contacts” setting
is off, download the phonebook using the
following procedure.
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the contact
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
or
4. Select
to switch to the
device operation.
is selected, select
5. If
.
6. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
NOTE
yIf “Import All Contacts” is performed
after saving the phonebook to the
Bluetooth® unit, the phonebook will be
overwritten.
yA maximum of 1000 contacts can be
registered to the phonebook.
yPhonebook, incoming/outgoing call
record, and favorite memories are
exclusive to each mobile phone to
protect privacy.
Favorites Contacts
A maximum of 50 contacts can be
registered. It will take less time to make a
call after registering the telephone number.
In addition, you do not have to look for the
person you want to call in the phonebook.
Registering to your favorites
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
or
4. Select
.
5. Select from the displayed list.
NOTE
When “Add New Contact” is selected,
information such as the selected person’s
name is also registered. In addition, when
“Add New Contact Details” is selected,
only the telephone number of the selected
person is registered.
Making a call from your favorites
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
3. (Only one phone number is
registered to contact)
Select the contact information you
would like to call. Go to Step 5.
(Multiple phone numbers are
registered to contact)
Select the contact you would like to
call to display the screen indicating the
details for the contact. Go to Step 4.
4. Select the phone number you would
like to call.
.
5. Select
Deleting from your favorites
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5–102
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 102
2014/12/09 10:51:48
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5. Select the contact information which
you would like to delete.
.
6. Select
Changing the display order of your
favorites list
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5. The contact can be moved after it is
selected.
6. Slide the contact or move it using the
.
commander switch, then select
Changing contact name of your
favorites
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5. Select the contact to display the
keyboard screen.
is
6. If a new name is input and
selected, the contact name is stored.
NOTE
If the contact is long-pressed when the
favorites list is displayed, the contact
information can be edited (deleted,
moved).
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a
non-taxing road situation. If you are not
completely comfortable, make all calls
from a safe parking position, and only
start driving when you can devote your full
attention to driving.
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
is pressed, the dial pad
2. When
is displayed.
3. Input the telephone number using the
dial pad.
4. Select to make the call.
Numeral or symbol entry
Use the dial pad.
to input +.
Long-press the
to delete the currently input
Select
value.
to delete all input values.
Long-press
Redial Function
Makes a call to the last person called
(latest person on outgoing call record)
from the mobile phone/vehicle.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Redial”
Call back Function
Makes a call to the last person who called
your (latest person on incoming call
record) mobile phone/vehicle.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call back”
5–103
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 103
2014/12/09 10:51:49
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Mobile 911 (U.S.A./Canada only)
If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, a call is made
automatically to 911 from the connected
device. The “Emergency Assistance Call”
setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110.
CAUTION
Though the system can be set to
not call 911, doing so will defeat
the purpose of the system. Mazda
recommends that the Mobile 911
system remain activated.
NOTE
yMobile 911 is a secondary function
of the audio entertainment system.
Therefore, the mobile 911 function
does not assure that the call is always
made to 911 after an accident occurs.
yA Hands-free device must be paired and
connected. The 911 operator can verify
the vehicle's position information using
the Hands-free device GPS if equipped.
The 911 operator can verify the
vehicle’s position information.
1. If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, notification of the
call to 911 is made via audio and screen
display. To cancel the call, press
or hang-up
button within 10 seconds.
or hang2. If
up button is not pressed within 10
seconds, the call is made to 911
automatically.
5–104
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 104
2014/12/09 10:51:50
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Receiving an Incoming Call
When an incoming call is received, the incoming call notification screen is displayed. The
“Incoming Call Notifications” setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page 5-110.
on
To accept the call, press the pick-up button on the audio control switch or select
the screen.
on the
To reject the call, press the hang-up button on the audio control switch or select
screen.
The following icons are displayed on the screen during a call. Icons which can be used differ
depending on use conditions.
Icon
Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Ends the call.
Transferring a call from hands-free to a mobile phone
Communication between the Bluetooth® unit and a device (mobile phone) is canceled, and
an incoming call will be received by the device (mobile phone) like a standard call.
Transferring a call from a device (mobile phone) to hands-free
Communication between devices (mobile phone) can be switched to Bluetooth® HandsFree.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a call.
When selected again, the mute is canceled.
A call is made to other person during a call and a 3-way call can be made. Select the contact
from the following to make a call.
: Call History is displayed.
: The phonebook is displayed.
: The dial pad is displayed. Input the phone number.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
The call on hold is made to make a 3-way call.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
Switches the call on hold.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting DTMF via the dial pad. The receiver of a DTMF
transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company's automated
guidance call center.
Input the number using a dial pad.
5–105
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 105
2014/12/09 10:51:50
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yIf the ignition is switched off during a
hands-free call, the line is transferred
to the device (Mobile phone)
automatically.
yIf the DTMF code has two or more
digits or symbols, each one must be
transmitted individually.
Call Interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
is selected or the pickWhen
up button on the steering wheel is pressed,
the current call is held and the system
switches to the new incoming call.
is selected, the current
When
call is ended and the system switches to
the new incoming call (GSM network
only).
is selected or the hang-up
When
button on the steering wheel is pressed, an
incoming call is refused.
NOTE
yThe function may not be available
depending on the contractual content of
the mobile device.
yThe function may not be operable
depending on the type of the telephone
network and the mobile device.
Receiving and Replying to
Messages (available only with
E-mail/SMS compatible phones)
SMS (Short Message Service) messages,
and E-mail received by connected devices
can be downloaded, displayed, and played
(read by the system).
Additionally, replies can also be made
to calls and messages in the received
messages.
Downloading messages
Up to 20 new messages can be
downloaded and displayed from a
connected device.
NOTE
For e-mail, 20 messages for each account
can be downloaded.
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Email” (E-mail)
or “Auto Download Text Message”
(SMS) setting must be on. A message
is downloaded automatically when the
Bluetooth® unit is connected to the device.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110.
(Manually downloading)
When the “Auto Download Email”
(E-mail) or “Auto Download Text
Message” (SMS) setting is off, the
message is downloaded using the
following procedure.
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
or
to display
2. Select
the Inbox.
.
3. Select
4. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
5–106
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 106
2014/12/09 10:51:51
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yAttached data is not downloaded.
yMessages up to 1 kilobyte (e-mail)/140
bytes (SMS) can be downloaded.
yA message list is created for each
device.
yIf the connected device does not
correspond to MAP 1.0, the AT
command is used to download. The
downloaded message indicates that it is
already read.
yDownloading using the AT command
may not function depending on the
connected device.
Receiving messages
(Method 1)
When a device receives a message, a
message received notification is displayed.
The “Email Notifications” (E-mail) or
“Text Notifications” (SMS) setting must
be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110.
and display the message.
Select
(Method 2)
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
and display the new
2. Select
message list for e-mail and SMS.
3. Select the message you would like to
display.
5–107
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 107
2014/12/09 10:51:52
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the details on the message. Icons
which can be used differ depending on use conditions.
Icon
Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Displays the inbox.
Plays back a message.
When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Displays the previous message.
Displays the next message.
Only replies to the sender of the currently displayed message.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select
.
(Only E-mail)
Replies to all members including CC.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select
.
Makes a call to a person who sent a message.
For E-mail, this function may not work depending on the device.
Deletes a message.
The messages stored in a device is also deleted.
NOTE
Up to three preset messages can be selected.
5–108
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 108
2014/12/09 10:51:53
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (verify unread E-mail)
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
to display the inbox.
2. Select
NOTE
ySelect the
icon to change the
language.
ySelect the
icon to switch between
capitalized and lower-case characters.
ySelect the
icon to return to the
previous screen without storing the edit.
3. Select the unread message displayed in
bold.
4. The details of the message are
displayed and replying to the message,
making a call, or playback can be
performed.
Changing account for displaying
(E-mail only)
.
1. Select
2. Select the account which you would
like to display. Only the messages for
the selected account are displayed in
the inbox.
Editing preset messages
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
and display the Communication screen.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. Select the preset message which you
would like to edit. The keyboard screen
is displayed.
5. When the message is input and is
selected, the message is stored as a
preset message.
5–109
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 109
2014/12/09 10:51:54
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Communication Settings
Select the
Select
icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
to change the setting.
Item
Setting
®
Bluetooth
—
Function
Go to Bluetooth® setting menu.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on page 5-90.
Incoming Call
Notifications
On/Off
Notifies when an incoming call is received.
Auto Download Text
Message
On/Off
Downloads SMS automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is connected
to the device.
Text Notifications
On/Off
Notifies when a new SMS is received.
Auto Download
Email*1
On/Off
Downloads E-mail automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is connected
to the device.
Email Notifications
On/Off
Notifies when a new Email is received.
Auto Download Call
History
On/Off
Downloads Call History automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Auto Download
Contacts*1
On/Off
Downloads the phonebook automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Ringtone
Car/Phone/Off
Changes the ringtone setting.
Phone Volume
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the conversation volume.
VR and Ringtone
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the voice guidance and ringtone volume.
Contacts Display
Order
First Name,
Last Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the first name.
Last Name,
First Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the last name.
Edit Preset Messages
—
Emergency Assistance
Call
On/Off
Restore Factory
settings
—
Edits the preset message.
Refer to Receiving and Replying to Messages (available only with
E-mail/SMS compatible phones) on page 5-106.
Mobile Utilizes the Mobile 911 function.
Initializes all Communication Settings.
*1 Depending on the device, it may be necessary to acquire download permission on the device side.
5–110
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 110
2014/12/09 10:51:57
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A)*
Applicable Bluetooth® specification
(Recommended)
Ver. 2.0
Response profile
y
A2DP
(Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.2
y
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.3
A2DP is a profile which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds
only to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you
cannot operate it using the control panel
of the vehicle's audio system. In this
case, only the operations on the mobile
device are available the same as when a
portable audio device for a non-compliant
Bluetooth® device is connected to the
AUX terminal.
Function
A2DP
AVRCP
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3
Playback
—
X
X
Pause
—
X
X
File (Track) up/down
—
X
X
Reverse
—
—
X
Fast-forward
—
—
X
Text display
—
—
X
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
yThe battery consumption of Bluetooth®
audio devices increases while
Bluetooth® is connected.
yIf a general mobile phone device is
USB connected during music playback
over the Bluetooth® connection, the
Bluetooth® connection is disconnected.
For this reason, you cannot have music
playback over a Bluetooth® connection
and music playback using a USB
connection at the same time.
yThe system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth® audio
device.
How to Use the Bluetooth® Audio
System
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded
to a Bluetooth® audio device, switch to
the Bluetooth® audio mode to operate
the audio device using the audio system
control panel. Any Bluetooth® audio
device must be paired to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit before it can be used.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type A)
on page 5-76.
1. Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device's
power.
2. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
Make sure that the “ ” symbol is
displayed in the audio display. The
symbol is not displayed if an un-paired
Bluetooth® audio device is being used
or the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit has a
malfunction.
NOTE
Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the “ ”
symbol is displayed.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 111
5–111
2014/12/09 10:51:57
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
3. Press the media button (
) to
switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode
and start playback.
If the current device version is lower
than AVRCP Ver. 1.3: “BT Audio” is
displayed.
If the current device is AVRCP Ver. 1.3:
The playback time is displayed.
NOTE
yIf the Bluetooth® audio device does not
begin playback, press the Play/Pause
button (4).
yIf a call is received on a hands-free
mobile phone during playback from the
Bluetooth® audio device, the playback is
stopped. Playback from the Bluetooth®
audio device resumes after the call
ends.
Fast-forward/Reverse (AVRCP Ver. 1.3)
Fast-forward
Press and hold the fast-forward button
).
(
Reverse
Press and hold the reverse down button
).
(
Switching the display (only AVRCP Ver.
1.3)
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button (3) is pressed during playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
Elapsed time
Album name
Playback
1. To listen to a Bluetooth® audio device
over the vehicle's speaker system,
switch the mode to Bluetooth®
audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to
Bluetooth® audio mode”)
2. To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button (4).
3. Press the button again to resume
playback.
Song name
Artist name
NOTE
yIf title information is not available, “NO
TITLE” is displayed.
yThis unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
Selecting a file (track)
Selects the next file (track)
Short-press the track up button (
).
Selects the beginning of the current file
(track)
).
Short-press the track down button (
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button (3). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
(3) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
5–112
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 112
2014/12/09 10:51:57
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Audio Device
Information Display
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B)*
If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the audio display.
AVRCP Ver.
lower than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
Device name
X
X
Title
—
X
Artist name
—
X
Album name
—
X
File number
—
X
Playback time
—
X
Folder number
—
—
Applicable Bluetooth® specification
(Recommended)
Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0
(conformity)
Response profile
y
A2DP
(Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.2
y
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.3/1.4
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display
depending on the device, and if the
information cannot be displayed, “NO
TITLE” is indicated.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 113
5–113
2014/12/09 10:51:58
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
A2DP is a profile which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds
only to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you
cannot operate it using the control panel
of the vehicle's audio system. In this
case, only the operations on the mobile
device are available the same as when a
portable audio device for a non-compliant
Bluetooth® device is connected to the
AUX terminal.
Function
A2DP
AVRCP
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.4
Playback
X
X
X
X
Pause
X
X
X
X
File (Track)
up/down
—
X
X
X
Reverse
—
—
X
X
Fast-forward
—
—
X
X
Text display
—
—
X
X
Repeat
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
Shuffle
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
Scan
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
Folder up/
down
—
—
—
NOTE
yThe battery consumption of Bluetooth®
audio devices increases while
Bluetooth® is connected.
yIf a general mobile phone device is
USB connected during music playback
over the Bluetooth® connection, the
Bluetooth® connection is disconnected.
For this reason, you cannot have music
playback over a Bluetooth® connection
and music playback using a USB
connection at the same time.
yThe system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth® audio
device.
Depends
on
device
X: Available
—: Not available
5–114
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 114
2014/12/09 10:51:58
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use the Bluetooth® Audio System
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth® audio device, switch to the
Bluetooth® audio mode to operate the audio device using the audio system control panel.
Any Bluetooth® audio device must be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit before it can be
used.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on page 5-90.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device's power.
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
Select the
When Bluetooth® is selected, switches to the Bluetooth® audio mode to begin playback.
NOTE
yIf Bluetooth® audio is used after using Pandora®, Aha™ or Stitcher™ radio, the
application on the mobile device has to be closed first.
yIf the Bluetooth® audio device does not begin playback, select the
icon.
yIf the mode is switched from Bluetooth® audio mode to another mode (radio mode), audio
playback from the Bluetooth® audio device stops.
Playback
To listen to a Bluetooth® audio device over the vehicle's speaker system, switch the mode to
Bluetooth® audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode”)
After switching to the Bluetooth® audio mode, the following icons are displayed in the
lower part of the display. Icons which can be used differ depending on the version of the
Bluetooth® audio device which you are currently using.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.4 only)
Displays the top level folder/file list.
Select the folder which you want to select.
The files in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the file you want to play.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change when the song is repeated or the folder is repeated.
5–115
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 115
2014/12/09 10:51:58
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the device are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change during folder shuffle or device shuffle.
Scans the titles in a folder and plays the beginning of each song to aid in finding a desired
song.
When selected again, the beginning of each song on the device is played.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
Returns to the beginning of the previous song.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Plays the Bluetooth® audio. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
5–116
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 116
2014/12/09 10:52:02
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (When searching for a
song from the top level of a device)
icon and display the
1. Select the
folder/file list at the top level.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/file
lists in the folder are displayed.
When the playlist is selected, the file
list is displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
Select
higher.
to move to a folder one level
Bluetooth® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the center display.
AVRCP
Ver. lower
than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.4 or
higher
Device name
X
X
X
Remaining
battery
charge of
device
X
X
X
Song name
—
X
X
Artist name
—
X
X
Album name
—
X
X
Playback
time
—
X
X
Genre name
—
X
X
Album art
image
—
—
—
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display
depending on the device, and if the
information cannot be displayed,
“Unknown - - -” is indicated.
5–117
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 117
2014/12/09 10:52:03
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Pandora®*
What is Pandora®?
Pandora® is free personalized Internet radio. Simply enter a favorite artist, track, genre,
and Pandora® will create a personalized station that plays their music and more like it.
Rate songs by giving thumbs-up and thumbs-down feedback to further refine your station,
discover new music and help Pandora® play only music you like.
*
Pandora®,
the Pandora® logo, and the Pandora® trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Pandora® from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
Pandora® account on the Web.
yCreate Pandora® station using Pandora® application.
yInstall Pandora® application on your device.
yCreate
Playback
Select the
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Thumbs-Down
Press the
icon to tell Pandora® not to play this track.
Thumbs-Up
icon to tell Pandora® “you like this track” and it helps to bring in more tracks
Press the
like it to your station.
Bookmarking
Bookmarks the song or artist currently being played.
Plays the track. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Goes to the next song.
5–118
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 118
2014/12/09 10:52:03
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
NOTE
yThe skip function may not be available depending on the device.
yThe number of skips is limited by Pandora®.
yIf the
icon is selected when the skip song function is running, the next song is skipped.
5–119
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 119
2014/12/09 10:52:04
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Selection from station list
Selection can be made from a programmed
radio station list.
icon.
1. Select the
2. Select the desired radio station.
NOTE
When
is selected, songs randomly
selected from the radio station list are
played.
Selecting the sort method
The displayed order of the station list can
be changed.
icon.
1. Select the
.
2. Select
to display in the order
3. Select
starting from the newly created station.
to display in alphabetical
4. Select
order.
NOTE
The displayed order of
changed.
cannot be
Bookmarking
You can bookmark song or artist to check
out later on the Web.
1. Select the
2. Select
song.
3. Select
artist.
icon.
to bookmark the
to bookmark the
5–120
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 120
2014/12/09 10:52:04
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Aha™*
Aha is an application which can be used to enjoy various Internet content such as Internet
radio and podcasts.
Stay connected to your friends activities by getting updates from Facebook and Twitter.
Using the location-based service, nearby services and destinations can be searched or realtime local information can be obtained.
For details on Aha, refer to “http://www.aharadio.com/”.
*
Aha,
the Aha logo, and the Aha trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Harman International Industries, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
yThe service content provided by Aha varies depending on the country in which the user
resides. In addition, the service is not available in some countries.
yTo operate Aha from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
yInstall
the Aha application to your device.
an Aha account for your device.
yLog onto Aha using your device.
ySelect the preset station on your device.
yCreate
Playback
icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When
is
Select the
selected, the following icons are displayed at the bottom of the center display. The displayed
icon differs depending on the selected station.
In addition, icons other than the following icons may be displayed.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the main menu.
Use to switch to other stations.
Displays the content list.
Use to switch to other desired content on the station.
Shout
Records voice.
Records voice and posts it as playable audio to Facebook and other social stations.
Like*1
Evaluates the current content as “Like”.
5–121
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 121
2014/12/09 10:52:04
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Dislike*1
Evaluates the current content as “Dislike”.
Reverses for 15 seconds.
Map (vehicles with navigation system)
Displays the destination searched by the location based services on the navigation system.
Call
A call can be made to the telephone number of a shop searched using the Location Based
Services. Available when a device is connected as a Hands-Free.
Returns to the previous content.
Pauses playback of the content. When selected again, playback resumes.
Goes to the next content.
Fast-forwards for 30 seconds.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
*1 Some stations may use alternate variations of Like and Dislike, based on station type or provider.
Main menu
icon.
Select the
Switch the tab and select the station category.
5–122
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 122
2014/12/09 10:52:05
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Tab
Function
Presets
Displays the preset station list set on the device.
Select the preset station name to play the station content.
Nearby
Select the desired station.
Guidance is provided to the searched destination near the vehicle's position.
You can designate desired categories previously set using the filter setting
on your device.
NOTE
The available Location Based Services may differ because the services depend on the
content provided by Aha™.
5–123
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 123
2014/12/09 10:52:05
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (Location Based
Services)
1. Select the desired station from the
Nearby tab on the main menu.
The destination name or address
playback starts in the order of the
destination name list.
2. When the
icon is selected, the
currently displayed destination is
displayed on the navigation system
(vehicles with navigation system).
3. When the icon is selected, a phone
call is placed to the currently displayed
destination.
icon and display the
4. Select the
content list.
Selection of other destinations from the
list can be made.
Shout
Some social stations, such as Facebook or
Caraoke, support the ability to record and
share voice messages using the “Shout”
function.
1. Select the icon and start the
countdown (3, 2, 1, 0). Recording starts
when the countdown reaches zero.
2. Records voice.
and store/post the
3. Select
recording.
NOTE
yRecordable time varies depending on
the station (Max. 30 seconds).
yRecording stops automatically when the
recordable time has elapsed. You can
then post or delete the recording.
5–124
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 124
2014/12/09 10:52:05
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Stitcher™* Radio
What is Stitcher™ Radio?
Stitcher™ radio is an application which can be used to listen to Internet radio or stream
podcasts.
Recommended content is automatically selected by registering content which you put into
your favorites, or by pressing the Like or Dislike button.
For details on Stitcher™ Radio, refer to “http://stitcher.com/”.
*
Stitcher™,
the Stitcher™ logo, and the Stitcher™ trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Stitcher, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Stitcher™ Radio from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
yInstall
the Stitcher™ Radio application to your device.
a Stitcher™ Radio account for your device.
yLog onto Stitcher™ Radio using your device.
yCreate
Playback
icon on the home screen. When
Select the Entertainment screen and display the
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Dislike
Evaluates the current program as “Dislike”.
Like
Evaluates the current program as “Like”.
Adds the current station to your favorites or deletes the current station from your favorites.
Reverses for 30 seconds.
Plays the station. Select it again to pause playback.
5–125
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 125
2014/12/09 10:52:06
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Goes to the next station.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-40.
Station list
icon and display the station list.
1. Select the
Favorites station name: Select to display the program registered to your favorites.
Category name: A recommended category selected from your favorites by Stitcher™
is displayed.
Select it to display the category program.
2. Select the program name to play it.
5–126
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 126
2014/12/09 10:52:06
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Add to your favorites
If the current program has not been
registered to your favorites, it can be
registered to your favorites.
icon to display the
1. Select the
favorites station which the registration
can be added.
2. Select the station name which you want
to register.
to add the program to the
3. Select
selected favorites station.
NOTE
yMultiple favorites stations can be
selected and registered.
yFavorites stations registered by
oneself as well those set by default are
displayed.
Delete from your favorites
If the current program has already been
registered to your favorites, the program
can be deleted from your favorites.
icon.
1. Select the
2. The program is automatically deleted
from the favorites station.
5–127
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 127
2014/12/09 10:52:06
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Troubleshooting*
Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service
If you have any problems with Bluetooth®, contact our toll-free customer service center.
y
U.S.A.
Phone:
800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
y
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
y
Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Web:
Bluetooth® Device pairing, connection problems
Symptom
Unable to perform pairing
Cause
Solution method
—
First make sure the device is
compatible with the Bluetooth®
unit, and then check whether the
Bluetooth® function and the Find
Mode/Visible setting*1 on the device
are turned on. If pairing is still
not possible after this, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or Mazda
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer
Service.
The pairing information paired to
the Bluetooth® unit or device is not
recognized correctly.
Perform pairing using the following
procedure.
yClear “Mazda” stored in the device.
yPerform pairing again.
The Bluetooth® function and the
Find Mode/Visible setting*1 on the
device may turn off automatically
after a period of time has elapsed
depending on the device.
Check whether the Bluetooth®
function and the Find Mode/Visible
setting*1 on the device are turned on
and pairing or reconnect.
Disconnects intermittently
The device is in a location in which
radio wave interference can occur
easily, such as inside a bag in a rear
seat, in a rear pocket of a pair of
pants.
Move the device to a location in
which radio wave interference is less
likely to occur.
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
The pairing information is updated
when the device OS is updated.
Perform pairing again.
Pairing cannot be performed again
Unable to perform pairing
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
Automatically connects, but then
disconnects suddenly
*1 Setting which detects the existence of a device external to the Bluetooth® unit
5–128
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 128
2014/12/09 10:52:06
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yWhen the OS of the device is updated, the pairing information may be deleted. If this
happens, reprogram the pairing information to the Bluetooth® unit.
yIf you pair your phone which has already been paired to your vehicle more than once in
the past, you need to delete “Mazda” on your mobile device. Then, execute the Bluetooth®
search on your mobile device once again, and pair to a newly detected “Mazda”.
yBefore you pair your device, make sure that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your phone and
on the vehicle.
Voice recognition related problems
Symptom
Cause
Solution method
yExcessive,
yExcessive,
slow speech.
forceful speech
(shouting).
ySpeaking before the beep sound
has ended.
yLoud noise (speaking or noise from
outside/inside vehicle).
yAirflow from A/C is blowing
against the microphone.
ySpeaking in off-standard
expressions (dialect).
Regarding the causes indicated
on the left, be careful with how
you speak. In addition, when
numbers are spoken in a sequence,
recognition ability will improve
if no stop is placed between the
numbers.
Poor voice recognition
There is a malfunction in the
microphone.
A poor connection or malfunction
with the microphone may have
occurred. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Phone-related voice recognition is
disabled
There is a problem with the
connection between the Bluetooth®
unit and the device.
If there is any malfunction after
checking the pairing situation, check
for device pairing or connection
problems.
Names in the phonebook are not
easily recognized
The Bluetooth® system is under a
condition in which recognition is
difficult.
By carrying out the following
measures, the rate of recognition
will improve.
yClear memory from the phonebook
which is not used very often.
yAvoid shortened names, use full
names. (Recognition improves the
longer the name is. By not using
names such as “Mom”, “Dad”,
recognition will improve.)
When operating the audio, a song
name is not recognized
Song names cannot be recognized
by voice.
—
Poor voice recognition
False recognition of numbers
You want to skip guidance
—
Guidance can be skipped by quickly
pressing and releasing the Talk
button.
5–129
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 129
2014/12/09 10:52:06
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Regarding problems with calls
Symptom
Cause
Solution method
When starting a call, vehicle noise
from the other party can be heard
For about three seconds after
starting a call, the Bluetooth®
unit's Noise Suppression function
requires time to adapt to the call
environment.
This does not indicate a problem
with the device.
The other party cannot be heard or
the speaker's voice is quiet
The volume is set at zero or low.
Increase the volume.
Other problems
Cause
Solution method
The indication for the remaining
battery is different between the
vehicle and the device
Symptom
The indication method is different
between the vehicle and the device.
—
When a call is made from the
vehicle, the telephone number is
updated in the incoming/outgoing
call record but the name does not
appear
The number has not been registered
into the phonebook.
If the number has been registered
into the phonebook, the incoming/
outgoing call record is updated by
the name in the phonebook when the
engine is restarted.
The cell phone does not synchronize
Some types of cell phones do not
with the vehicle regarding the
synchronize automatically.
incoming/outgoing call record
It takes a long time to complete the
function for changing the language
A maximum of 60 seconds is
required.
Operate the cell phone for
synchronization.
—
5–130
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 130
2014/12/09 10:52:07
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
Interior Lights
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for use
in front or swing it to the side.
Overhead Lights
Switch
Position
Sunvisor
Overhead Lights
Light off
yLight
yLight
is on when any door is open
is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
Light on
Front
Side Extension Sunvisors
*
The visor extender extends the sunvisor's
range of sun shading.
To use, pull it out.
Rear
CAUTION
When moving the sunvisor, retract the
visor extender to its original position.
Otherwise, the visor extender could hit
the rearview mirror.
Vanity Mirrors
NOTE
The rear overhead light also turn on and
off when the front overhead light switch is
operated.
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 131
5–131
2014/12/09 10:52:07
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Map Lights
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate the map lights, and then press
the lens again to turn them off.
Illuminated Entry System
The overhead lights turn on when any
of the following operations is done with
the overhead light switch in the DOOR
position and the ignition switched off.
y
Turn
on for about 30 seconds when the
driver's door is unlocked.
y
Turn on for about 15 seconds when a
door is opened with a key left in the
vehicle and then the door is closed.
y
Turn on for about 5 seconds when a
door is opened from the outside with a
key being carried and then the door is
closed.
NOTE
The map lights will not turn off even if the
lens is pressed in the following cases:
yThe
overhead light switch is in the ON
position.
yThe overhead light switch is in the door
position with the door open.
yThe illuminated entry system is on.
The overhead lights turn on for about 15
seconds when the ignition is switched
off with the overhead light switch in the
DOOR position.
The overhead lights turn off immediately
in the following cases:
y
The
ignition is switched on and all doors
are closed.
y
The driver's door is locked.
Luggage Compartment Lights
Switch
Position
Luggage Compartment Light
Light off
Light on when the liftgate is open
5–132
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 132
2014/12/09 10:52:07
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
NOTE
yBattery saver
If any door is left open with the
overhead light switch in the DOOR
position, or the liftgate is left open, the
overhead light or luggage compartment
light turns off after about 30 minutes to
prevent battery depletion.
yTo prevent battery depletion, if the
interior lights remain turned on (the
interior light switch is in the ON
position or an interior light is turned
on by pressing the lens of the interior
light), they turn off automatically under
the following conditions:
Accessory Sockets
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON.
yNo
operations are done for about 30
minutes after the ignition is switched
off.
yWhen the LOCK button on the key
is pressed or the request switch
is pressed to lock the doors on
vehicles with the advanced keyless
function after the ignition is switched
off (interior lights turn off a few
seconds).
In addition, if the following operations
are performed after turning the interior
lights off, they will turn on again.
yThe
ignition is switched to a position
other than OFF.
yA door is opened.
yA door is unlocked.
yThe
operation of the illuminated entry
system can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
5–133
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 133
2014/12/09 10:52:08
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
CAUTION
¾To prevent accessory socket damage or
electrical failure, pay attention to the
following:
¾Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
¾Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
¾Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent foreign
objects and liquids from getting into
the accessory socket.
¾Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
¾Do not insert the cigarette lighter into
the accessory socket.
¾Noise may occur on the audio playback
depending on the device connected to
the accessory socket.
¾Depending on the device connected
to the accessory socket, the vehicle's
electrical system may be affected,
which could cause the warning light to
illuminate. Disconnect the connected
device and make sure that the problem
is resolved. If the problem is resolved,
disconnect the device from the socket
and switch the ignition off. If the
problem is not resolved, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Cup Holder
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups
or drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be
hit and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the socket for long periods with the
engine off or idling.
5–134
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 134
2014/12/09 10:52:08
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
doors.
Storage Compartments
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open is
dangerous. To reduce the possibility of
injury in an accident or a sudden stop,
keep the storage boxes closed when
driving.
Bottle holder
CAUTION
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The contents
may spill when the door is opened or
closed.
Do not put articles in storage spaces
with no lid:
Putting articles in storage spaces with
no lid is dangerous as they could be
thrown around the cabin if the vehicle
is suddenly accelerated and cause
injury depending on how the article is
stored.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses
in the storage boxes while parked
under the sun. A lighter could explode
or the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
5–135
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 135
2014/12/09 10:52:08
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Overhead Console*
This console box is designed to store
eyeglasses or other accessories.
Push and release to open.
Glove Compartment
Center Console Tray
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
A cup or small items can be placed on
the center console tray using the center
console divider.
The center console tray is large enough to
place a small item when the center console
divider is not in use.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
latch toward you.
To close the glove compartment,
firmly press in the center of the glove
compartment lid.
5–136
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 136
2014/12/09 10:52:08
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Cargo Securing Loops
WARNING
Make sure luggage and cargo is secured
before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
Use the loops in the luggage compartment
to secure cargo with a rope or net. The
tensile strength of the loops is 196 N (20
kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force
to the loops as it will damage them.
Luggage Board
When using the luggage board in the
upper level
CAUTION
Make sure the luggage board is
securely inserted into the grooves.
Otherwise, the luggage board may
detach while the vehicle is being driven
or during sudden braking resulting
in injury or damage to the luggage
board.
Insert the luggage board into the left and
right grooves.
Luggage board
Groove
Luggage board
5–137
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 137
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
When using the luggage board in the
lower level (vehicles without subwoofer)
By placing the luggage board on top of the
luggage mat, more space is available for
placing taller items.
1. Lift up the luggage board and pull it
outward.
Rear Coat Hooks
WARNING
Never hang heavy or sharp objects on
the assist grips and coat hooks:
Hanging heavy or sharp-ended objects
such as a coat hanger from the assist
grips or coat hooks is dangerous as
they can fly off and hit an occupant
in the cabin if a curtain air bag was to
deploy, which could result in serious
injury or death.
Always hang clothes on the coat hooks
and the assist grips without hangers.
2. Place the luggage board on top of the
luggage mat.
Coat hook
Luggage mat
Luggage board
5–138
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 138
2014/12/09 10:52:09
6
Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Essential Information ........................................................................ 6-2
Introduction ................................................................................... 6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................................................... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico) ........ 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) .............................................. 6-13
Maintenance Monitor .................................................................. 6-20
Owner Maintenance......................................................................... 6-22
Owner Maintenance Precautions ................................................ 6-22
Hood ............................................................................................ 6-24
Engine Compartment Overview ................................................. 6-26
Engine Oil ................................................................................... 6-27
Engine Coolant............................................................................ 6-29
Brake Fluid.................................................................................. 6-31
Window Washer Fluid ................................................................. 6-31
Body Lubrication ........................................................................ 6-32
Wiper Blades ............................................................................... 6-33
Battery ......................................................................................... 6-36
Key Battery Replacement ........................................................... 6-38
Tires............................................................................................. 6-41
Light Bulbs.................................................................................. 6-45
Fuses ........................................................................................... 6-52
Appearance Care.............................................................................. 6-57
Exterior Care ............................................................................... 6-57
Interior Care ................................................................................ 6-63
6–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility to
properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in this
manual. As part of this you must keep your maintenance records, receipts, repair orders and
any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present these
documents, should any warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so can result in
your warranty being voided either in whole or in part.
This evidence may consist of the following:
y
The
Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, must be
completely filled out showing mileage, repair order number, date for each service, and
signed by a qualified automotive service technician who service vehicles.
y
Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date the
vehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a qualified automotive service
technician.
y
For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself,
displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the
replacement parts (fluid, filters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompany this
statement.
NOTE
If you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location
other than an Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda requires that all fluids, parts and materials
must meet Mazda standards for durability and performance as described in this manual.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
6–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
Selecting “Maintenance Monitor” enables the system to notify you of your vehicle's
approaching inspection/servicing period (page 6-20).
6–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto
Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions)apply.
y
Repeated
short-distance driving
in dusty conditions
y
Driving with extended use of brakes
y
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
y
Driving on rough or muddy roads
y
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
y
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
y
Driving in extremely hot conditions
y
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
y
Driving
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2. (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2.)
Vehicles using Engine Oil Flexible Maintenance
Engine Oil Flexible Maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose
vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply:
y
Extended
periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving
school car
y
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 with engine oil fixed maintenance.
Once engine oil flexible maintenance is selected, the vehicle calculates the remaining oil life
based on engine operating conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due
by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 500 km (300 miles) or 15 days. Refer page 6-20 for the details.
Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil and Castrol® 0W-20 Oil are required to achieve optimum
performance.
NOTE
yPlease ensure that the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is reset after each Oil and Filter
replacement.
yFor maintenance guidelines beyond the miles/months listed, follow the maintenance
intervals provided in the Scheduled Maintenance Tables.
6–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
U.S.A. residents - Engine oil flexible maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Flexible”. For details,
see maintenance monitor. (page 6-20)
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Maintenance Interval
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
×1000 km
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
×1000 miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
*1
Engine oil & filter
I
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval: 12
months/16,000 km (10,000 miles))
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 36 months/60,000 km (37,500 miles))
Fuel lines and hoses*3
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*3
I
I
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)*4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
*5*6
Rear differential oil
*6
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 24 months/48,000 km (30,000 miles))
6–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:52:09
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000 km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and filter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*6 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
U.S.A. residents - Fixed maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see
maintenance monitor. (page 6-20)
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
×1000 km
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
×1000 miles
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
Engine oil & filter
I
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
Tire (Rotation)*3*4
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
*5*6
Rear differential oil
*6
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
6–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 To equalize tread wear for maintaining good performance in handling and braking, rotate the tires every 12,000
km (7,500 miles). However Mazda recommends to rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) to help increase tire life
and distribute wear more evenly.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*6 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
U.S.A. (severe driving conditions) and Puerto Rico residents
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Maintenance Interval
Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & filter
Flexible*1
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval: 12
months/16,000 km (10,000 miles))
Fixed
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
U.S.A.
(severe
driving
conditions)
Air filter
R
Puerto Rico
*3
Fuel lines and hoses
R
R
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*3
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
Disc brakes
I
*4
I
I
I
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire (Rotation)
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
*5*6
Rear differential oil
*6
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
6–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Maintenance Interval
Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Engine oil flexible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated
mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
y
y
*2
*3
*4
*5
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving school car
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow fixed maintenance.
The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000 km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and filter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*6 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Canada residents
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Maintenance Interval
Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
Engine oil & filter
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
Fuel lines and hoses*2
I
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
Disc brakes
I
Tire (Rotation)*3
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*4*5
Rear differential oil
*5
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
6–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions) apply.
y
Repeated
short-distance driving
in dusty conditions
y
Driving with extended use of brakes
y
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
y
Driving on rough or muddy roads
y
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
y
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
y
Driving in extremely hot conditions
y
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
y
Driving
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
For maintenance guidelines beyond the kilometers/months listed, follow the maintenance
intervals provided in the Scheduled Maintenance Tables.
6–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
×1000 km
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
60
66
72
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & filter
I
I
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
I
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
*1
Engine coolant
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
R
R
R
*2
*2
R
R
Fuel lines and hoses
I
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
I*2
I*2
I
Fuel filter
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
Tire (Rotation)*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
I
I
*4*5
Rear differential oil
*5
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
I
I
I
I
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
6–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:52:10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
×1000 km
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
*1
Engine coolant
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
C
R
C
R
C
R
*2
Fuel lines and hoses
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
I*2
Fuel filter
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
Brake fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
Disc brakes
*3
I
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire (Rotation)
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
*4*5
Rear differential oil
*5
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
I
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
6–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
×1000 km
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
(Cont.)
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
×1000 km
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100 105 110 115 120
60
63
66
69
72
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
Engine oil & filter
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
Engine coolant*1
Engine coolant level
I
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
C
R
C
R
I*2
I
*2
I
I
Fuel filter
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
I
Brake fluid
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
Tire (Rotation)*3
R
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
*4*5
Rear differential oil
*5
Transfer oil
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
I
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
6–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
63
66
69
72
×1000 km
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100 105 110 115 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Monitor
Maintenance Monitor (Type A audio)
“Oil Change” with a flexible setting*1 is available. Consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer
when you want to change the setting*2. Once the system turns on, the wrench indicator light
in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when remaining oil life becomes less than 500
km (300 mile), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first).
Reset method
Press and hold the TRIP button with the ignition switched off, then switch it on. Keep
pressing the TRIP button for more than 5 seconds. The master warning light will flash for a
few seconds when the reset is completed.
*1 The flexible setting is available in the United States and Puerto Rico. Based on the
engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the
remaining oil life. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol® 0W-20 oil are required to
achieve optimum calculation performance.
*2 Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the system must be reset
whenever replacing the engine oil.
Maintenance Monitor (Type B audio)
1. Select the
icon on the home screen to display the “Applications” screen.
2. Select the “Maintenance” to display the maintenance list screen.
3. Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab
Maintenance
Item
Explanation
Setting
Notification can be switched on/off.
Time (months)
Displays the time or distance until maintenance is due.
Select this item to set the maintenance period.
“Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile, or the
remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes
first).
Distance (mile or km)
Reset
Resets the time and distance to the initial values.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever
carrying out maintenance.
6–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Tab
Item
Notification can be switched on/off.
Distance (mile or km)
Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.
Select this item to set the tire rotation distance.
“Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench
indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated
when the remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile.
Reset
Resets the remaining distance to the initial value.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating
the tires.
Setting
Oil replacement period can be selected from the flexible setting
or fixed setting, or it can be set to non-display.
The flexible setting is available only in the United States and
Puerto Rico. Once engine oil flexible maintenance is selected,
the vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine
operating conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the
instrument cluster. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol® 0W20 oil are required to achieve optimum performance.
Distance (mile or km)
(Displays only in fixed
setting)
Displays the distance until the oil replacement is due.
Select this item to set the oil replacement distance.
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile.
Tire Rotation
Oil Change
Explanation
Setting
Displays the engine oil life until the oil replacement is due.
Oil life (%)
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
(Displays only in flexible light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining oil life distance is less than 500 km (300 mile), or
setting)
remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first).
Reset
In flexible setting: Resets the remaining oil life to 100 %.
In fixed setting: Resets the remaining distance to the initial
value.
Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the
system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil.
6–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
When Refueling
y
Brake fluid level (page 6-31)
y
Engine coolant level (page 6-29)
y
Engine oil level (page 6-28)
y
Washer fluid level (page 6-31)
At Least Monthly
y
Tire inflation pressures (page 6-41)
At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical ability
and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
y
Engine
y
Engine
coolant (page 6-29)
oil (page 6-27)
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 6-2), several procedures can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If you
are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
6–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience
or the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You can be
seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could continue
running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment
temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do not
forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a fire
leading to an unexpected accident.
6–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:52:11
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and securely
locked is dangerous as it could fly open
while the vehicle is moving and block
the driver's vision which could result in
a serious accident.
Opening the Hood
NOTE
The lever is located a little to the left of
center when facing the vehicle.
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the support rod
hole indicated by the arrow to hold the
hood open.
Pad
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Clip
Clip
Release handle
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening,
slide the latch lever to the right, and lift
up the hood.
Lever
6–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:52:12
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Closing the Hood
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all filler caps are in place and all
loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers,
etc.) have been removed.
2. Lift the hood, grasp the padded area on
the support rod, and secure the support
rod in the clip. Verify that the support
rod is secured in the clip before closing
the hood.
Clip
Clip
Clip
3. Lower the hood slowly to a height of
about 20 cm (7.9 in) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
CAUTION
When closing the hood, do not push
it excessively such as by applying your
weight. Otherwise, the hood could be
deformed.
6–25
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
2014/12/09 10:52:12
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Brake fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Engine coolant reservoir
Fuse block
Battery
Cooling system cap
Engine oil-filler cap
6–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:52:12
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be
performed by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for
owner's responsibility in protecting your
investment.
Recommended Oil
U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico
Use SAE 0W-20 engine oil.
Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your
Mazda vehicle. Mazda Genuine 0W-20
Oil is required to achieve optimum fuel
economy.
Only use SAE 0W-20 oil “Certified For
Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee
(ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
–40 –30 –20 –10
–40 –20
0
20
0
10
40
20
60
30
40
80 100
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (U.S.A. only).
(ILSAC)
6–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:52:12
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Except U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine friction.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (Mexico only).
(Mexico)
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil. If SAE 5W-30
engine oil is not available, use SAE 5W-20
engine oil.
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
–40 –30 –20 –10
–40 –20
0
20
0
10
40
20
60
30
40
80 100
Inspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
(ILSAC)
Full
OK
Low
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
The level is normal if it is between
Low and Full.
If it is near or below Low, add enough
oil to bring the level to Full.
6–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:52:13
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not overfill the engine oil. This may
cause engine damage.
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Engine Coolant
Inspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become very
hot. You could be burned. Carefully
inspect the engine coolant in the
coolant reservoir, but do not open it.
Switch the ignition to off and make
sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:52:13
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year—at the beginning of the
winter season—and before traveling where
temperatures may drop below freezing.
CAUTION
¾Radiator coolant will damage paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
¾Use only soft (demineralized) water in
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
Cooling fan
the coolant mixture. Water that contains
minerals will cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
¾Do not add only water. Always add a
proper coolant mixture.
¾The engine has aluminum parts and
must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and
freezing.
¾DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
¾DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol with
the coolant. This could damage the
cooling system.
¾Do not use a solution that contains more
than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
¾If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near
If it is at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank
cap after adding coolant.
the cooling system cap, use of FL-22 is
recommended when replacing engine
coolant. Using engine coolant other
than FL-22 may cause serious damage to
the engine and cooling system.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:52:13
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Brake Fluid
Inspecting Brake Fluid Level
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low, have the
brakes inspected:
A low brake fluid level is dangerous.
A low level could indicate brake lining
wear or a brake system leak which
could cause the brakes to fail and lead
to an accident.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept between the
MAX and MIN lines.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake linings. If it
is excessively low, have the brake system
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Window Washer Fluid
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
affect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in temperatures
below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F)
using washer fluid without anti-freeze
protection is dangerous as it could
cause impaired windshield vision and
result in an accident. In cold weather,
always use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze
agents in washer fluid. A washer fluid with
limited VOC content should be used only
if it provides adequate freeze resistance
for all regions and climates in which the
vehicle will be operated.
6–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:52:13
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
E
Use plain water if washer fluid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
NOTE
Front and rear washer fluid is supplied
from the same reservoir.
6–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:52:14
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
¾Hot waxes applied by automatic car
washers have been known to affect the
wiper's ability to clean windows.
¾To prevent damage to the wiper blades,
do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or near
them.
¾When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object.
¾If the rain sensor is struck with a hand
or other object from inside the vehicle.
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, do not try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
blades when raising both the driver and
passenger side wiper arms, raise the
driver side wiper arm first. Conversely,
when setting down the wiper arms, set the
passenger side wiper arm down first.
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the clip and slide the blade
assembly in the direction of the arrow.
Be careful not to pinch hands or fingers
as it may cause injury, or damage the
wipers. When washing or servicing the
vehicle, make sure the wiper lever is in
the OFF position.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
6–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:52:14
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove it
from the arm.
CAUTION
¾Do not bend or discard the stiffeners. You
need to use them again.
¾If the metal stiffeners are switched,
the blade's wiping efficiency could be
reduced.
So do not use the driver's side metal
stiffeners on the passenger's side, or vice
versa.
¾Be sure to reinstall the metal stiffeners in
the new blade rubber so that the curve
is the same as it was in the old blade
rubber.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, do not
let it slap down on the windshield.
6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of blade holder.
Replacing Rear Window Wiper
Blade
5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the
blade is probably worn or cracked.
Replace it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
and other components, do not move
the wiper by hand.
6–34
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:52:14
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
1. Remove the cover.
4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of the blade holder.
2. Remove the stopper and raise the wiper
arm.
Stopper
3. Firmly rotate the wiper blade to the
right until it unlocks, then remove the
blade.
5. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
CAUTION
Do not bend or discard the stiffeners.
You need to use them again.
6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the rear window,
do not let the wiper arm fall on it.
6–35
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
2014/12/09 10:52:14
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes,
or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause serious
injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working
near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
6–36
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:52:15
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
NOTE
Before performing battery maintenance, remove the battery cover by pressing the tab.
Tab
6–37
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
2014/12/09 10:52:16
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery Maintenance
Key Battery Replacement
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not flash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
CAUTION
¾Make sure the battery is installed
To get the best service from a battery:
y
Keep
it securely mounted.
the top clean and dry.
y
Keep terminals and connections clean,
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or
terminal grease.
y
Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately
with a solution of water and baking
soda.
y
If the vehicle will not be used for an
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables and charge the battery every six
weeks.
y
Keep
Battery Replacement
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for a
battery replacement purchase.
correctly. Battery leakage could occur if it
is not installed correctly.
¾When replacing the battery, be careful
not to touch any of the internal circuitry
and electrical terminals, bend the
electrical terminals, or get dirt in the
transmitter as the transmitter could be
damaged.
¾There is the danger of explosion if the
battery is not correctly replaced.
¾Dispose of used batteries according to
the following instructions.
¾Insulate the plus and minus terminals
of the battery using cellophane or
equivalent tape.
¾Never disassemble.
¾Never throw the battery into fire or
water.
¾Never deform or crush.
¾Replace only with the same type battery
(CR2025 or equivalent).
6–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:52:16
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
y
The
KEY indicator light (green) flashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off.
y
The system does not operate and
the operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not flash when the
buttons are pressed.
y
The system's operational range is
reduced.
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the key. If replacing the battery
by yourself, follow the instruction below.
Replacing the key battery
1. Press the knob and pull out the
auxiliary key.
2. Twist a tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver in the direction of the
arrow and open the cover slightly.
Cover
3. Insert the tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver into the gap and slide it in
the direction of the arrow.
Cover
Knob
Gap
4. Twist the flathead screwdriver in the
direction of the arrow and remove the
cover.
Cover
6–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:52:16
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Remove the battery cap, then remove
the battery.
CAUTION
¾Be careful not to allow the rubber ring
shown in the figure to be scratched or
damaged.
¾If the rubber ring detaches, reattach it
before inserting a new battery.
Rubber ring
6. Insert a new battery with the positive
pole facing up, and then cover the
battery with the battery cap.
7. Close the cover.
8. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
6–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:52:16
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inflation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor braking;
leading to loss of control.
Except for the limited use of the
temporary spare tire, use only the
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,
bias-type) on all four wheels.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what
is specified for the vehicle (page 9-8)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance,
tire clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for the
vehicle.
Tire Inflation Pressure
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
Overinflation or underinflation of tires
is dangerous. Adverse handling or
unexpected tire failure could result in a
serious accident.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
Use only a Mazda-genuine tire valve
cap:
Use of a non-genuine part is
dangerous as the correct tire air
pressure cannot be maintained if the
tire valve becomes damaged. If the
vehicle is driven under this condition,
the tire air pressure will decrease which
could result in a serious accident. Do
not use any part for the tire valve cap
that is not a Mazda-genuine part.
Inspect all tire pressures monthly
(including the spare) when the tires are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures for
the best ride, handling, and minimum tire
wear.
Refer to the specification charts (page
9-8).
(With tire pressure monitoring system)
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-129.
6–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
yAlways check tire pressure when tires
are cold.
yWarm tires normally exceed
recommended pressures. Do not release
air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
yUnderinflation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire
wear, and poor sealing of the tire bead,
which will deform the wheel and cause
separation of tire from rim.
yOverinflation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,
have it inspected.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
Rotate tires periodically:
Irregular tire wear is dangerous. To
equalize tread wear for maintaining
good performance in handling and
braking, rotate the tires every 12,000
km (7,500 miles). However Mazda
recommends to rotate every 8,000 km
(5,000 miles) to help increase tire life
and distribute wear more evenly.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
y
Incorrect
tire pressure
wheel alignment
y
Out-of-balance wheel
y
Severe braking
y
Improper
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to
specification (page 9-8) and inspect the lug
nuts for tightness.
(With tire pressure monitoring system)
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-129.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to rear,
not from side to side. Tire performance
will be reduced if rotated from side to
side.
6–42
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
Replace all four tires at the same time:
Replacing just one tire is dangerous. It
could cause poor handling and poor
braking resulting in loss of vehicle
control. Mazda strongly recommends
that you replace all four tires at the
same time.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will
appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.
Temporary Spare Tire
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it is properly
inflated and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition
gradually deteriorates even if it has not
been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band
crosses the entire tread.
(With tire pressure monitoring system)
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-129.
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
6–43
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
¾Do not use your temporary spare tire
rim with a snow tire or a conventional
tire. Neither will properly fit and could
damage both tire and rim.
¾The temporary spare tire has a tread life
of less than 5,000 km (3,000 miles). The
tread life may be shorter depending on
driving conditions.
¾The temporary spare tire is for limited
use, however, if the tread wear solidband indicator appears, replace the tire
with the same type of temporary spare
(page 6-44).
Replacing a Wheel
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size on
your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
CAUTION
A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
affect:
¾Tire fit
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.
6–44
¾Wheel and bearing life
¾Ground clearance
¾Snow-chain clearance
¾Speedometer calibration
¾Headlight aim
¾Bumper height
¾Tire Pressure Monitoring System*
When replacing a wheel, make sure the
new one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset
(inset/outset).
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
With LED Headlights
With Halogen Headlights
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights
Side turn signal lights
Side turn signal lights
Front side-marker lights/
Parking lights
Front side-marker lights/
Parking lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Headlights (Low beam)
Fog lights
Front turn signal lights
Fog lights
Front turn signal lights
Headlights (High beam)
Headlights (High beam)/
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights/
Parking lights
Overhead lights (Rear)
Rear side-marker lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Rear turn signal lights
High-mount brake light
Luggage compartment light
License plate lights
Reverse lights
Taillights
Some models.
6–45
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands
and always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will
explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when lit.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb or
breaking it some other way.
Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Headlights (With LED headlights)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
Headlights/Daytime running lights
(With halogen headlights)
High-beams bulbs/Daytime running
lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your finger and pulling the
connector downward.
NOTE
yTo replace the bulb, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yIf the halogen bulb is accidentally
touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
yUse the protective cover and carton for
the replacement bulb to dispose of the
old bulb promptly and out of the reach
of children.
6–46
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:52:17
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Low-beam bulbs
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your finger and pulling the
connector downward.
Daytime running lights/Parking lights/
Front side-marker lights (With LED
headlights)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
6–47
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 47
2014/12/09 10:52:18
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Front side-marker lights/Parking lights
(With halogen headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Front turn signal lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
Fog lights*, Side turn signal lights*,
Brake lights/Taillights (With LED
headlights), Rear side-marker lights
(With LED headlights),Taillights (With
LED headlights), High-mount brake
light
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6–48
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 48
2014/12/09 10:52:18
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Rear turn signal lights, Brake lights/
Taillights (With halogen headlights),
Rear side-marker lights (With halogen
headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Turn the bolts counterclockwise and
remove them.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
3. Pull the unit rearward to remove it.
Rear side-marker lights
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6–49
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 49
2014/12/09 10:52:18
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Reverse lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
License plate lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6–50
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 50
2014/12/09 10:52:19
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights,
Overhead lights (Rear)
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver
with a soft cloth to prevent damage to
the lens, and then remove the lens by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
with the flathead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights
Overhead lights (Rear)
Edge
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Luggage compartment light
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver
with a soft cloth to prevent damage to
the lens and remove the lens unit by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
unit with the flathead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6–51
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 51
2014/12/09 10:52:19
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the
fuse puller provided on the fuse block
located in the engine compartment.
If any lights, accessories, or controls do
not work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is
blown.
Fuse Replacement
Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's left
side
If the electrical system does not work, first
inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left side.
Normal
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
Blown
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If
it does not fit tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or OUTLET circuit.
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with a genuine
Mazda fuse or equivalent of the same
rating. Otherwise you may damage
the electric system.
6. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
6–52
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 52
2014/12/09 10:52:20
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses
in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse and
multiplex slow blow fuse by yourself.
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform the replacement:
Replacing these fuses by yourself is
dangerous because they are high
current fuses. Incorrect replacement
could cause an electrical shock or a
short circuit resulting in a fire.
4. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Normal
Blown
6–53
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 53
2014/12/09 10:52:20
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1
C/U IG1
15 A
For protection of various circuits
2
ENGINE IG1
7.5 A
Engine control system
3
SUNROOF
10 A
Sunroof*
4
INTERIOR
15 A
Overhead light
7.5 A
Engine control system
Audio system
5
6
AUDIO2
15 A
7
METER1
10 A
Instrument cluster
8
SRS1
7.5 A
Air bag
9
METER2
7.5 A
Instrument cluster*
10
RADIO
7.5 A
Audio system
11
ENGINE3
15 A
Engine control system
12
ENGINE1
15 A
Engine control system
13
ENGINE2
15 A
Engine control system
14
AUDIO1
25 A
Audio system
15
A/C MAG
7.5 A
Air conditioner*
6–54
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 54
2014/12/09 10:52:20
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
16
AT PUMP
15 A
Transaxle control system*
17
AT
15 A
Transaxle control system*
18
D.LOCK
25 A
Power door locks
19
H/L RH
20 A
Headlight (RH)
7.5 A
Engine control system
Taillights, License plate lights, Parking lights
20
21
TAIL
20 A
22
—
—
23
ROOM
25 A
Overhead light
Fog lights*
—
24
FOG
15 A
25
H/CLEAN
20 A
26
STOP
10 A
Brake lights
27
HORN
15 A
Horn
28
H/L LH
20 A
Headlight (LH)
29
ABS/DSC S
30 A
ABS, Dynamic stability control system*
30
HAZARD
15 A
Hazard warning flashers, Turn signal lights
31
FUEL PUMP
15 A
Fuel system
32
FUEL WARM
25 A
33
WIPER
20 A
Front window wiper
50 A
For protection of various circuits
34
—
—
35
FAN2
30 A
—
36
FUEL PUMP
30 A
—
37
ABS/DSC M
50 A
ABS, Dynamic stability control system*
38
EVVT
20 A
Engine control system*
39
—
—
—
40
FAN1
30 A
—
41
FAN3
40 A
Cooling fan
42
ENG.MAIN
40 A
Engine control system
43
EPS
60 A
44
DEFOG
40 A
Rear window defogger
—
45
IG2
30 A
For protection of various circuits
46
INJECTOR
30 A
Engine control system
47
HEATER
40 A
Air conditioner
48
P.WINDOW1
30 A
Power windows
49
DCDC DE
40 A
—
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 55
6–55
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse block (Left side)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1
—
—
—
2
—
—
—
3
—
—
—
4
—
—
5
F.OUTLET
15 A
—
Accessory sockets
6
—
—
7
AT IND
7.5 A
AT shift indicator*
—
8
MIRROR
7.5 A
Power control mirror
9
—
—
10
P.WINDOW2
25 A
Power windows
Rear window wiper and washer
—
11
R.WIPER
15 A
12
—
—
13
—
—
—
14
SRS2/ESCL
15 A
—
15
SEAT WARM
20 A
Seat warmer*
16
M.DEF
7.5 A
Mirror defogger*
6–56
—
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 56
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent them.
Etching Caused by Acid Rain or
Industrial Fallout
Damage Caused by Bird Dropping,
Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
are not removed they can eat away the
clear and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
When insects stick to the paint surface and
decompose, corrosive compounds form.
These can erode the clear and color base
coat of the vehicle's paintwork if they are
not removed.
Occurrence
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the finish.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
permanently to the paint finish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you
suspect that acid rain has settled on your
vehicle's finish.
Bird droppings can be removed with a soft
sponge and water. If you are traveling and
these are not available, a moistened tissue
may also take care of the problem. The
cleaned area should be waxed according to
the instructions in this section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Prevention
It is necessary to have your Mazda washed
and waxed to preserve its finish according
to the instructions in this section. This
should be done as soon as possible.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
6–57
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 57
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Water Marks
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these minerals
settles on the vehicle and evaporates, the
minerals will concentrate and harden to
form white rings. The rings can damage
your vehicle's finish.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you find
water marks on your vehicle's finish.
Paint Chipping
NOTE
yThe paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
yIn low temperatures a vehicle's finish
hardens. This increases the chance of
paint chipping.
yChipped paint can lead to rust forming
on your Mazda. Before this happens,
repair the damage by using Mazda
touch-up paint according to the
instructions in this section. Failure to
repair the affected area could lead to
serious rusting and expensive repairs.
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances
of having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.
6–58
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 58
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Maintaining the Finish
Washing
CAUTION
¾When the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is
switched ON as fingers could be pinched
or the wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
¾Do not spray water in the engine
compartment. Otherwise, it could result
in engine-starting problems or damage
to electrical parts.
¾When washing and waxing the vehicle,
be careful not to apply excessive force to
any single area of the vehicle roof or the
antenna. Otherwise, you could dent the
vehicle or damage the antenna.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface when:
y
The
vehicle is washed without first
rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.
y
The vehicle is washed with a rough, dry,
or dirty cloth.
y
The vehicle is washed at a car wash that
uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff.
y
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
NOTE
yMazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
yScratches are more noticeable on
vehicles with darker paint finishes.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint finish:
y
Rinse
off any dirt or other foreign matter
using lukewarm or cold water before
washing.
y
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
y
Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
y
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
y
Do not use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
To help protect the finish from rust
and deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
6–59
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 59
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may damage the
protective coating; also, cleaners and
detergents may discolor or deteriorate
the paint.
Pay special attention to removing salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign material from the
underside of the fenders, and make sure
the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors and rocker panels are clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits
can damage the finish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow
soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
When using an automatic car wash
y
Retract the door mirrors.
y
The automatic car wash brushes could
reduce the paint lustre or hasten paint
deterioration.
When using a high water pressure car
wash
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of car wash
machine. If the car washer nozzle is
put too close to the vehicle, the force of
the spray could damage or deform the
molding, affect the sealability of parts,
and allow water to penetrate the interior.
Keep a sufficient space (30 cm (12 in) or
more) between the nozzle and the vehicle.
In addition, do not spend too much time
spraying the same area of the vehicle, and
be very careful when spraying between
gaps in doors and around windows.
Waxing
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the finish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
6–60
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 60
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and
similar materials will usually also take off
the wax. Rewax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not need it.
Repairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the finish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies anticorrosion materials to all parts, both
repaired and new. This will prevent
them from rusting.
Bright-Metal Maintenance
y
Use
tar remover to remove road tar and
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
y
To prevent corrosion on brightmetal surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
y
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating
and cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
6–61
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 61
2014/12/09 10:52:21
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Underbody Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and wheel
housings with lukewarm or cold water at
the end of each winter. Try also to do this
every month.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt.
It will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped there
will cause rusting.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
6–62
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance*
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
CAUTION
Do not use any detergent other than
mild detergent. Before using any
detergent, verify the ingredients.
Otherwise, the product could discolor
or stain the aluminum wheels.
NOTE
yDo not use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent
on aluminum wheels. They may damage
the coating.
yAlways use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse the wheels thoroughly with
lukewarm or cold water. Also, be sure
to clean the wheels after driving on
dusty or salted roads to help prevent
corrosion.
yAvoid washing your vehicle in an
automatic car wash that uses highspeed or hard brushes.
y(18-inch wheel vehicle)
If your aluminum wheels lose luster,
apply wax which contains no polishing
powder.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 62
2014/12/09 10:52:22
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Plastic Part Maintenance
cleaning the plastic lenses of the
lights, do not use gasoline, kerosene,
rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly
acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline
detergents. Otherwise, these chemical
agents can discolor or damage the
surfaces resulting in a significant loss
in functionality. If plastic parts become
inadvertently exposed to any of these
chemical agents, flush with water
immediately.
y
If plastic parts such as the bumpers
become inadvertently exposed to
chemical agents or fluids such as
gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery
fluid, it could cause discoloration,
staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any
such chemical agents or fluids using a
soft cloth immediately.
y
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of high pressure
car washer device. If the car washer
nozzle is put too close to the vehicle or
aimed at one area for an extended period
of time, it could deform plastic parts or
damage the paint.
y
Do not use wax containing compounds
(polish). Otherwise, it could result in
paint damage.
y
In addition, do not use an electrical or
air tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the
frictional heat generated could result
in deformation of plastic parts or paint
damage.
Interior Care
y
When
WARNING
Do not spray water in the cabin:
Splashing water on electrical parts
such as the audio unit and switches
is dangerous as it could cause a
malfunction or a fire.
Dashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They will damage and discolor
the dashboard. If these solutions get on the
dashboard, wipe them off immediately.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
Instrument panel top
y
When cleaning, it is recommended that
you use a clean towel dampened in a
mild detergent to remove soiling.
y
If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could
result in the surface being damaged
leaving white scratch marks.
6–63
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 63
2014/12/09 10:52:22
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
Leather*
Remove dust and sand first using a
vacuum cleaner or other means, then wipe
dirt off using a soft cloth with a leather
cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mild soap.
Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap
using a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth
and allow the leather to further dry in a
well-ventilated, shaded area. If the leather
gets wet such as from rain, also remove
moisture and dry it as soon as possible.
NOTE
yBecause genuine leather is a natural
material, its surface is not uniform and
it may have natural scars, scratches,
and wrinkles.
yTo maintain the quality for as long as
possible, periodical maintenance, about
twice a year, is recommended.
ySand and dust on the seat surface may
damage the overcoat of the genuine
leather surfaces and accelerate wear.
yGreasy soiling on genuine leather may
cause molding and stains.
yRubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth
may cause damage.
yDo not wipe the leather using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents
such as thinner, benzene, or gasoline.
Otherwise, it may cause discoloration
or stains.
6–64
yIf
the seats get wet, promptly remove
moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining
moisture on the surface may cause
deterioration such as hardening and
shrinkage.
yExposure to direct sunlight for long
periods may cause deterioration and
shrinkage. When parking the car under
direct sunlight for long periods, shade
the interior using sunshades.
yDo not leave vinyl products on the seats
for long periods as they may affect
the leather quality and coloring. If the
cabin temperature becomes hot, the
vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the
genuine leather.
Fabric and Synthetic Leather
Allowing the material to remain dirty
makes it hard to clean later and may cause
stains or discoloration. Clean as soon as
possible.
Fabric
1. Clean the soiled area by lightly dabbing
it with a soft cloth soaked in a mild
detergent (approx. 5%) diluted with
water.
2. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners
and procedures. Others may affect
appearance and fire-resistance.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 64
2014/12/09 10:52:22
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Synthetic leather
1. Remove dust and sand using a vacuum
cleaner.
2. Wipe the soiled area with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild detergent (approx.
5%) diluted in water.
3. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Panel
When the interior panels need to be
cleaned, use soft material such as a soft
cloth soaked in clean water and wrung
out well and lightly wipe off dirt from
the surface. If a panel requires further
cleaning, use the following procedure.
1. Wipe dirt off using a soft cloth soaked
in mild detergent (about 5% solution).
2. Wipe off any remaining detergent
using a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
NOTE
yDo not wipe leather parts using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents
such as thinner, benzene, or gasoline.
Otherwise, it may cause discoloration
or stains.
yScratches or nicks on the panels and
metallic trim resulting from the use
of a hard brush or cloth may not be
repairable.
yBe particularly careful when cleaning
high lustre panels and metallic trim as
they can be easily scratched.
Maintenance of the Active Driving
Display*
The combiner and mirror surface have a
special coating. When cleaning, do not use
a hard or rough-surface cloth, or cleaning
detergent. In addition, if a chemical
solvent gets on the active driving display,
wipe it off immediately. Otherwise, the
combiner and mirror could be damaged
and the surface coating could be scratched.
Use a fine, soft cloth such as those used
for cleaning eyeglasses.
Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Do not bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is no
remaining moisture before retracting them.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 65
6–65
2014/12/09 10:52:22
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Window Interiors
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the
container.
CAUTION
¾Do not scrape or scratch the inside of
the window glass. It could damage the
thermal filaments.
¾When washing the inside of the window
glass, use a soft cloth dampened in
lukewarm water, gently wiping the
thermal filaments.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the thermal filaments.
Cleaning the Floor Mats
Rubber floor mats should be cleaned with
mild soap and water only.
WARNING
Do not use rubber cleaners, such as tire
cleaner or tire shine, when cleaning
rubber floor mats:
Cleaning the rubber floor mats with
rubber cleaning products makes the
floor mats slippery.
This may cause an accident when
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal or when getting in or out of the
vehicle.
After removing the floor mats for cleaning,
always reinstall them securely.3-40
6–66
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 66
2014/12/09 10:52:22
7
If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Parking in an Emergency .................................................................. 7-2
Parking in an Emergency .............................................................. 7-2
Flat Tire............................................................................................... 7-3
Spare Tire and Tool Storage .......................................................... 7-3
Changing a Flat Tire...................................................................... 7-8
Battery Runs Out ............................................................................. 7-18
Jump-Starting .............................................................................. 7-18
Emergency Starting ......................................................................... 7-21
Starting a Flooded Engine ........................................................... 7-21
Push-Starting ............................................................................... 7-21
Overheating ...................................................................................... 7-22
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-22
Emergency Towing ........................................................................... 7-24
Towing Description ..................................................................... 7-24
Tiedown Hooks* .......................................................................... 7-25
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds........................... 7-27
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes...................................... 7-27
Message Indicated on Display* ................................................... 7-37
Warning Sound is Activated ........................................................ 7-39
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened .................................................. 7-44
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened............................................... 7-44
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate* .................................... 7-45
If the Active Driving Display does not operate .......................... 7-45
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
7–1
2014/12/09 10:52:22
If Trouble Arises
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and
all the turn signals will flash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster flash simultaneously.
NOTE
yThe turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
yCheck local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle
is being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:52:22
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
With sub-woofer
Type A
Tiedown eyelet
Flat tire belt
Jack
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack lever
Lug wrench
Type B
Tiedown eyelet
Jack
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack lever
Lug wrench
Some models.
7–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:52:23
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Without sub-woofer
Type A
Tiedown eyelet
Flat tire belt
Jack
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack lever
Lug wrench
Type B
Tiedown eyelet
Jack
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack lever
Lug wrench
Some models.
7–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:52:23
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Remove the cargo sub compartment.
Jack
To remove the jack
1. Lift up the luggage board.
2. Pull the luggage board outward a
little and insert the opposite end into
the holders so that the luggage board
stands.
Luggage board
5. Remove the cover.
Holders
3. Lift the luggage mat.
Luggage mat
Tabs
6. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
Wing bolt
Jack screw
7–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:52:23
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
To secure the jack
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing down and turn
the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily
tighten it.
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the figure.
Spare Tire
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
WARNING
Wing bolt
Jack screw
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to secure
the jack.
Do not install the temporary spare tire
on the front wheels (driving wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the front driving wheels is
dangerous. Handling will be affected.
You could lose control of the vehicle,
especially on ice or snow bound roads,
and have an accident. Move a regular
tire to the front wheel and install the
temporary spare tire to the rear.
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it
could rattle while driving. Make sure the
jack screw is sufficiently tightened.
4. Insert the cover tabs and install the
cover.
NOTE
Verify that the cover is securely installed.
Maintenance
y
Always keep the jack clean.
y
Make sure the moving parts are kept
free from dirt or rust.
y
Make sure the screw thread is
adequately lubricated.
7–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:52:23
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CAUTION
3. Lift the luggage mat.
¾When using the temporary spare tire,
driving stability may decrease compared
to when using only the conventional tire.
Drive carefully.
¾To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe the
following precautions:
Luggage mat
¾Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
¾Avoid driving over obstacles. Also, do
not drive through an automatic car
wash. This tire's diameter is smaller
than a conventional tire, so the
ground clearance is reduced about 20
mm (0.8 in).
¾Do not use a tire chain on this tire
because it will not fit properly.
¾Do not use your temporary spare
tire on any other vehicle, it has been
designed only for your Mazda.
¾Use only one temporary spare tire on
your vehicle at the same time.
To remove the spare tire
1. Lift up the luggage board.
2. Pull the luggage board outward a
little and insert the opposite end into
the holders so that the luggage board
stands.
Luggage board
4. For vehicles equipped with a subwoofer, uncouple the connector.
Connector
NOTE
Extra strength may be required to
uncouple the connector. Be sure to squeeze
the tab firmly.
Holders
7–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:52:24
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
5. For vehicles equipped with a subwoofer, loosen the hold-down bolt and
remove the woofer and spare tire.
Changing a Flat Tire
NOTE
If the following occurs while driving, it
could indicate a flat tire.
ySteering
becomes difficult.
vehicle begins to vibrate
excessively.
yThe vehicle pulls in one direction.
yThe
For vehicles not equipped with a subwoofer, turn the spare tire hold-down
bolt counterclockwise and remove the
spare tire.
Spare tire hold-down bolt
To secure the spare tire
Store the spare tire in the reverse order
of removal. After storing, verify that the
spare tire is stored securely.
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a
level spot that is well off the road and out
of the way of traffic to change the tire.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure someone.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in
a vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
1. Park on a level surface off the right-ofway and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift into Park (P) and turn off the
engine.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
7–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:52:24
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire
(page 7-3).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire. When blocking a wheel,
place a tire block both in front and
behind the tire.
NOTE
Force the end of the jack lever firmly
between wheel and cover, or removal will
be difficult.
CAUTION
Align the notch on the wheel cover
with the valve stem when installing it.
Notch
Tire valve
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood
blocks of sufficient size if possible to hold
the tire in place.
Removing a Flat Tire
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a
wheel cover, pry off the wheel cover
with the beveled end of the jack lever.
Damage could occur during
installation if the wheel cover is not
properly aligned.
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
3. Place the jack on the ground.
7–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:52:24
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the figure and adjust the jack
head so that it is close to the jack-up
position.
Jack head
6. Continue raising the jack head
gradually by rotating the screw with
your hand until the jack head is inserted
into the jack-up position.
Tire blocks
Jacking position
5. Place the jack under the jack-up
position closest to the tire being
changed with the jack head squarely
under the jack-up point.
Jacking position
7–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:52:25
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
7. Insert the jack lever and attach the lug
wrench to tire jack.
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle
in positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even kill
someone. Use only the front and rear
jacking positions recommended in this
manual.
Do not jack up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or place any objects on or
under the jack:
Jacking up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or placing objects on or
under the jack is dangerous as it could
deform the vehicle body or the vehicle
could fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is firmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
7–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:52:25
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
Do not jack up the vehicle higher than is
necessary:
Jacking up the vehicle higher than
is necessary is dangerous as it could
destabilize the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
Do not start the engine or shake the
vehicle while it is jacked up:
Starting the engine or shaking
the vehicle while it is jacked up is
dangerous as it could cause the vehicle
to fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
Never go under the vehicle while it is
jacked up:
Going under the vehicle while it is
jacked up is dangerous as it could
result in death or serious injury if the
vehicle were to fall off the jack.
Locking Lug Nuts*
If your vehicle has Mazda optional
antitheft wheel lug nuts, one on each
wheel will lock the tires and you must
use a special key to unlock them. This
key will attach to the lug wrench.
Register them with the lock manufacturer
by filling out the card provided in the
glove compartment and mailing it in the
accompanying envelope. If you lose this
key, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
or use the lock manufacturer's order form,
which is with the registration card.
Accessory wheel locks cannot be used on
steel wheels. This includes situations when
the spare tire is installed. If the spare tire
is installed, one of the original lug nuts
(which should still be in the vehicle) must
be installed in place of the wheel lock.
Antitheft lug nut
Special key
9. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise; then remove the
wheel and center cap.
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the special key for the antitheft
lug nut.
2. Place the special key on top of the
antitheft lug nut, and be sure to hold
the key square to it. If you hold the key
at an angle, you may damage both key
and nut. Do not use a power impact
wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
7–12
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:52:25
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
To install the antitheft lug nut
1. Place the special key on top of the nut,
and be sure to hold the key square to
it. If you hold the key at an angle, you
may damage both key and nut. Do not
use a power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the
special key, apply pressure, and turn it
clockwise.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108—147
(12—14, 80—108)
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
2. Mount the spare tire.
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
Mounting the Spare Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the
lug nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts could
loosen while driving and cause the tire
to come off, resulting in an accident.
In addition, lug nuts and bolts could
be damaged if tightened more than
necessary.
7–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:52:25
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle.
5. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts
in the order shown.
If you are unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the stud,
which could cause the wheel to slip off
and cause an accident.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108—147
(12—14, 80—108)
7–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:52:26
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
6. Remove the luggage compartment
cover (if equipped).
Refer to Luggage Compartment on
page 3-21.
8. Pull the luggage board outward and
place it on top of the luggage mat.
NOTE
The luggage board rests at an angle on
vehicles with a sub-woofer.
Luggage board
Strap
Luggage mat
Pin
Luggage mat
Pin
7. Remove the belt for securing the flat
tire.
Luggage board
9. Remove the center cap by tapping it
with the lug wrench.
7–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:52:26
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
10.Thread the belt through the rear seat as
shown in the figure.
12.Thread the buckle through the wheel as
shown in the figure.
13.Thread the belt through the buckle
while pressing the tire to the seatback.
11. Place the flat tire in the luggage
compartment.
14.Pull the belt end to secure the flat tire.
7–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:52:26
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
15.Insert the luggage compartment
cover from the top of the luggage
compartment opening with the cloth
side of the cover facing outward,
and slide it between the flat tire and
the inside perimeter of the luggage
compartment opening.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
When you check the regular tires' air
pressure, check the spare tire, too.
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling,
store them properly.
16.Check the tire inflation pressure.
Refer to the specification charts on
page 9-8.
17.Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.
NOTE
(With tire pressure monitoring system)
Do not press the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch after installing the spare
tire. The switch is only to be pressed after
installing the repaired flat tire or installing
a replacement tire (page 4-24).
7–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:52:26
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a battery, do
not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery.
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may rupture
or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous. The
cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
7–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in series or a
24 V motor generator set).
Jumper cables
Booster battery
Discharged battery
7–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
1. Remove the battery cover.
7. If the battery cover has been removed,
install it in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE
Verify that the covers are securely
installed.
2. Make sure the booster battery is 12
V and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
3. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow both vehicles
to touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and
all unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
y Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2).
y Connect one end of the other cable to
the negative terminal of the booster
battery (3).
y Connect the other end to the ground
point indicated in the illustration away
from the discharged battery (4).
y
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
the illustration.
7–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
Push-Starting
If the engine fails to start, it may be
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Do not push-start your Mazda.
Follow this procedure:
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be injured.
1. If the engine does not start within
five seconds on the first try, wait ten
seconds and try again.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
4. Depress the brake pedal, then press the
push button start. If the engine starts,
release the accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
5. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator.
WARNING
NOTE
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transaxle by pushing it.
If the engine still does not start using
the above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
Overheating
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates, the vehicle loses
power, or you hear a loud knocking or
pinging noise, the engine is probably too
hot.
WARNING
Switch the ignition to off and make
sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from the engine compartment.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
CAUTION
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the engine
temperature will increase. Stop the
engine and call an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it is low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
7–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
If you find a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
Cooling fan
If you find no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
6-29).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling
system inspected. The engine could be
seriously damaged unless repairs are
made. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle. Particularly
when towing a AWD vehicle, where all
the wheels are connected to the drive
train, proper transporting of the vehicle is
absolutely essential to avoid damaging the
drive system. Government and local laws
must be followed.
WARNING
Always tow a AWD vehicle with all four
wheels off the ground:
Towing a AWD vehicle with either the
front or rear wheels on the ground is
dangerous as the drive train could be
damaged, or the vehicle could trail
away from the tow truck and cause
an accident. If the drive train has been
damaged, transport the vehicle on a
flat bed truck.
Wheel dollies
A towed 2WD vehicle should have its
drive wheels (front wheels) off the ground.
If excessive damage or other conditions
prevent this, use wheel dollies.
When towing a 2WD vehicle with the rear
wheels on the ground, release the parking
brake.
A towed AWD vehicle must have all its
wheels off the ground.
7–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:52:27
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
CAUTION
¾Do not tow the vehicle pointed
backward with driving wheels on the
ground. This may cause internal damage
to the transaxle.
Tiedown Hooks*
CAUTION
Do not use the front tiedown eyelet for
towing the vehicle.
They have been designed only for
securing the vehicle to a transport
vessel during shipping.
Using the eyelet for any other purpose
could result in the vehicle being
damaged.
Tiedown Hook-Front
¾Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug
wrench from the luggage compartment
(page 7-3).
2. Wrap a jack lever or similar tool with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to a
painted bumper, and open the cap
located on the front bumper.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the painted
bumper surface.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
7–25
2014/12/09 10:52:28
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
NOTE
Remove the cap completely and store it so
as not to lose it.
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Tiedown Hook-Rear
The hook positioned under the rear
bumper on the right side is for tying down
the vehicle during transport, and it cannot
be used for towing other vehicles.
It can be used as a towing hook only when
the vehicle must be towed by another
vehicle in an emergency case such as when
the vehicle is stuck in snow, however, it
may damage the bumper.
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
CAUTION
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when tying the
vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown
eyelet is securely tightened to the
bumper.
Tiedown hook
CAUTION
When using the hook in such
emergency cases, observe the
following so as not to damage the
tiedown hook or the vehicle body.
¾The vehicle must be pulled straight to
the rear so that no load is applied to the
vehicle in the lateral direction.
¾The bumper may be damaged if the tie
down hook is used as a towing hook.
¾When using a metal chain or wire cable,
wrap a cloth around the attachment
area. If the metal chain or wire cable
contacts the bumper directly, the
bumper could be scratched or damaged.
7–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:52:28
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes
If any warning light turns on/flashes, take appropriate action for each light. There is no
problem if the light turns off, however if the light does not turn off or turns on/flashes again,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Vehicles with type B audio)
The warning contents can be verified on the audio.
icon on the home screen to display the applications screen.
1. Select the
2. Select the “Warning Guidance”.
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If any of the following warning lights turns on, the system may have a malfunction. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Signal
Warning
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning/Warning light inspection
The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to
START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is
released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system.
Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates
that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully
released, have the brakes inspected immediately.
CAUTION
In addition, the effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to
depress the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.
7–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:52:28
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components
are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning
light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the
electronic brake force distribution system.
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution System
Warning
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated.
Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes
inspected as soon as possible:
Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are
illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an
emergency stop than under normal circumstances.
If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated
because the engine could stop unexpectedly.
This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:
Engine Oil Warning
Light
1.Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.
2.Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
3.Inspect the engine oil level 6-28. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil
while being careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
4.Start the engine and check the warning light.
If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil,
stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:52:28
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and
illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further.
(Red)
High Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
Handling Procedure
Flashing light
Drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle
and wait for the engine to cool down.
Illuminated light
This indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place
immediately and stop the engine.
Refer to Overheating 7-22.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light
illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.
The light illuminates/flashes if the electric power steering has a malfunction.
If the light illuminates/flashes, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the
steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if the light illuminates/flashes continuously.
NOTE
Power Steering
Malfunction Indicator
Light
yIf
the indicator light illuminates/flashes, the power steering will not operate normally.
If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may
feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.
yRepeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If
this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return
to normal.
Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected
If any of the following warning lights turns on/flashes, the system may have a malfunction.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected.
Signal
Master Warning
Light
Warning
(Vehicles with type B audio)
The light turns on when the system has a malfunction.
Operate the center display and verify the content.
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on page 7-27.
(Vehicles without type B audio)
The light illuminates continuously if any one of the following occurs. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yThere
yThere
is a malfunction in the battery management system.
is a malfunction in the brake switch.
7–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:52:30
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, the ABS control unit has detected a
system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had
no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
ABS Warning Light y
When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
yThe brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to
note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in the following cases:
yThe fuel tank level being very low or approaching empty.
Check Engine Light yThe engine's electrical system has a problem.
yThe emission control system has a problem.
yThe fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely.
If the check engine light remains on, or it flashes continuously , do not drive at high speeds
and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
The light illuminates when the transaxle has a problem.
CAUTION
Automatic
Transaxle Warning
Light
If the automatic transaxle warning light illuminates, the transaxle has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause damage to your
transaxle. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
When the light is turned on
If the AWD warning light illuminates, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yIlluminates
yIlluminates
AWD Warning
Light*
when there is an abnormality with the AWD system.
if there is too much difference in tire radius between the front and rear wheels.
When the light is flashing
Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a few moments, if the warning light stops flashing,
you can resume driving. If the light does not stop flashing, contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
yFlashes
yFlashes
when the differential oil temperature is abnormally high.
when there is a continuous large difference between front and rear wheel rotation,
such as when trying to pull away from an icy surface or when trying to remove the vehicle
from mud, sand or similar conditions.
7–30
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:52:30
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly
illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is switched ON. If any of these
occur, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate
in an accident.
Air Bag/Front Seat
Belt Pretensioner
System Warning
Light
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner
could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.
If the tire pressure monitoring system has a malfunction, the tire pressure warning
light flashes for about 1 minute when the ignition is switched ON and then continues
illuminating. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire
pressure warning beep sound is heard, decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid
sudden maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire
(Flashing)
pressure warning beep sound is heard, it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
Tire Pressure
speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen
Monitoring System
*
and result in an accident.
Warning Light
To determine if you have a slow leak or a flat, pull over to a safe position where you can
check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed
to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous, even if you know why it is illuminated.
Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more
serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident.
If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously.
CAUTION
(Red)
(Illuminate)
KEY Warning Light
If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, the engine may not start. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it
using the emergency operation for starting the engine, and have the vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4-9.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
7–31
2014/12/09 10:52:31
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
yThe
warning light remains turned on if there is a problem with the system. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yThe LDWS does not operate when the warning light illuminates.
CAUTION
¾
A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions. Have your
(Illuminate)
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Warning
Light*
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾When the light remains turned on while driving the vehicle.
When the system is canceled automatically, the light turns on. Normally, the system
restores automatically and the light turns off, however, if the light remains turned on,
there may be a problem with the system.
¾The light does not illuminate when the ignition is switched ON.
¾
Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same manufacture,
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with significantly different wear
patterns on the same vehicle. If such improper tires are used, the LDWS may not operate
normally.
¾When an emergency spare tire is used, the system may not operate normally.
The light remains turned on if there is a problem with the system. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Amber)
NOTE
High Beam Control
If the windshield area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is fogged or
System (HBC)
obstructed, the light turns on temporarily. If the light remains turned on, there may be a
Warning Light*
problem with the system.
LED Headlight
Warning Light*
(Amber)
Mazda Radar
Cruise Control
(MRCC) Warning
Light*
This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The warning light turns on if there is a malfunction in the system while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is on.
Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions.
Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM)
OFF Indicator
Light*
7–32
yThe light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON.
yThe light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring
yIt turns on while driving the vehicle.
(BSM) switch is operated.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors
can detect, the system may pause (The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:52:32
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Taking Action
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal
Warning
Action to be taken
The light turns on when the remaining fuel is
about 9.0 L (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp gal).
Add fuel.
Low Fuel Warning NOTE
The light illumination timing may vary because
Light
fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according
to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture.
Check Fuel Cap
Warning Light
If the check fuel cap warning light illuminates
while driving, the fuel-filler cap may not be
installed properly.
Stop the engine and reinstall the fuelfiller cap.
Refer to Fuel-Filler Cap on page 3-26
7–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:52:33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
Action to be taken
Except Mexico
The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver
or front passenger's seat is occupied and the seat
belt is not fastened with the ignition switched
ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt is
unfastened (only when the front passenger's seat
is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed
faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light flashes. After a short time, the warning
light stops flashing, but remains illuminated.
NOTE
yThe
warning light flashes for about 6 seconds
if the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition is switched ON.
yTo allow the front passenger occupant
classification sensor to function properly, do
not place and sit on an additional seat cushion
on the front passenger's seat. The sensor may
not function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
Seat Belt Warning
Light
Mexico
The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver Fasten the seat belts.
or front passenger's seat is occupied and the seat
belt is not fastened with the ignition switched
ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt is
unfastened (only when the front passenger's seat
is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed
faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light flashes. After a short time, the warning
light stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If
a seat belt remains unfastened, the warning light
flashes again for a given period of time.
NOTE
yPlacing
heavy items on the front passenger's
seat may cause the front passenger's seat belt
warning function to operate depending on the
weight of the item.
yTo allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place and
sit on an additional seat cushion on the front
passenger's seat. The sensor may not function
properly because the additional seat cushion
could cause sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
7–34
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:52:33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
Action to be taken
The light turns on if any door is not closed
securely.
Close the door securely.
This warning light indicates that little washer
fluid remains.
Add washer fluid (page 6-31).
Door-Ajar Warning
Light
Low Washer Fluid
Level Warning
Light*
Inspect the tires and adjust to the
specified inflation pressure (page 6-41).
NOTE
When the warning light illuminates, and the
warning beep sound is heard (about 3 seconds),
tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.
yPerform
tire pressure adjustment when
the tires are cold. Tire pressure will
vary according to the tire temperature,
therefore let the vehicle stand for 1
hour or only drive it 1.6 km (1 mile) or
less before adjusting the tire pressures.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
When pressure is adjusted on hot tires
warning light illuminates or flashes, or the
to the cold inflation pressure, the TPMS
tire pressure warning beep sound is heard,
warning light/beep may turn on after
decrease vehicle speed immediately and
the tires cool and pressure drops below
avoid sudden maneuvering and braking:
specification.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning
warning light illuminates or flashes, or the
light, resulting from the tire air
tire pressure warning beep sound is heard,
pressure dropping due to cold ambient
it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
temperature will remain illuminated
speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering
even if the ambient temperature rises.
(Illuminate)
or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen
In this case, it will also be necessary
Tire Pressure
and result in an accident.
to adjust the tire air pressures. If the
Monitoring System
To
determine
if
you
have
a
slow
leak
or
a
TPMS warning light illuminates due to
Warning Light*
flat, pull over to a safe position where you
a drop in tire air pressure, make sure to
can check the visual condition of the tire
check and adjust the tire air pressures.
and determine if you have enough air to
proceed to a place where air may be added yTires lose air naturally over time and
the TPMS cannot tell if the tires are
and the system monitored again by an
getting too soft over time or you have
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire repair
a flat. However, when you find one low
station.
tire in a set of four-that is an indication
of trouble; you should have someone
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
drive the vehicle slowly forward so
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
you can inspect any low tire for cuts
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken care of and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops
as soon as possible before it develops into
of water in the valve stem to see if it
a more serious situation that could lead to
bubbles indicating a bad valve. Leaks
tire failure and a dangerous accident.
need to be addressed by more than
simply reinflating the tire as leaks are
dangerous — take it to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
7–35
2014/12/09 10:52:33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
(Amber)
The light turns on if the windshield or the radar
Smart Brake
sensor are dirty, or there is a malfunction in the
Support/Smart
City Brake Support system.
(SBS/SCBS)
Warning Light*
Action to be taken
(Vehicles with type B audio)
Verify the reason why the warning light
is illuminated on the center display (page
7-27).
If the reason why the warning light is
illuminated is due to a dirty windshield,
clean the windshield.
If the warning light is illuminated
because of a dirty radar sensor, clean the
front emblem.
For any other reasons, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Vehicles without type B audio)
If the reason why the warning light is
illuminated is due to a dirty windshield,
clean the windshield. For any other
reasons, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
KEY Warning Light
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal
Cause
The advanced key battery is dead.
The advanced key is not within the
operation range.
(Red)
(Flashing)
7–36
The advanced key is placed in areas inside
the cabin where it is difficult for the key to
be detected.
Action to be taken
Replace the key battery (page 6-38).
Bring the advanced key into the operation
range (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer similar to
the advanced key is in the operation range.
Take the key from another manufacturer
similar to the advanced key out of the
operation range.
Without the ignition switched off, the
advanced key is taken out of the cabin, and
then all the doors are closed.
Bring the advanced key back into the
cabin.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:52:33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Message Indicated on Display*
If a message is displayed in the center display (Type B audio), take appropriate action (in a
calm manner) according to the displayed message.
(Display example)
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If the following messages are displayed in the center display (Type B audio), a vehicle
system may be malfunctioning. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Display
Indicated Condition
Displays if the engine coolant temperature has
increased excessively.
Displays if the charging system has a malfunction.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
7–37
2014/12/09 10:52:33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Verify Display Content
Displays in the following cases:
Display
Indicated Condition/Action to be taken
The following message is displayed when the
temperature around the center display is high.
Lowering the temperature in the cabin or the
temperature around the center display by avoiding
direct sunlight is recommended.
7–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:52:34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Warning Sound is
Activated
Lights-On Reminder
The lights-on reminder is operable when
the time setting*1 of the auto headlight off
function is off.
If lights are on and the ignition is switched
to ACC or the ignition is switched off, a
continuous beep sound will be heard when
the driver's door is opened.
*1 If the light switch is left on, the auto
headlight off function automatically
turns off the lights about 30 seconds
after switching the ignition off. The
time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC,
the “Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep” (page 7-40) overrides
the lights-on reminder.
yA personalized function is available to
change the sound volume for the lightson reminder.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning
Beep
If there is a problem with the air bag/seat
belt pretensioner systems and the warning
light illumination, a warning beep sound
will be heard for about 5 seconds every
minute.
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner
system warning beep sound will continue
to be heard for approximately 35
minutes. Have your vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the air
bag/seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding:
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/
seat belt pretensioner system warning
beep sounding is dangerous. In a
collision, the air bags and the seat belt
pretensioner system will not deploy
and this could result in death or serious
injury. Contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer to have the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible.
7–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:52:34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Seat Belt Warning Beep
Except Mexico
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched ON, a beep
sound will be heard for about 6 seconds. If
the driver or the front passenger's seat belt
is not fastened and the vehicle is driven
at a speed faster than about 20 km/h (12
mph), a beep sound will be heard again for
a specified period of time.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 km/h (12 mph).
NOTE
yTo allow the front passenger occupant
classification sensor to function
properly, do not place and sit on an
additional seat cushion on the front
passenger's seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may
not operate.
NOTE
yPlacing heavy items on the front
passenger's seat may cause the front
passenger's seat belt warning function
to operate depending on the weight of
the item.
yTo allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on
the front passenger's seat. The sensor
may not function properly because the
additional seat cushion could cause
sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may
not operate.
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
If the driver's door is opened while
the ignition is switched to ACC, a
continuous beep sound will be heard to
notify the driver that the ignition has not
been switched off (STOP). Left in this
condition, the keyless entry system will
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and
the battery power will be depleted.
Mexico
If the vehicle speed exceeds about 20
km/h (12 mph) with the driver or front
passenger's seat belt unfastened, a warning
beep sounds continuously. If the seat belt
remains unfastened, the beep sound stops
once and then continues for about 90
seconds. The beep stops after the driver or
front passenger's seat belt is fastened.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 km/h (12 mph).
7–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:52:34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep
A beep sound will be heard 6 times and
the KEY warning light (red) will flash
continuously if the ignition has not been
switched off, all the doors are closed, and
the key is removed from the vehicle. This
is to notify the driver that the key has been
removed from the vehicle and the ignition
has not been switched off.
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity
radio waves, the Key Removed From
Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is
carried together with a metal object or it
is placed in a poor signal reception area.
Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the request switch is pressed with a door
open or ajar or the ignition has not been
switched off while the key is being carried,
a beep will be heard for about 2 seconds
to indicate that the doors and the liftgate
cannot be locked.
Key Left-in-luggage Compartment
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the key is left in the luggage
compartment with all doors locked
and the liftgate closed, a beep sound is
heard for about 10 seconds to remind
the driver the key has been left in the
luggage compartment. If this happens,
open the liftgate by pressing the electric
liftgate opener and remove the key. A key
removed from the luggage compartment
may not function because its functions
may have been temporarily suspended.
To restore the key function, perform the
applicable procedure (page 3-7).
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
(With the advanced keyless
function)
If a key is left in the vehicle cabin and all
the doors and the luggage compartment
are locked using a separate key, a beep
sound is heard for about 10 seconds to
remind the driver that the key has been
left in the vehicle cabin. If this happens,
open the door and remove the key. A key
removed from the vehicle this way may
not function because its functions may
have been temporarily suspended. Perform
the applicable procedure to restore the
functions of the key (page 3-7).
Tire Inflation Pressure Warning
Beep*
The warning beep sound will be heard
for about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire inflation pressures
(page 4-126).
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
7–41
2014/12/09 10:52:34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System Warning Beep*
Driving forward
The warning beep operates when the turn
signal lever is operated to the side where
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
light is illuminated.
NOTE
A personalized function is available to
change the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning beep sound volume.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Reversing
If a moving object such as a vehicle or
two-wheeled vehicle approaches on the
left or right from behind your vehicle, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
sound is activated.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Warning Sound*
While the system is operating, if the
system determines that the vehicle may
depart from the lane, it sounds a warning
sound.
NOTE
yThe volume of the LDWS warning sound
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yThe type of the LDWS warning sound
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
7–42
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) System Warnings*
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system warnings notify the driver of
system malfunctions and cautions on use
when required.
Check based on the beep sound.
Cautions
What to check
The beep sounds 1 time
while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating
The vehicle speed is
slower than 25 km/h (16
mph) and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system has
been canceled.
The beep sounds
continuously while
driving
The distance between
your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is too
close. Verify the safety
of the surrounding area
and reduce vehicle
speed.
When the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating, the beep
sounds and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) warning
light (amber) in the
instrument cluster turns
on.
A malfunction in
the system may be
indicated. Have your
vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Collision warning*
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated in
the display.
Power Steering Warning Buzzer
If the power steering system has
a malfunction, the power steering
malfunction light turns on or flashes and
the buzzer operates at the same time.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-24.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:52:34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Over Rev. Buzzer*
The buzzer sounds to notify the driver if
the engine speed is about to exceed the
permissible engine speed.
CAUTION
Operate the accelerator and shift gears
according to the driving conditions so
that the buzzer does not sound. If the
engine speed exceeds the permissible
engine speed, the engine could be
damaged.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
7–43
2014/12/09 10:52:35
If Trouble Arises
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened
When Liftgate Cannot be
Opened
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and
the liftgate cannot be opened, perform
the following procedure as an emergency
measure to open it:
4. Using a flathead screwdriver, turn the
lever to the right to unlock the liftgate.
Lever
1. Fold down the rear seatbacks.
Refer to Split/One-piece Folding the
Seatback on page 2-6.
2. Remove cover on the interior surface of
the liftgate using a flathead screwdriver.
Cover
After performing this emergency
measure, have the vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
3. Using a flathead screwdriver, open the
inner cover.
7–44
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:52:35
If Trouble Arises
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate*
If the Active Driving
Display does not operate
If the active driving display does not
operate, switch the ignition off and then
restart the engine. If the active driving
display does not operate even with
the engine restarted, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
7–45
2014/12/09 10:52:35
MEMO
7–46
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:52:35
8
Customer Information and Reporting
Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on
equipment.
Customer Assistance ...........................8-2
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ........8-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........8-6
Customer Assistance
(Puerto Rico) ..................................8-9
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ......8-10
Mazda Importer/Distributors ..........8-12
Importer/Distributor .....................8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ..................8-13
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) ........................................8-13
Reporting Safety Defects
(Canada) .......................................8-14
Warranty............................................8-15
Warranties for Your Mazda ..........8-15
Outside the United States/
Canada..........................................8-16
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country (Except United States and
Canada) ........................................8-17
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ..................................8-18
Recording of Vehicle Data ................8-21
Recording of Vehicle Data ...........8-21
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ............................................8-22
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS)......................................8-22
Tire Information (U.S.A.) .................8-24
Tire Labeling ................................8-24
Location of the Tire Label
(Placard) .......................................8-30
Tire Maintenance .........................8-33
Vehicle Loading ...........................8-36
Steps for Determining the Correct
Load Limit ...................................8-42
Declaration of Conformity ...............8-43
Declaration of Conformity ...........8-43
Service Publications ..........................8-49
Service Publications .....................8-49
Cell Phones ........................................8-19
Cell Phones Warning ....................8-19
Event Data Recorder ........................8-20
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and
Canada) ........................................8-20
8–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:52:35
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
STEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
y
If
your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
y
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP 2.
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda North American
Operations by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.MazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.MazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
8–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:52:35
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
STEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may
not be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered,
Mazda North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies
under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the extent
permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to BBB
AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon Law”. If
you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO LINE.
8–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:52:35
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda unless you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
California Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration Certification
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage,
the approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal hearing.
The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the time your
complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact Mazda about
your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an inspection/report
by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by BBB AUTO LINE.
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
8–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:52:35
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative
is unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the following
occurs:
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that substantially
impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the nonconformity has
been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents AND the buyer or lessee
has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the nonconformity; OR
y The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda
or its agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
y The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the vehicle
to the buyer.
y
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
10.You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and any
findings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we receive
notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12.Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
8–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
Satisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition.
In our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your dealer.
If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal dealership
procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc. Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address
and phone numbers are shown (page 8-8).
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 2634680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page
of section 9 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
8–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer Satisfaction
Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still not resolved,
you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your
concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding
arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal.
There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award
is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to
use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan Office at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
8–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory
CAMVAP Number
British Columbia & Yukon Territories
1 (800) 207-0685
Alberta & Northwest Territories
1 (800) 207-0685
Saskatchewan
1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba
1 (800) 207-0685
Ontario
1 (800) 207-0685
Atlantic Canada
1 (800) 207-0685
Quebec
1 (800) 207-0685
Regional Offices
REGIONAL OFFICES
COVERING AREAS
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
5011 275 STREET
LANGLEY, BRITISH COLUMBIA
V4W 0A8
(778) 369-2100
1 (800) 663-0908
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
1 (800) 263-4680
ONTARIO,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANSCANADIENNE
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
(514) 694-6390
QUEBEC
8–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized Mazda
Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
y
If
your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
y
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical condition in
accordance with a certified physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoid
the potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party is
hired by the customer to make any modifications to this system.
Log on: at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
By phone at: 01 800 01 MAZDA (62932)
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani #150, PB Col. Lomas de Santa Fe
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300
Del. Cuajimalpa de Morelos
Tel: Customer Assistance
01 800 01 MAZDA(62932).
8–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
U.S.A.
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
CANADA
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
SAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
International Automotive Distributor
Group, LLC. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 191850, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00919-1850
TEL: (787) 641-1777
MEXICO
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani # 150, PB Col. Lomas de
Santa Fe Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300 Del.
Cuajimalpa
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico
GUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
8–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC, 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be
forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
or
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Experience Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page
8-12) in this booklet.
8–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
8–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
y
New
Vehicle Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty
y
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
y
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
y
Federal Emission Control Warranty/California Emission Control Warranty
y
Powertrain
y
y
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
y
Emission
Control Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
y
Tire Warranty
y
Replacement
NOTE
Warranty information varies depending on the country. Refer to the Warranty Booklet for
detailed warranty information.
8–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States/Canada
Government regulations in the United States/Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States/Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States/Canada.
United States
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles built
for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specific vehicle
modifications to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Canada
However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles
built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States with specific
vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers
on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States/Canada:
y
Recommended
fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
y
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
8–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:52:36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except
United States and Canada)
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country may be problematic depending on whether it
meets the specific emission and safety standards of the country in which the vehicle will be
driven. Consequently, your vehicle may require modifications at personal expense in order
to meet the regulations.
In addition, you should be aware of the following issues:
Satisfactory vehicle servicing may be difficult or impossible in another country.
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
8–17
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 17
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle's
performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you install
any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance
or safety systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of
injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile
telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper
installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, airbag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
8–18
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 18
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your country:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing
a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these
devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a
passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use.
If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least
leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices
while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
8–19
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 19
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Event Data Recorder
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and Canada)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
y
How
various systems in your vehicle were operating;
or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
y
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
y
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
y
Whether
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near crash-like situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Mazda will not disclose any of the data recorded in an EDR to a third party unless:
y
A written
agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is obtained
requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities
y
Used as a defense for Mazda in a law suit, claim, or arbitration
y
Ordered by a judge or court
y
Officially
However, if necessary Mazda will:
y
Use
the data for research on Mazda vehicle performance, including safety.
the data or the summarized data to a third party for research purposes without
disclosing vehicle or owner identification information.
y
Disclose
8–20
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 20
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Recording of Vehicle Data
Recording of Vehicle Data
This vehicle is equipped with a computer which records the following main vehicle data
related to vehicle controls, operation, and other driving conditions.
Recorded data
y
Vehicle conditions such as engine speed and vehicle speed
y
Driving operation conditions such as accelerator and brake pedals, and information related
to the environmental circumstances while the vehicle is driven
y
Malfunction diagnosis information from each on-vehicle computer
y
Information related to controls of other on-vehicle computers
NOTE
The recorded data may vary depending on the vehicle grade and optional equipment. Voice
and images are not recorded.
Data handling
Mazda and its subcontracting parties may obtain and use the recorded data for vehicle
malfunction diagnosis, research and development, and quality improvement.
Mazda will not disclose or provide any of the obtained data to a third party unless:
y
An
agreement from the vehicle owner (agreements from lessor and lessee for leased
vehicle) is obtained
y
Officially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities
y
For statistical processing by a research institution after processing the data so that
identification of the owner or the vehicle is impossible
8–21
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 21
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and temperature
performance.
Tread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests
and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
8–22
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 22
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND TO
ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
UTQGS MARK (example)
8–23
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 23
2014/12/09 10:52:37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of
a recall.
Information on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Run-flat tire
7. Rim diameter code
8. Load index & speed symbol
9. Severe snow conditions
10.Tire ply composition and materials used
11. Max. load rating
12.Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
8–24
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 24
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
13.Max. permissible inflation pressure
14.SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
8–25
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 25
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
Q
99 mph
R
106 mph
S
112 mph
T
118 mph
U
124 mph
H
130 mph
V
149 mph
W
168* mph
Y
186* mph
*
For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes
use the letters ZR. For tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
M S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in mud
and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
In general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the
tire.
8–26
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 26
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels. Make
sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other tires
on your vehicle.
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
y
EXPLOSION
OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-MATCH
TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa) TO SEAT
BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES.
y
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGEFOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
8–27
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 27
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Information on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1. Temporary tires
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
4. Diagonal
5. Rim diameter code
6. Load index & speed symbol
T115/70D16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the width
in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
8–28
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 28
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
M
81 mph
8–29
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 29
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.
SAMPLE
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and
psi for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up,
increasing the tire pressure.
8–30
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 30
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result
in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and
rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It results in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at
them.
Checking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold —meaning they are not hot
from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
8–31
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 31
2014/12/09 10:52:38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Glossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of manufacture.
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
8–32
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 32
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
Tire Inflation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) at the latest or sooner
if irregular wear develops. Mazda recommends to rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) to
help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
y
Incorrect
tire pressure
wheel alignment
y
Out-of-balance wheel
y
Severe braking
y
Improper
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 9-8) and inspect the lug nuts for
tightness.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or
studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be weakened if
rotated from side to side.
8–33
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 33
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could result
in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The period
in which the tire was manufactured (both week and year) is indicated by a 4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.
8–34
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 34
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Safety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate good
driving habits for your own benefit.
y
Observe
posted speed limits and drive at speeds that are safe for the existing weather
conditions
y
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
y
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
y
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire
or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until
you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire is underinflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with your spare tire.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest vehicle or tire dealer to
have the vehicle inspected.
8–35
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 35
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to tow a
trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide
maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize
yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's suspension
system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure, handling or steering
problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the distance
required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail completely,
particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a combination of the size of
the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.
8–36
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 36
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed
to carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE COMBINATION
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg or
XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer installed
equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted
from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be accurate.
8–37
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 37
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
8–38
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 38
2014/12/09 10:52:39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg (849
lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) - 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) - (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2) lbs)
= 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight
cargo
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door frame
or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
8–39
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 39
2014/12/09 10:52:40
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
WARNING
Never Exceed Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and could
result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling, performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, or loss of
control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
GCW
8–40
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 40
2014/12/09 10:52:41
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
WARNING
Never Exceed GVWR or GAWR Specifications:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
8–41
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 41
2014/12/09 10:52:41
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
8–42
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 42
2014/12/09 10:52:41
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer System
8–43
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 43
2014/12/09 10:52:41
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
8–44
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 44
2014/12/09 10:52:43
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Type A
U.S.A. and Canada
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC09 IC:279B-MBLUEC09
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term “IC: ” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with
installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
compliance.
Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service
y
U.S.A.
Phone:
800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
y
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
Web:
8–45
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 45
2014/12/09 10:52:43
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Mexico
y
Brief
description: Bluetooth module for Hands-free telephone and streaming audio
and address of the importer: Refer to "MEXICO" (page 8-12) in Importer/
Distributor section.
y
Brand name of the product: Johnson Controls Inc.
y
Model name of the product: MAZ
y
Names and addresses of where the warranty can be served: Refer to "MEXICO" (page
8-12) in Importer/Distributor section.
y
Names and addresses of where to acquire spare parts, consumables and accessories: Refer
to "MEXICO" (page 8-12) in Importer/Distributor section.
y
Warranty period, items covered by the warranty and its possible limitations or exceptions:
Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailed warranty information.
y
Warranty procedure:
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
y
Electrical specifications:
Voltage: 9-16V, Frequency: 2.4Ghz, Current: 270mA(Typ)
y
Name
8–46
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 46
2014/12/09 10:52:44
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Type B
U.S.A. and Canada
8–47
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 47
2014/12/09 10:52:44
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Mexico
Smart Brake Support (SBS)/Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)/Distance
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
8–48
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 48
2014/12/09 10:52:45
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do
some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the
chart below.
If they do not have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
9999-95-073B-16
2016 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)
9999-MX-073B-16
2016 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)
9999-95-053G-16
2016 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)
9999-MX-053G-16
2016 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)
9999-95-003C-16
2016 OWNER'S MANUAL (English)
9999-EC-003C-16
2016 OWNER'S MANUAL (French)
9999-PR-003C-16
2016 OWNER'S MANUAL (Spanish)
9999-95-083F-16
2016 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS
9999-95-078C-16NAV
2016 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
(English)
9999-EC-078C-16NAV
2016 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
(English and French)
9999-PR-078C-16NAV
2016 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
(Spanish)
WORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and
chassis.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system.
OWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.
This is not a technician's manual.
SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.
8–49
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 49
2014/12/09 10:52:45
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation
system. This is not a technician's manual.
8–50
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 50
2014/12/09 10:52:45
9
Specifications
Technical information about your Mazda.
Identification Numbers ...................................................................... 9-2
Vehicle Information Labels ........................................................... 9-2
Specifications ...................................................................................... 9-4
Specifications ................................................................................ 9-4
Personalization Features ................................................................. 9-10
Personalization Features ............................................................. 9-10
9–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:52:45
Specifications
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Information Labels
Vehicle Identification Number
Chassis Number
Open the cover shown in the figure to
check the chassis number.
The vehicle identification number legally
identifies your vehicle. The number is on a
plate attached to the cowl panel located on
the left corner of the dashboard. This plate
can easily be seen through the windshield.
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label (U.S.A. and
Canada)
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Label (U.S.A. and Canada)
9–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:52:45
Specifications
Identification Numbers
Tire Pressure Label
Engine Number
Forward
9–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:52:46
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
Engine
Item
Specification
Type
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder
Bore × Stroke
83.5 × 91.2 mm (3.29 × 3.59 in)
Displacement
1,997.6 ml (1,997.6 cc)
Compression ratio
13.0
Electrical System
Item
Battery
Classification
12V-60Ah/20HR or 12V-65Ah/20HR
Spark-plug number
Mazda Genuine spark plug*1
PE5R-18-110 or PE5S-18-110
*1 The spark plugs provide the SKYACTIV-G its optimum performance. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on
the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
Lubricant Quality
Lubricant
Engine oil
Coolant
Automatic transaxle fluid
Classification
Refer to Recommended Oil on page 6-27.
FL-22 type
Mazda Genuine ATF FZ
Transfer case oil
Mazda Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil SG1
Rear differential oil
Mazda Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil SG1
Brake fluid
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
NOTE
Refer to Introduction on (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
9–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:52:46
Specifications
Specifications
Capacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Engine oil
Coolant
Item
Capacity
With oil filter replacement
4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt)
Without oil filter replacement
4.0 L (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt)
U.S.A. and Canada
5.8 L (6.1 US qt, 5.1 Imp qt)
Mexico
6.1 L (6.4 US qt, 5.4 Imp qt)
Automatic transaxle fluid
7.8 L (8.2 US qt, 6.9 Imp qt)
Transfer case oil
0.40 L (0.42 US qt, 0.35 Imp qt)
Rear differential oil
0.35 L (0.37 US qt, 0.31 Imp qt)
2WD
Fuel tank
AWD
48.0 L (12.7 US gal, 10.6 Imp gal)
U.S.A. and Canada
45.0 L {11.9 US gal, 9.90 Imp gal}
Mexico
44.0 L (11.6 US gal, 9.68 Imp gal)
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
Dimensions
U.S.A. and Canada
Item
Vehicle specification
Overall length
4,275 mm (168.3 in)
Overall width
1,765 mm (69.5 in)
Overall height
1,550 mm (61.0 in)
Front tread
1,525 mm (60.0 in)
Rear tread
1,520 mm (59.8 in)
Wheelbase
2,570 mm (101.2 in)
Mexico
Item
Vehicle specification
Overall length
4,275 mm (168.3 in)
Overall width
1,765 mm (69.5 in)
Overall height
1,545 mm (60.8 in)
Front tread
1,525 mm (60.0 in)
Rear tread
1,520 mm (59.8 in)
Wheelbase
2,570 mm (101.2 in)
9–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:52:46
Specifications
Specifications
Weights
U.S.A. and Canada
Weight
Item
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
2WD
AWD
1,742 kg (3,840 lbs)
1,810 kg (3,990 lbs)
Front
933 kg (2,057 lbs)
958 kg (2,112 lbs)
Rear
812 kg (1,790 lbs)
860 kg (1,896 lbs)
Mexico
Weight
Item
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
GAW (Permissible axle load)
2WD
AWD
Total
1,742 kg (3,840 lbs)
1,807 kg (3,984 lbs)
Front
910 kg (2,006 lbs)
929 kg (2,048 lbs)
Rear
832 kg (1,834 lbs)
878 kg (1,936 lbs)
Front
930 kg (2,050 lbs)
952 kg (2,099 lbs)
Rear
887 kg (1,955 lbs)
931 kg (2,052 lbs)
Air Conditioner
The type of refrigerant used is indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine
compartment. Check the label before recharging the refrigerant. Refer to Climate Control
System on page 5-2.
Item
Refrigerant Type
Classification
HFC134a (R-134a)
9–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:52:46
Specifications
Specifications
Light Bulbs
Exterior light
Category
Light bulb
Halogen headlights
Headlights
LED headlights
Wattage
UNECE*1(SAE)
High beam
65
HB3 (9005)
Low beam
55
H11 (H11)
High beam
LED*2
— (—)
Low beam
LED*2
— (—)
65
HB3 (9005)
With halogen headlights
Daytime running lights
With LED headlights
Front side-maker lights/Parking lights
With halogen headlights
With LED headlights
U.S.A. and Canada
Front turn signal lights
Mexico
LED*2
— (—)
5
W5W (—)
LED*2
— (—)
27/8
— (1157NA)
21
PY21W (—)
Fog lights*
LED*2
— (—)
Side turn signal lights*
LED*2
— (—)
High-mount brake light
LED*2
— (—)
Rear turn signal lights
21
WY21W (7443NA)
5
W5W (—)
With halogen headlights
Rear side-maker lights
With LED headlights
With halogen headlights
Brake lights/Taillights
With LED headlights
LED*2
— (—)
21/5
W21/5W (7443)
LED*2
— (—)
LED*2
— (—)
Reverse lights
18
W16W (921)
License plate lights
5
W5W (—)
Taillights (With LED headlights)
*1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
*2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
Interior light
Light bulb
Category
Wattage
UNECE*1
Overhead light (Front)/Map lights
8
—
Overhead light (Rear)
10
—
Luggage compartment light
5
—
*1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
*Some models.
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
9–7
2014/12/09 10:52:46
Specifications
Specifications
Tires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally
fitted to your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 6-41.
After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is
necessary to make the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-129.
Standard tire
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Inflation pressure
Tire size
Front
Rear
P215/60R16 94H
250 kPa (36 psi)
230 kPa (33 psi)
P215/50R18 92V
250 kPa (36 psi)
230 kPa (33 psi)
(Mexico)
Inflation pressure
Tire size
215/60R16 95V
215/50R18 92V
Up to 3 persons
—Full load
Front
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
260 kPa (2.6 bar, 38 psi)
Rear
210 kPa (2.1 bar, 30 psi)*1/
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)*2
330 kPa (3.3 bar, 48 psi)*1/
350 kPa (3.5 bar, 51 psi)*2
Front
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
260 kPa (2.6 bar, 38 psi)
Rear
210 kPa (2.1 bar, 30 psi)*1/
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)*2
330 kPa (3.3 bar, 48 psi)*1/
350 kPa (3.5 bar, 51 psi)*2
1 person's weight: About 75 kg
*1 2WD
*2 AWD
9–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:52:47
Specifications
Specifications
Temporary spare tire
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Tire size
T125/90D16 98M
Inflation pressure
420 kPa (60 psi)
(Mexico)
Tire size
185/60R16 86M
Inflation pressure
300 kPa (3.0 bar, 44 psi)
Lug nut tightening torque
When installing a tire, tighten the lug nut to the following torque.
108—147 N·m (12—14 kgf·m, 80—108 ft·lbf)
Fuses
Refer to Fuses on page 6-52.
9–9
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 9
2014/12/09 10:52:47
Specifications
Personalization Features
Personalization Features
The following personalization features can be set or changed by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Additionally, some of the personalization features can be changed by the customer
depending on the feature.
Personalization features which can be changed differ depending on the market and
specification.
Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen.
Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches.
Settings can be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Item
Smart City
Brake Support
(SCBS)
Refer to
Smart City
Brake Support
(SCBS) on
page 4-104.
Safety
Smart Brake
Support (SBS)
Refer to Smart
Brake Support
(SBS) on page
4-109.
Feature
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
The system can be
changed so that Smart
City Brake Support
(SCBS) does not
operate.*1
On
On/Off
The system can be
changed so that Smart
Brake Support (SBS)
does not operate.*1
On
On/Off
The distance at which
the collision warning
activates can be
changed.
Near
Near/Far
The volume of the
collision warning can be
changed.
High
High/Low/
Off
Settings change method
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Stopping
The Smart
City Brake
Support
(SCBS)
System
Operation on
page 4-108.
—
—
—
—
9–10
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 10
2014/12/09 10:52:47
Specifications
Personalization Features
Item
Available
Settings
Beep
Beep/
Rumbl.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
High
High/Mid/
Low
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
High
High/Low
Low
High/Low
Before
At/Before
The volume of the BSM
warning beep can be
changed.*3
High
High/
Low/
Off
The system can be
changed so that
Distance Recognition
Support System (DRSS)
does not operate.*1
On
On/Off
The distance at which
the vehicle ahead
indicator in the display
flashes can be changed.
Near
Far/
Medium/
Near
The warning sound
for the Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) can be
changed.*2
The volume
of the
Rumbl.
warning
sound for
Lane Departure the Lane
Departure
Warning
Warning
System
System
(LDWS)
Beep
(LDWS) can
Refer to Lane
be
changed.
Departure
Warning
The sensitivity of the
System
warning for the Lane
(LDWS) on
Departure Warning
page 4-74.
System (LDWS) can be
changed.
The warning timing
in which the Lane
Departure Warning
System (LDWS)
determines that
the vehicle may be
deviating from its lane
can be changed.
Safety
Blind Spot
Monitoring
(BSM) system
Refer to
Blind Spot
Monitoring
(BSM) System
on page 4-80.
Distance
Recognition
Support System
(DRSS)
Refer to
Distance
Recognition
Support System
(DRSS) on
page 4-87.
Settings change method
Factory
Setting
Feature
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9–11
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 11
2014/12/09 10:52:47
Specifications
Personalization Features
Item
Power door
lock
Refer to Auto
Lock/Unlock
Function on
page 3-15.
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
Changes the auto
lock/unlock function
setting for all the doors
according to the vehicle
speed, the vehicle
power supply condition,
and the selector lever
position.
Lock:
When
Driving
Unlock:
IGN Off
Lock:
When
Driving
Unlock: In
Park/
Lock: Out
of Park
Unlock: In
Park/
Lock:
Shifting
Out of
Park/
Lock:
When
Driving
Unlock:
IGN Off/
Lock:
When
Driving/
Off
The method for
unlocking the doors
using the transmitter
can be changed.
Driver's:
Once, All
Doors:
Twice
All Doors:
Once/
Driver's:
Once, All
Doors:
Twice
Feature
Vehicle
Keyless entry
system
Refer to
Keyless Entry
The time required for
System on page the doors to relock
3-3.
automatically after
unlocking with the
transmitter can be
changed.
90 seconds/
60 seconds 60 seconds/
30 seconds
Settings change method
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Auto Lock/
Unlock
Function on
page 3-15.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Transmitter
on page 3-4.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
—
9–12
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 12
2014/12/09 10:52:47
Specifications
Personalization Features
Item
Feature
The method for
unlocking the doors
using the request
switch/transmitter can
be changed.
Advanced
keyless entry
system
Refer to
Advanced
Keyless Entry
System on page
3-8.
Vehicle
Illumination
entry
Refer to
Illuminated
Entry System
on page 5-132.
Factory
Setting
Driver's:
Once, All
Doors:
Twice
Available
Settings
All Doors:
Once/
Driver's:
Once, All
Doors:
Twice
The volume of the
answer-back beep
during advanced keyless
entry system operation
can be changed.
Medium
High/
Medium/
Low/
Off
The function to
automatically lock the
doors when leaving the
vehicle while carrying
the key can be changed.
Off
On/Off
Settings change method
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Locking,
Unlocking
with Request
Switch (With
the advanced
keyless
function) on
page 3-12.
Refer to
Transmitter
on page 3-4.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Locking,
Unlocking
with Request
Switch (With
the advanced
keyless
function) on
page 3-12.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
The time required
for the doors to
relock automatically
after unlocking with
the request switch/
transmitter can be
changed.
90 seconds/
60 seconds 60 seconds/
30 seconds
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
The time required for
the interior lamp to turn
off automatically can
be changed (prevents
battery depletion when
a door is open/ajar).
60 minutes/
30 minutes 30 minutes/
10 minutes
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
The time required for
the interior lamp to turn
off automatically after
all doors are closed can
be changed.
15 seconds
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
15 seconds/
7.5 seconds
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
—
—
—
—
9–13
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 13
2014/12/09 10:52:48
Specifications
Personalization Features
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
Auto-wiper
control
The auto-wiper control
Refer to
function can be
Windshield
changed.
Wipers and
Washer on page
4-47.
On
On/Off*4
Daytime
running lights
The function of the
Refer to
daytime running lights
Daytime
can be changed.
Running Lights
on page 4-45.
On
On/
Off
Item
Vehicle
Feature
Auto headlight
off*5
Refer to
Headlights on
page 4-41.
The time required
for headlights to turn
off after ignition is
switched off can be
changed.
Auto-light
control
Refer to
Headlights on
page 4-41.
The headlight
illumination on/
off timing based on
surrounding lightness/
darkness can be
changed.
Settings change method
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
120 seconds/
90 seconds/
30 seconds 60 seconds/
30 seconds/
Off*6
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Medium
High/
Med. High/
Medium/
Med. Low/
Low
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
High Beam
Control System
The High Beam Control
(HBC)
System (HBC) function
Refer to High
can be changed.*1
Beam Control
System (HBC)
on page 4-71.
On
On/Off
Adaptive
Front Lighting
System (AFS)
Refer to
Adaptive
Front Lighting
System (AFS)
on page 4-70.
The Adaptive Front
Lighting System
(AFS) function can be
changed.*1
On
On/Off
Lights-on
reminder*7
Refer to LightsOn Reminder
on page 7-39.
The volume of the
lights-on reminder
warning alarm can be
changed.
Off
High/Low/
Off
Coming home
light system
Refer to
Coming Home
Light System
on page 4-44.
The time required for
the headlights to turn
off after closing all
of the doors can be
changed.
120 seconds/
90 seconds/
30 seconds 60 seconds/
30 seconds/
Off
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9–14
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 14
2014/12/09 10:52:48
Specifications
Personalization Features
Item
Leaving home
light system
Refer to
Leaving Home
Light System
on page 4-45.
Vehicle
Feature
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
The leaving home light
system function can be
changed.
On
On/Off
High
High/Low
On
On/Off
mi or km
mi/km
Turn indicator
Refer to Turn
The turn indicator beep
and Lanevolume level can be
Change Signals changed.
on page 4-46.
Three-flash turn
signal
The three-flash turn
Refer to Threefunction can be
Flash Turn
changed.
Signal on page
4-47.
System
Distance unit
The distance unit can be
changed.
Language
The display language
can be changed.*8
English
English/
French/
Spanish
Temperature
unit
The temperature unit
can be changed.
°F or °C
°F/°C
Fuel
Ending display
Economy
Monitor
Refer
to Fuel
Economy
Monitor
Fuel economy
on page
resetting
4-62.
procedure
Setting can be changed
so that the ending
display of the Fuel
Economy Monitor is
displayed.
Setting can be changed
so that the fuel economy
reset is linked with the
trip meter reset.
Off
Off
On/Off
On/Off
Settings change method
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer to
Settings
on page
5-53.
Refer
to Fuel
Economy
Monitor
on page
4-62.
Refer
to Fuel
Economy
Monitor
on page
4-62.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9–15
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 15
2014/12/09 10:52:48
Specifications
Personalization Features
Item
Active
driving
display
Refer to
Active
Driving
Display
on page
4-22.
Turn-by-Turn
(TBT)
Feature
Setting can be changed
so that the Turn-by-Turn
(TBT) of the Active
driving display is not
displayed.
Factory
Setting
On
Available
Settings
On/Off
Settings change method
Refer to
Active
driving
display
on page
4-22.
—
*1 Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and Mazda recommends
that these systems remain On.
*2 For vehicles with an audio system other than the on-screen function type, the warning sound cannot be changed.
The warning sound is only a beep.
*3 Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The
volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.
*4 If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever
position is set to intermittent operation.
*5 If the setting is changed to Off, the following operation is performed according to the headlight switch position:
y
y
At
position: Headlights turn off immediately after the ignition is switched off.
At any position other than
: Headlights do not turn off after the ignition is switched off.
*6 When set to Off, the lights-on reminder is operable.
*7 The setting of the lights-on reminder can be changed with the time setting of auto headlight off function set to
Off. Refer to Lights-On Reminder on page 7-39.
*8 Available only in display from the center display.
9–16
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 16
2014/12/09 10:52:48
10
Index
10–1
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 1
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
A
B
Accessory Socket .............................. 5-133
Active Driving Display ....................... 4-22
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)................................................... 4-70
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ......................................... 8-18
Advanced Key
Advanced keyless entry system ...... 3-8
Operational range ............................ 3-9
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Beep ......................... 7-39
Air Bag Systems ................................. 2-35
All-Wheel Drive AWD Operation....... 4-66
Ambient Temperature Display ............ 4-19
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............ 4-58
Audio Control Switch
Adjusting the Volume .................... 5-56
Mute Switch .................................. 5-56
Seek Switch ................................... 5-56
Audio System ...................................... 5-14
AUX/USB/iPod mode ................... 5-57
Antenna ......................................... 5-14
Audio Control Switch ................... 5-55
Audio Set (Type A) ....................... 5-22
Audio Set (Type B) ....................... 5-34
Operating Tips for Audio System ... 5-14
Satellite Radio ............................... 5-45
Automatic Transaxle ........................... 4-30
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ........ 4-32
Direct Mode .................................. 4-39
Driving tips.................................... 4-40
Manual shift mode......................... 4-33
Shift-lock override ........................ 4-32
Shift-lock system........................... 4-32
Shift position indication ................ 4-31
Transaxle ranges ............................ 4-31
Warning light ................................. 4-31
Battery ................................................. 6-36
Maintenance .................................. 6-38
Replacement .................................. 6-38
Specifications .................................. 9-4
Battery runs out ................................... 7-18
Jump-Starting ................................ 7-18
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ............ 4-80
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
warning beep ....................................... 7-42
Bluetooth® ........................................... 5-73
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A) ......... 5-111
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B) ......... 5-113
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A) ... 5-95
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B) ... 5-101
Troubleshooting .......................... 5-128
Body Lubrication ................................ 6-32
Bottle Holder..................................... 5-135
Brakes
Brakes assist .................................. 4-56
Foot brake...................................... 4-54
Pad wear indicator ......................... 4-55
Parking brake ................................ 4-55
Warning light ................................. 4-55
Break-In Period ................................... 3-39
C
Capacities .............................................. 9-5
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 3-24
Cell Phones ......................................... 8-19
Child Restraint
Child-restraint precautions ............ 2-18
Child-restraint system installation ... 2-23
Installing child-restraint systems... 2-24
LATCH child-restraint systems ..... 2-31
Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ..... 3-18
10–2
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 2
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
Climate Control System ........................ 5-2
Fully Automatic Type .................... 5-10
Gas specifications ............................ 9-6
Manual Type.................................... 5-5
Operating Tips ................................. 5-2
Vent Operation ................................ 5-3
Clock ................................................... 5-26
Collision warning ................................ 7-42
Coming Home Light System .............. 4-44
Cruise Control ................................... 4-122
Cruise Control Switch ................. 4-122
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/
Cruise Set Indicator Light
(Green) ........................................ 4-123
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display ................................................ 4-19
Cup Holder ........................................ 5-134
Customer Assistance ............................. 8-2
D
Dashboard Illumination ...................... 4-18
Daytime Running Lights ..................... 4-45
Defogger
Mirror ............................................ 4-52
Rear window ................................. 4-52
Dimensions ........................................... 9-5
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) ................................................ 4-87
Door Locks.......................................... 3-10
Drive selection .................................... 4-64
Driving In Flooded Area ..................... 3-43
Driving Tips
Automatic transaxle ...................... 4-40
Break-in period.............................. 3-39
Driving in flooded area.................. 3-43
Driving on uneven road................. 3-45
Floor mat ....................................... 3-40
Hazardous driving ......................... 3-40
Overloading ................................... 3-44
Rocking the vehicle ....................... 3-41
Saving fuel and protection of the
environment................................... 3-39
Winter driving ............................... 3-41
Driving on Uneven Road .................... 3-45
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)....... 4-61
TCS/DSC Indicator Light ............. 4-61
E
Emergency Starting
Push-Starting ................................. 7-21
Starting a Flooded Engine ............. 7-21
Emergency Towing
Tiedown Hooks ............................. 7-25
Towing Description ....................... 7-24
Emission Control System.................... 3-23
Ending Display.................................... 4-63
Engine
Coolant .......................................... 6-29
Engine Compartment Overview.... 6-26
Exhaust gas.................................... 3-24
Hood release .................................. 6-24
Oil.................................................. 6-27
Essential information ............................ 6-2
Event Data Recorder ........................... 8-20
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 3-24
Exterior Care ....................................... 6-57
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance .... 6-62
Bright-Metal Maintenance ............ 6-61
Maintaining the Finish .................. 6-59
Plastic Part Maintenance ............... 6-63
10–3
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 3
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
F
Flasher
Hazard warning ............................. 4-53
Headlights ..................................... 4-41
Flat Tire ................................................. 7-3
Mounting the Spare Tire................ 7-13
Removing a Flat Tire....................... 7-9
Floor Mat ............................................ 3-40
Fluid
Brake ............................................. 6-31
Washer ........................................... 6-31
Fluids
Classification ................................... 9-4
Fog Lights ........................................... 4-46
Foot Brake........................................... 4-54
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) ....... 4-112
Front Seat .............................................. 2-4
Fuel
Filler lid and cap............................ 3-25
Gauge ............................................ 4-18
Requirements................................. 3-22
Tank capacity .................................. 9-5
Fuel Consumption Display ................. 4-63
Fuel Economy Monitor ....................... 4-62
Ending display............................... 4-63
Fuel consumption display ............. 4-63
Fuses ................................................... 6-52
Panel description ........................... 6-54
Replacement .................................. 6-52
G
Gauges................................................. 4-12
Glove Compartment .......................... 5-136
H
Hazard Warning Flasher...................... 4-53
Hazardous Driving .............................. 3-40
Head Restraint....................................... 2-8
Headlights
Coming home light system............ 4-44
Control........................................... 4-41
Flashing ......................................... 4-44
High-low beam .............................. 4-44
Leaving home light system ........... 4-45
Leveling......................................... 4-45
High Beam Control System (HBC) .... 4-71
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................... 4-56
Hood Release ...................................... 6-24
Horn .................................................... 4-53
I
i-ACTIVSENSE.................................. 4-68
Active Safety Technology ............. 4-68
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) ............................................. 4-70
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ...... 4-80
Camera and sensors ....................... 4-69
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) .......................................... 4-87
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) ... 4-112
High Beam Control System
(HBC) ............................................ 4-71
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) ......................................... 4-74
Laser Sensor ................................ 4-118
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC)......................................... 4-93
Pre-Crash Safety Technology ........ 4-68
Radar Sensors (Rear)................... 4-120
Radar sensor (front)..................... 4-115
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ... 4-90
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ........ 4-109
Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) ........................................ 4-104
If a Warning Light Turns On or
Flashes................................................. 7-27
If the Active Driving Display does not
operate ................................................. 7-45
Ignition
Switch.............................................. 4-4
10–4
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 4
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
Ignition not switched off (STOP) warning
beep ..................................................... 7-40
Illuminated Entry System ................. 5-132
Immobilizer System ............................ 3-35
Indicator Lights ................................... 4-27
Low engine coolant temperature ... 4-29
Wrench .......................................... 4-29
Inspecting Brake Fluid Level .............. 6-31
Inspecting Coolant Level .................... 6-29
Inspecting Engine Oil Level ............... 6-28
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level............ 6-31
Instrument Cluster............................... 4-12
Interior Care ........................................ 6-63
Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing ........................................ 6-65
Cleaning the Upholstery and Interior
Trim ............................................... 6-64
Cleaning the Window Interiors ..... 6-66
Dashboard Precautions .................. 6-63
Maintenance of the Active Driving
Display .......................................... 6-65
Interior Lights ................................... 5-131
Luggage Compartment Light ...... 5-131
Map Lights .................................. 5-131
Overhead Lights .......................... 5-131
Keys ...................................................... 3-2
Key suspend function ...................... 3-7
Transmitter ...................................... 3-4
J
M
Jack ....................................................... 7-5
Jump-Starting ...................................... 7-18
Maintenance
Information...................................... 6-2
Scheduled ........................................ 6-4
Maintenance Monitor .......................... 6-20
Map Lights ........................................ 5-131
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) ... 4-93
Close proximity warning ............... 4-96
Cruise control function................ 4-101
Display indication ......................... 4-96
Setting the system ......................... 4-97
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ................................. 7-42
Message Indicated on Display ............ 7-37
Meters and Gauges .............................. 4-12
Mirror Defogger .................................. 4-52
K
Key Suspend Function .......................... 3-7
Key left-in-luggage compartment warning
beep (With the advanced keyless
function) .............................................. 7-41
Key left-in-vehicle warning beep (With the
advanced keyless function) ................. 7-41
Keyless Entry System ........................... 3-3
Key removed from vehicle warning
beep ..................................................... 7-41
L
Label Information ................................. 9-2
Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-47
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)............................................... 4-74
LDWS switch ................................ 4-77
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
warning sound ..................................... 7-42
Laser Sensor ...................................... 4-118
Leaving Home Light System .............. 4-45
Liftgate ................................................ 3-18
Luggage compartment................... 3-21
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened ... 7-44
Light Bulbs
Replacement .................................. 6-45
Specifications .................................. 9-7
Lighting Control.................................. 4-41
Lights-on reminder.............................. 7-39
Lubricant Quality .................................. 9-4
Luggage Compartment Light ............ 5-131
10–5
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 5
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
Mirrors
Outside mirrors.............................. 3-28
Rearview mirror ............................ 3-29
Moonroof ............................................ 3-33
O
Odometer and Trip Meter...........4-15, 4-14
Outside Mirrors ................................... 3-28
Outside Temperature Display.............. 4-19
Over Rev. buzzer ................................. 7-43
Overhead Console ............................. 5-136
Overhead Lights ................................ 5-131
Overheating ......................................... 7-22
Overloading......................................... 3-44
Owner Maintenance
Closing the Hood........................... 6-25
Engine Compartment Overview.... 6-26
Key battery replacement ............... 6-38
Opening the Hood ......................... 6-24
Owner Maintenance Precautions... 6-22
P
Parking Brake...................................... 4-55
Personalization Features ..................... 9-10
Power Steering .................................... 4-67
Power Windows .................................. 3-30
Power steering warning buzzer ........... 7-42
R
Radar Sensor (Front) ......................... 4-115
Radar Sensors (Rear) ........................ 4-120
Rear Coat Hooks ............................... 5-138
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ........ 4-90
Rear Door Child Safety Locks ............ 3-18
Rear Seat ............................................... 2-6
Rear View Monitor............................ 4-130
Displayable range on the screen.. 4-132
Picture quality adjustment ........... 4-137
Rear view monitor operation....... 4-134
Rear view parking camera
location ........................................ 4-131
Switching to the rear view monitor
display ......................................... 4-131
Variance between actual aoad
conditions and displayed Image ... 4-136
Viewing the display ..................... 4-133
Rear Window Defogger ...................... 4-52
Rear Window Washer.......................... 4-51
Rear Window Wiper ............................ 4-51
Rearview Mirror.................................. 3-29
Recommended Oil .............................. 6-27
Recording of Vehicle Data .................. 8-21
Recreational Towing ........................... 3-46
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country ............................................... 8-17
Replacement
Fuse ............................................... 6-52
Key battery .................................... 6-38
Light Bulbs .................................... 6-45
Tires ............................................... 6-43
Wheel ............................................ 6-44
Wiper ............................................. 6-33
Request switch inoperable warning beep
(With the advanced keyless function) ... 7-41
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 3-41
S
SRS Air Bags
Front passenger occupant classification
system............................................ 2-52
How the SRS air bags work .......... 2-44
Limitations to SRS air bag ............ 2-50
Monitoring..................................... 2-57
SRS air bag deployment criteria ... 2-48
Supplemental restraint system
components ................................... 2-42
Safety Defects, Reporting ................... 8-13
10–6
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 6
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
Saving Fuel and Protection of the
Environment........................................ 3-39
Scheduled Maintenance ........................ 6-4
Seat Belt System ................................. 2-13
Automatic locking ......................... 2-12
Emergency locking........................ 2-12
Extender ........................................ 2-16
Pregnant women ............................ 2-12
Seat belt precautions ..................... 2-10
Seat belt warning beep ........................ 7-40
Seats
Front seat ......................................... 2-4
Head restraint .................................. 2-8
Rear seat .......................................... 2-6
Seat warmer..................................... 2-5
Security System
Immobilizer system ....................... 3-35
Theft-deterrent system .................. 3-37
Service Publications ............................ 8-49
Smart Brake Support (SBS) .............. 4-109
Collision warning ........................ 4-111
Smart Brake Support (SBS) indicator
light (red)..................................... 4-111
Stopping the Smart Brake Support
(SBS) system operation ............... 4-111
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ... 4-104
Spare Tire .............................................. 7-6
Specifications ........................................ 9-4
Speed Unit Selector............................. 4-13
Speedometer........................................ 4-13
Starting the Engine................................ 4-5
Steering Wheel .................................... 3-27
Horn............................................... 4-53
Storage Compartments ...................... 5-135
Glove compartment ..................... 5-136
Overhead console ........................ 5-136
Rear coat hooks ........................... 5-138
Sunshade ............................................. 3-34
Sunvisors ........................................... 5-131
T
Tachometer .......................................... 4-17
Theft-Deterrent System ....................... 3-37
Tiedown
Hook .............................................. 7-25
Tire Information .................................. 8-24
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..... 4-126
Tire inflation pressure warning beep ... 7-41
Tires .................................................... 6-41
Flat Tire ........................................... 7-3
Replacing a Tire ............................ 6-43
Replacing a Wheel ........................ 6-44
Snow tires ...................................... 3-42
Specifications .................................. 9-8
Temporary Spare Tire .................... 6-43
Tire Inflation Pressure ................... 6-41
Tire Rotation ................................. 6-42
Tire chains ..................................... 3-43
Uniform tire quality grading system
(UTQGS) ....................................... 8-22
Towing
Recreational towing ...................... 3-46
Trailer Towing ............................... 3-46
Towing Description ............................. 7-24
Traction Control System (TCS) .......... 4-59
TCS/DSC Indicator Light ............. 4-59
TCS OFF Indicator Light .............. 4-60
TCS OFF Switch ........................... 4-60
Transmitter ............................................ 3-4
Trip Computer ............................4-20, 4-15
Trip Meter ..................................4-14, 4-15
Trouble
Battery runs out ............................. 7-18
Emergency Starting ....................... 7-21
Emergency Towing........................ 7-24
Flat Tire ........................................... 7-3
Overheating ................................... 7-22
Parking in an Emergency ................ 7-2
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened ... 7-44
Turn Signals ........................................ 4-46
10–7
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 7
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Index
V
Vanity Mirrors ................................... 5-131
Vehicle Information Labels ................... 9-2
Wiper
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades ............................................ 6-33
Replacing Rear Window Wiper
Blade ............................................. 6-34
W
Warning Lights.................................... 4-25
Warning Sound is Activated................ 7-39
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Beep ................... 7-39
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
warning beep ................................. 7-42
Collision warning .......................... 7-42
Ignition not switched off (STOP)
warning beep ................................. 7-40
Key left-in-luggage compartment
warning beep (With the advanced
keyless function) ........................... 7-41
Key left-in-vehicle warning beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ..... 7-41
Key removed from vehicle warning
beep ............................................... 7-41
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) warning sound ................ 7-42
Lights-on reminder ........................ 7-39
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ........................... 7-42
Over Rev. buzzer ........................... 7-43
Power steering warning buzzer ..... 7-42
Request switch inoperable warning
beep (With the advanced keyless
function) ........................................ 7-41
Seat belt warning beep .................. 7-40
Tire inflation pressure warning
beep ............................................... 7-41
Warranty .............................................. 8-15
Weights.................................................. 9-6
Windows
Power windows ............................. 3-30
Windshield Washer ............................. 4-51
Windshield Wipers .............................. 4-48
Winter Driving .................................... 3-41
10–8
CX-3_8EH2-EA-15B_Edition1.indb 8
2014/12/09 10:52:49
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement